Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 2014-R0184 - Contract - Pharr And Company - Landwer House Renovation - 05/22/2014
Resolution No. 2014-RO 184 May 22, 2014 Item No. 6.16 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, Contract No. 11838 for Landwer House Renovation, by and between the City of Lubbock and Pharr and Company, and related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council on ATTEST: May 22, 2C PZ-0-0'� 4 -,5)(- Rebe ca Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Mark rwoo Assistarif City Manager er Chief Information Officer APPROVED AS TO FORM: Chad Weaver, Assistant City Attorney vwxcdocs'RES.Contract-Pharr & Company May 5, 2014 G SON, MAYOR PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT DATE: April 16, 2014 PROJECT NUMBER: RFP 14 -11838 -TF - Landwer House Renovation Proposal of Pharr and Company (hereinafter called Offeror) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Ladies and Gentlemen: The Offeror, in compliance with your Request for Proposals for the construction of a Landwer House Renovation having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to offerors, notice to offerors and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. BASE BID PROPOSAL ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT MATERIALS LABOR Base bid consists of the materials and labor L,4) 1 necessary for the Landwer LS ��®O House renovation, as specified herein, TOTAL LUMP SUM � eo $ 74s/0O O DURATION 1. Contractors proposed CONTRUCTION TIME for completion: TOTAL CALENDAR DAYS: 150 Offeror hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within 150 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Offeror hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $150 for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. 4 ;h-lp Offeror's Initials Offeror understands and agrees that this proposal submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 29 of the General Instructions to Offerors. Offeror understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formality in the proposing. The Offeror agrees that this proposal shall be good for a period of 60 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving proposals. The undersigned Offeror hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to commence work on the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has proposed; as provided in the contract documents. Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that offeror will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Offeror's Initials Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for ----------------------------------------- Dollars (S ------------ ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of Five Percent of Total Bid Amount Dollars (S ---5% --- ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within 10 business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Offeror shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. (Seal if Offeror is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secreta 'mmy R Pharr Offeror acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. 1 Addenda. No. Addenda No. _ Addenda No. Date 4/11/2014 Date Date Date Date: April 16, 2014 prized gnature Jimmy R. Pharr (Printed or Typed Name) Pharr and Company Company P O Box 2791 Address Lubbock City, Texas Lubbock County 79408 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 - 763-5263 Fax: 806 - 763-5843 Email: _jimmy@pharrco.com FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. 75-2187285 CITY OF LUBBOCK REQUEST FOR LEGAL SERVICES Date Submitted: 05/05/2014 From: Teofilo Flores Department: Purchasing Phone number: Ext 2168 Resolution request for: PO Contract (Please check appropriate contract type) Unit Price Construction Contract Lump Sum Construction Contract Professional Service Agreement Service Contract RFP 14 -11838 -TF / 11838 Bid and Contract Number: Landwer House Renovation Contract Name: Vendor's Legal Name: Pharr and Company Vendor's Location (City, State): Lubbock,TX Additional Comments (Not required): Your Department's Assistant City Manager: Please Return to: Requestor Purchasing Mark Yearwood, Assistant City Manager Chief Information Officer BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENSED IN TEXAS DATE BY: CONTRACT AWARD DATE: May 22, 2014 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR Landwer House Renovation RFP 14-11838-TF CONTRACT 11838 PROJECT NUMBER: 92287 City of Lubbock TEXAS CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas Page Intentionally Left Blank bb'of ock TEXAS ADDENDUM] Architect's Addendum No.1 & Site Viewing RFP 14-11838-TF Landwer House Renovation DATE ISSUED: April 11, 2014 CLOSE DATE & TIME: April 16, 2014 at 2:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Request for Proposals (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. Proposers are invited to review the following: 1. Proposers' attention is directed to the Architect's ADDENDUM NO. 1, attached. 2. The Landwer House building will be open for viewing the interior on Monday, April 14, 2014 from 10:00 am to 12:00 pm. Questions will not be permitted during this site visit. Please contact Facilities Management at 806-775-2201 upon arrival and departure. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: City of Lubbock Teofilo Flores Buyer P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2164 or Emailed to TYFlores(c mylubbock.us THANK YOU, It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the proposer's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Director of Purchasing & Contract Management if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Purchasing Director no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. A R C H I T€ C T 10 April 20114 City of Lubbock Landwer House Renovation 1205 N. University Ave, Lubbock, TX ADDENDUM NO.1 NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS: The following shall be incorporated in and become a part of the original drawings and specification of the above referenced project dated 7March2014. Please acknowledge receipt of this addendum by noting it on your proposal. 1. Replace the Floor Finishes Legend located on sheet A-8 with the following: 2. Sheet A-5 add General Plan Note #6: Concrete porches, stoops, landings, steps and ramps shall have a broom finish. 3. SHEET L-101: Revise note D-106 to read "Remove existing concrete ramp and portion of adjacent existing sidewalk. 4. SHEET L-102: Refer to Attachment "A" for location of revised Key Note numbers as noted on the attachment. 5. SHEET L-103: Add Detail Reference Symbols. Refer to Attachment "B". 4617 8th Street • Lubbock, Texas 79416 • 806. 790. 7114 • m.crites@att.net 6. SHEET L-104: Add dimensions for parking stall widths, from west to east: 9'-0", 9'-01/1 8'-0", 9'-6" 7. SHEET L-106: Refer to Revised Plant Schedule as shown on Attachment „C„ 8. SHEET L-109: Add Detail A-3 "Concrete Curbs", Attachment "D". 9. Refer to the attached drawing P-102, Attachment "E" revising the gas line size to 2". These addenda Items are to be included and become part of the Contract Documents. END OF ADDENDUM NO.1 4617 8th Street . Lubbock, Texas 79416 • 806. 790. 7114 0 m.crites@att.net LANDWER HOUSE RENOVATION ADDENDUM #1 SHEET L-1 02 ATTACHMENT ,y .41 03 v 4m I+M+ }1{++n 1+11 04.10.14 d a .a a44 - d I 6 d ADDENDUM #1 SHEET L-1 03 LANDWER HOUSE RENOVATION ATTACHMENT "B" LANDWER HOUSE RENOVATION i ADDENDUM #1 SHEET L-1 06 ATTACHMENT " C" C �a =7 �� . �50g ��P' FOF� 04.10.14 REVISED PLANT SCHEDULE -ADDENDUM #1 C� NORTH ;� �r,aNIGAL NAMe UMMON wM= cur 5 .:rue edulle 4.ncr Fine B f B :2 L lm- p—IPO11a 'Laceboek Elm' LOGebark Elm Tree 3" Calla— @OTANIGAL NAME COMMON NAME �pig 14 6aillordio pulchelia FlrewhaeI I Sol e seperaloe parvifloro Red Yucca 5 gal 54 Machaeranthera tancwetlfolla Tchoka Daisy I gal b Mlscarlthus sinensis 16ro011limus' Molder 6rass 5901 Ib Porayskia atri+lkifolla Rues ion Soae I gal 3 Rosmorinus offirinalls 'Arp' Arp Rosemary I gal 9 Solvio gr"ll Navajo Bright Red' Autum Sage 1 gal 1'7 Sedum x 'Auturm Joy' Aubu Joy Sedum 1 Sal 28 Stipa QrMdll Stipp brass 1 gal 16 Yucca row-Afolla 'Color Guard' Soft Loaf Yucca 5 gal Ln 0 I � J w F ~ w cn w w cn � DO p SIDEWALK p `t 00 — D 'lillilllll-._ IIIII�1-.- COMPACTED SOIL _- 8' MULCH Emlovwj A) 8" CURB 0 B) 12" CURB CONCRETE CURBS 1 1/2" = 1'—O" PLANTING BED ' i� MULCH �o ADDENDUM #1 F OF �� SHEET L-1 09 LANDWER HOUSE RENOVATION 04.10.14 ATTACHMENT "D" CAP All UNUSED PIUWING V[xls (ALWVE) VCO.S\�S—X I'V IR .,IS .. CANED ITT: -1 -1• (1) CONNECT NEW MAZER LINE TO EXISTING AT THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION, FIELD VERILY PRIM TO STARTING BMW. ix 9IINC IUNNN0IORN I (II jRI CRCI DNN 4SYAAIING WM1, CMEVEN TO IRRACTDRTS1YlI SEAYAPPICXIMTE IPTIC1.11GI.ND REPA,IRRYAMH l A. CLEAIGUTS. RM OUT ALL EXISTING SEWERS TO REBA IY. 1,3,1 PROVIDE NEW PLUNGING VENTS FM ALL MEW PLTWINC FIXTURES TIE IOUTHER AND (M1110 TO EXISTING PTUTRINC VENTS. FIELD VERIFY AND YININIIE NEB Poor PENETRATIONS. Tom. S PIPING 10 LX iSIINC Al S APPRO%INATL I -ANION, -'IUNKI.I.-D AS IWICAi[D A- RISE '' ON %TFRIM �DA1 Nt TO WIM). TN IELD VERIFY FXISTINC WIN link. COORDINATE IN IN OAS CMPANY 10 PROVIDE WN REOUIREO. RWMU FVE F%ISIING SFD RIS(AS TO BUILDING Blt: PATEN 10 YAtCN EXISTING (CAP UNOLRCPWNG). el PROV mt DMtsnc vnTTR RISER IN Nul. i -- I' GAS -•-1• CAS TWO TOM , NA If WItN 1 N ITT OWN, tWxACES - Je8 WN I ANDSCAPIN 1 YID YBN WANING TOTAL T2,11 0 WN To - •Ie NGI1 I "S IR Ens [P -- RISE 10 B' ABOVE MADE _.. I• CAS 1[RVNC 11[EV[ GAS PIPING IN All CONCIAL1. AREAS IN •SNAP LOG• ON EOUIVALENI SITE— m FD NEW I- VIR CdNV511. AIR J/1•W PROVI D(O M L SAW CUT AND PAIGO TD Y.A1CN i CO ( � L ,ND WER FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING a„- City of Lubbock, TX Purchasing and Contract Management Contractor Checklist for RFP 14-11838-TF Before submitting, your bid, please ensure you have completed and included the tbllowing documents in the 11- order they are listed, The contractor is only to submit (1) one original copy of every item listed, 11 X Carefully read and understand the plans and specifications and properly complete the BID SUBMITTAL FORM. Bid submittal form MUST be completed in blue or black ink or by typewriter. Signatures must be original, in blue or black ink, and by hand. The bidder binds himself on acceptance of his bid to execute a contract and any required bonds, according to the accompanying forms, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated below. Include corporate seal and Secretary's signature, Identify addenda received (if any). Include firm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number. X 2. Include BID BOND or CASHIER'S OR CERTIFIED CHECK as your bid surety, Failure to provide a bid surety WILL result in automatic rejection of your bid. 3. X Complete and sign the CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT. This must include the signature of the agent or broker. Contractor's signature must be original. 4. X Clearly mark the bid number, title, due date and time and your company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. 5. X Ensure your bid is RECEIVED by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office prior to the deadline, Late bids will not be accepted. 6. X Contractor's Statement of Qualifications 7 X Complete and sign the CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT. This must include the signature of the agent or broker. Contractor's signature must be original. 8. X Complete and sign the SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE All "YES" responses must be explained in detail and submitted with Bid. 9X Complete and sign the SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION. Include firin's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner "s SOCIAL SECURITY number. to. X Complete and submit the PROPOSED LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS, DOCUMENTS REOUIREDWITHIN SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS AFTER CLOSING: 11, X Complete and submit the FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS. FAILURE TO PROVIDE ANY OF THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN VOtJT R BID BEING DEEMED NON -RESPONSIVE AND, THEREFORE, NOT FURTHER EVALUATED. PLEASE INCLUDE THIS COMPLETED PAGE AS THE FIRST PAGE OF YOUR BID SUBMITTAL. Pharr and Company (Type or Print Company Name) Page Intentionally Left Blank 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 11 12 13 NOTICE TO OFFERORS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE § 2267 PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM — (must be submitted by published due date & time) 4-1. LUMP SUM PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM 4-2. CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS 4-3. CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT 4-4. SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE 4-5. SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION 4-6. PROPOSED LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS POST -CLOSING DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS — (to be submitted no later than seven business days after the close date when proposals are due) 5-1. FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT DAVIS-BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS (IF APPLICABLE) SPECIFICATIONS Page Intentionally Left Blank NOTICE TO OFFERORS Pate Intentionally Left Blank NOTICE TO OFFERORS RFP 14-11838-TF Sealed proposals addressed to Marta Alvarez, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Room 204, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 p.m. on April 16, 2014 or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: Landwer House Renovation After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the proposer to ensure that his proposal is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. The Contractor is only required to submit one original copy of every item listed on the Contractor Checklist in the proposal submittal. Proposals are due at 2:00 p.m. on April 16, 2014, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the proposals on May 8, 2014, at the City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all proposals and waive any formalities. The successful proposer will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful proposer will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $50,000. Said statutory bonds shall be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of "A" or better. The bond must be in a form accepted by the City Attorney and must be dated the same as the Contract Award date. Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that proposer will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds within ten (10) business days after notice of award of the contract to the Offerror. FAILURE OF THE PROPOSER TO INCLUDE PROPOSAL SECURITY WITH THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL SHALL CONSTITUTE A NON -RESPONSIVE PROPOSAL AND RESULT IN DISQUALIFICATION OF THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL. It shall be each proposer's sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform Offerror regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the proposal submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -proposal conference on such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the proposal submitted. There will be a pre -proposal conference on April 8, 2014 at 10:00 A.M., in the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office, Lubbock City Hall, Room 204, Lubbock, TX 79401. The estimated budget for the construction phase of this project is $750,000. Attention of each proposer is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to offerors. Each offerors attention is further directed to Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all offerors that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit proposals in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre - proposal meetings and proposal openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you require special assistance, please contact the Purchasing and Contract Management Office at (806) 775-2175 write to Post Office Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK, 'Marta .Alvarez Marta Alvarez DIRECTOR OF PURCHASING & CONTRACT MANAGEMENT GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS Pate Intentionally Left Blank GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS PROPOSAL DELIVERY. TIME & DATE The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive proposals to furnish Landwer House Renovation per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed proposals will be received no later than 2:00 p.m., April 16, 2014 at the office listed below. Any proposal received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the proposer. Each proposal and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left- hand corner: "RFP 14-11838-TF, Landwer House Renovation" and the proposal opening date and time. Offerors must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Proposals must be addressed to: Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing and Contract Management City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.1 Offerors are responsible for making certain proposals are delivered to the Purchasing Contract Managers Office. Mailing of a proposal does not ensure that it will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If proposer does not hand deliver proposal, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.2 Proposals may be delivered in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. Only written proposals submitted in conformance with the Instruction to Offerrors will be considered responsive and evaluated or award of a Contract. 1.3 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening proposals through an addendum. 2 PRE -PROPOSAL MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing offerors with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Request for Proposals (RFP) documents, a non - mandatory pre -proposal conference will be held on April 8, 2014 at 10:00 A.M., in the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office, Lubbock City Hall, Room 204, Lubbock, TX 79401. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective proposer they represent. A site visit may be scheduled following the pre - proposal meeting. 2.2 It is the proposer's responsibility to attend the pre -proposal meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre - proposal meeting to offerors who do not attend the pre -proposal meeting. ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the RFP are made by ADDENDA information available over the Internet at www.bidsync.com. We strongly suggest that you check for any addenda a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of the response deadline. BUSINESSES WITHOUT INTERNET ACCESS may use computers available at most public libraries. 3.2 Any proposer in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Manager. At the request of the proposer, or in the event the Purchasing Manager deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Manager. Such addenda issued by the Purchasing Manager Office will be available over the Internet at http://www.bidsync.com and will become part of the proposal package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original RFP. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Manager Office no later than seven (7) calendar days before the proposal closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any explanation or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Manager Office in writing or in this RFP should be used in preparing proposal responses. All contacts that a proposer may have had before or after receipt of this RFP with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this proposal should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to offerors. 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each proposer shall carefully examine all RFP documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a proposal to ensure that their proposal meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a proposal, each proposer shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Request for Proposals. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the proposer from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Request for Proposals. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that the proposer fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If proposer does not notify the Purchasing Manager before offering of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than seven (7) calendar days prior to the opening of proposals. 5 PROPOSAL PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this REP does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a proposal. 5.2 The issuance of this RFP does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a proposal shall be paid by the proposer. 2 6 TRADE SECRETS, CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your proposal to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2 Proposals will be opened in a manner that avoids disclosure of the contents to competing offerors and keeps the proposals secret during negotiations. All proposals are open for public inspection after the contract is awarded, but trade secrets and confidential information in the proposals are not open for inspection. Tex. Loc. Govt. Code 252.049(b) 6.3 Marking your entire proposal CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. 7 LICENSES, PERMITS, TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the proposer is or may be required to pay. 8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES Prospective offerors are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their proposal submittal how they would utilize local resources. 9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 9.1 The proposer shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 9.2 By signing and executing this proposal, the proposer certifies and represents to the City the offeror has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this proposal. 10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 10.2 All offerors shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 11 PLANS FOR USE BY OFFERORS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a proposal on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a proposal without charge. The contract documents may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Offerors. 12 PROPOSER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the offerors responsibility to advise the Purchasing anager if anX language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City Purchasing Manager Office no later than seven (7) calendar days before the proposal closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. 12.2 NO PROPOSER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN SEVEN (7) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE PROPOSAL CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: Teofilo Flores, Buyer City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office 1625 13th Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: 806-775-2164 Email: TKFlores@mylubbock.us Bidsync: www.bidsvnc.com 13 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within 150 (One Hundred and Fifty) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful proposer. 13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 14 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 16 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying 4 with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 17 GUARANTEES 17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within TWO years from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will, upon written request, be furnished up to a maximum of ten sets of plans and specifications and related contract documents for use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the proposals have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a proposer the following information: 5 (a) The experience record of the proposer showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the proposer. (c) Equipment schedule. 20 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 21 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures, both known and unknown, cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, and/or the owning utility at the Contractor's expense. 22 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 23 EXPLOSIVES 23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted 23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 24 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful proposer shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful proposer shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 25 INSURANCE 25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be 6 furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 26 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 26.1 Attention of each proposer is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The proposer' attention is further directed to the requirements of Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the proposer's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in the contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on Sundays or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on Sundays or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on Sundays or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 26.4 House Bill 2015, signed by the Governor on June 14, 2013 and effective on January 1, 2014, authorizes a penalty to be imposed on a person who contracts for certain services with a governmental entity and who fails to properly classify their workers. This applies to subcontractors as well. Contractors and subcontractors who fail to properly classify individuals performing work under a governmental contract will be penalized $200 for each individual that has been misclassified (Texas Government Code Section 2155.001). 27 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily 7 cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors shall keep a record showing the name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or subcontractor in the construction of the public work and the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. This record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the City. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, $200 for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. House Bill 2015, signed by the Governor on June 14, 2013 and effective on January 1, 2014, authorizes a penalty to be imposed on a person who contracts for certain services with a governmental entity and who fails to properly classify their workers. This applies to subcontractors as well. Contractors and subcontractors who fail to properly classify individuals performing work under a governmental contract will be penalized $200 for each individual that has been misclassified (Texas Government Code Section 2155.001). 28 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated proposal price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the proposer without being considered. 29 PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL 29.1 The form shall be correctly filled in, stating the price in numerals for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the unit price and the extended total for a bid item, the unit price will be taken. A bid that has been opened may not be bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City, and all blank spaces in the changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. 29.2 If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. 29.3 Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Offerors, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 29.3.1 Proposer's name: 29.3.2 Proposal: RFP 14-11838-TF, Landwer House Renovation Proposal submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the proposals, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 30 31 29.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Proposer understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by proposer shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Offerors. (b) General Instructions to Offerors. (c) Proposer's Submittal Form. (d) Statutory Bonds (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (1) Insurance Certificates for Contractor and all Sub -Contractors. (j) All other documents made available to proposer for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. QUALIFICATIONS OF OFFERORS The proposer may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The proposer may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the proposer's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the proposer to perform the work, and the proposer shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The proposer's proposal may be deemed not to meet specifications or the proposal may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the proposer fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the proposer is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the proposer's qualifications shall include but not be limited to: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the proposer to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the proposer. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. (e) The safety record of the Contractor and proposed Sub -Contractors 9 (f) The experience and qualifications of key project personnel (g) Past experience with the Owner Before contract award, the recommended contractor for this project may be required to show that he has experience with similar projects that require the Contractor to plan his work efforts and equipment needs with City of Lubbock specifications in mind. Demonstration of experience shall include a complete list of ALL similar municipal and similar non -municipal current and completed projects for the past five (5) years for review. This list shall include the names of supervisors and type of equipment used to perform work on these projects. In addition, the Contractor may be required to provide the name(s) of supervisor(s) that will be used to perform work on this project in compliance with City of Lubbock specifications herein. 32 BASIS OF PROPOSALS AND SELECTION CRITERIA The City uses the Competitive Sealed Proposals procurement method as authorized by the Texas Legislature and further defined by Texas Local Government Code Section 271.116. The Maximum Point value is equal to 100 points. The weight factor is 60% for Price, 20% for Contractor Qualifications, 10% for Record of Performance, and 10% for Construction Time. The selection criteria used to evaluate each proposal includes the following: 32.1 60% PRICE: The quality of Offerors is not judged solely by a low initial cost proposal or, conversely, eliminated solely because of a high initial cost proposal. The following is the formula used when determining price as a factor for construction contract proposals. The lowest proposal price of all the proposals becomes the standard by which all price proposals are evaluated. One at a time, each proposal is evaluated by taking the lowest proposal price and dividing it by the price of the proposal being evaluated. That fraction is then multiplied by the maximum point value multiplied by the weight of the price factor for the price score. For Example: (Lowest Price/Current Proposal Price) x Maximum Point Value x Weight Factor = Price Score. 32.2 20% CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS: When evaluating a contractor's qualifications, the City uses the "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications" attached within and past experience with the contractor. The City may also interview the job superintendent at a time to be named after receipt of proposals. This criterion is subjectively evaluated and the formula is as follows: (Points X Weight = Score) with a maximum of five points allowable. Each evaluator assigns points based upon the responses the contractor provides in the "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications" And any past experience with the contractor. The "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications" is a minimum, and you may provide additional pertinent information relevant to the project for which you are submitting this proposal. 32.3 10% RECORD OF PERFORMANCE: This criterion is also more subjectively evaluated and the formula is as follows: (Points X Weight = Score). Each evaluator assigns points based upon the responses you provide in your "Safety Record Questionnaire" and the Contractors Experience Modification Ratio. The Contractor must submit this ratio with his bid. Contractors with an Experience Modification Ratio greater than 1 will be given a zero. The City may consider any incidents involving worker safety or safety of Lubbock residents, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor under the contractor's control. Evaluators base their rating primarily upon how well you document previous offenses with the date of the offense, location where the offense occurred, type of 10 offense, final disposition of the offense, and any penalty assessed as well as the Experience Modification Ratio 32.4 10% CONSTRUCTION TIME: This criterion is, as with price, objective and evaluators use the following formula when determining construction time as a factor for construction contract proposals. The lowest construction time proposal of all the proposals becomes the standard by which all the construction time proposals are evaluated. One at a time, each proposal is evaluated by taking the lowest construction time and dividing it by the construction time of the proposal being evaluated. That fraction is then multiplied by the maximum point value multiplied by the weight of the construction time factor for the construction time score. For example: (Lowest construction time/Current Proposal construction time) x Maximum Point Value x Weight Factor = Construction Time Score 32.5 EVALUATION PROCESS: Evaluators independently review and score each proposal. The committee meets, during which time the Committee Chairperson totals the individual scores. If the individual scores are similar, the Chairperson averages the scores then ranks offerors accordingly. If the scores are significantly diverse, the Chairperson initiates and moderates discussion to determine the reasons for the differences and ensures that all evaluators are fully knowledgeable of all aspects of the proposals. Scores may then be adjusted by the committee based on committee discussion. Please note that offerors with higher qualifications scores could be ranked higher than offerors with slightly better price scores. 32.6 The estimated budget for the construction phase of this project is $ 750,000 33 SELECTION 33.1 Selection shall be based on the responsible offeror whose proposal is determined to be the most advantageous to the City of Lubbock considering the relative importance of evaluation factors included in this RFP. 33.2 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT (CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES OR OTHER) HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL. 33.3 The City shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the City based on the published selection criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The City shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror. The City and its engineer or architect may discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the City is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror, the City shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that offeror and proceed to the next offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. 33.4 In determining best value for the City, the City is not restricted to considering price alone, but may consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria. 33.5 A proposal will be subject to being considered irregular and may be rejected if it shows omissions, alterations of form, conditional alternate proposals, additions or alternates in lieu of the items specified. 11 34. ANTI -LOBBYING PROVISION 34.1 DURING THE PERIOD BETWEEN PROPOSAL SUBMISSION DATE AND THE CONTRACT AWARD, PROPOSERS, INCLUDING THEIR AGENTS AND REPRESENTATIVES, SHALL NOT DISCUSS OR PROMOTE THEIR PROPOSAL WITH ANY MEMBER OF THE LUBBOCK CITY COUNCIL OR CITY STAFF EXCEPT UPON THE REQUEST OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING DEPARTMENT IN THE COURSE OF CITY -SPONSORED INQUIRIES, BRIEFINGS, INTERVIEWS, OR PRESENTATIONS. 34.2 This provision is not meant to preclude bidders from discussing other matters with City Council members or City staff. This policy is intended to create a level playing field for all potential bidders, assure that contract decisions are made in public, and to protect the integrity of the bid process. Violation of this provision may result in rejection of the bidder's bid. 35 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 35.1 Offerors are required to comply with Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, with respect to the payment of prevailing wage rates for the construction of a public work, including a building, highway, road, excavation, and repair work or other project development or improvement, paid for in whole or in part from public funds, without regard to whether the work is done under public supervision or direction. A worker is employed on a public work if the worker is employed by the contractor or any subcontractor in the execution of the contract for the project. 35.2 A worker employed on a public work by or on behalf of the City of Lubbock shall be paid not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for the work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, and not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for legal holiday and overtime work. 35.3 The State of Texas has adopted the Federal Davis -Bacon wage rates for use in Texas pursuant to and in accordance with the Texas Government Code, Section 2258.022. Bidders may access the U. S. Department of Labor web site at the following web address to obtain the rates to be used in Lubbock County: hLtp://www.wdol.gov/dba.aspx 35.4 It shall be the responsibility of the successful offeror to obtain the proper wage rates from the web site for the type of work defined in the bid specifications. 35.5 A contractor or subcontractor who violates Texas Government Code Section 2258.023 shall pay to the City of Lubbock $60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the contract. 12 TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE 2267 SELECTING CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES THROUGH COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS (a) In selecting a contractor through competitive sealed proposals for construction, rehabilitation, alteration, or repair services for a facility or for construction of a project to which Section 252.043(d-1) applies, a governmental entity shall follow the procedures prescribed by this section. (a-1) In this section "facility" means an improvement to real property. (b) The governmental entity shall select or designate an engineer or architect to prepare construction documents for the project. The selected or designated engineer or architect has full responsibility for complying with Chapter 1001 or 1051, Occupations Code, as applicable. If the engineer or architect is not a full-time employee of the governmental entity, the governmental entity shall select the engineer or architect on the basis of demonstrated competence and qualifications as provided by Section 2254.004, Government Code. (c) The governmental entity shall provide or contract for, independently of the contractor, the inspection services, the testing of construction materials engineering, and the verification testing services necessary for acceptance of the facility or project by the governmental entity. The governmental entity shall select those services for which it contracts in accordance with Section 2254.004, Government Code, and shall identify them in the request for proposals. (d) The governmental entity shall prepare a request for competitive sealed proposals that includes construction documents, selection criteria, estimated budget, project scope, schedule, and other information that contractors may require to respond to the request. The governmental entity shall state in the request for proposals the selection criteria that will be used in selecting the successful offeror. (e) The governmental entity shall receive, publicly open, and read aloud the names of the offerors and, if any are required to be stated, all prices stated in each proposal. Not later than the 45th day after the date of opening the proposals, the governmental entity shall evaluate and rank each proposal submitted in relation to the published selection criteria. (f) The governmental entity shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the governmental entity based on the published selection criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The governmental entity shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror. The governmental entity and its engineer or architect may discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the governmental entity is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror, the governmental entity shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that offeror and proceed to the next offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. (g) In determining best value for the governmental entity, the governmental entity is not restricted to considering price alone, but may consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria. Pate Intentionally Left Blank PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM Page Intentionally Left Blank PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT DATE: April 16, 2014 PROJECT NUMBER: REP 14-11838-TF - Landwer House Renovation Proposal of Pharr and Company (hereinafter called Offeror] To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Ladies and Gentlemen: The Offeror, in compliance with your Request for Proposals for the construction of a Landwer House Renovation having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to offerors, notice to offerors and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION 1 UNIT MATERIALS LABOR I Base bid consists of the materials and labor necessary for the Landwer LS n\C,Ci- 6, 0 C House renovation, as J specified herein. TOTAL LUMP SUM 1 74 DURATION 1. Contractors proposed CONTRUCTION TIME for completion: TOTAL CALENDAR DAYS: 150 Offeror hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within 150 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Offeror hereby her agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of S150 for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. 4 Offeror's Initials Offeror understands and agrees that this proposal submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 29 of the General Instructions to Offerors. Offeror understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formality in the proposing, I The Offeror agrees that this proposal shall be good for a period of 60 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving proposals. The undersigned Offeror hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to commence work on the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has proposed; as provided in the contract documents. Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or perfon-nance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that offeror will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Offeror's Initials I I I Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for ----------------------------------------- Dollars (S ------------ or a Proposal Bond in the sum of Five Percent of Total Bid Amount Dollars ($ --- 5% --- which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within 10 business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Offeror shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. (Seal if Offeror is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secreta Jimmy R/Pharr Offeror acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. Addenda No. Addenda No. Addenda No. Date 4/11/2014 Date Date Date I Date: April 16, 2014 iarized mature Jimmy R. Pharr (Printed or Typed Name) Pharr and Company Company P 0 Box 2791 Address Lubbock Lubbock City, County Texas 79408 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 - 763-5263 Fax: 806 - 763-5843 Email: FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. KNOW ALL MEN BYTHESE PRESENTS, that we Pharr Construction Co..Inc. dba Pharr & Company, 987North Avenue [lDc,Lubbock, TX 79403 aaPrincipal, hereinafter called the Principal, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company ofAmerica 1381 E-Collins B!vd.,Suite 1i1 Richardson, Texas, 75U81 (Here insert full name and address o,legal title mSurety) ocorporation duly organized under the laws ofthe State of Connecticut asSurety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock (Here insert full name and address o,legal title mOwner) 1625 13thStreet, Lubbock, TX 79401 osObligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, inthe sum of °^^ FIVE PERCENT OF BID AMOUNT °°° Dollars ( 5% } for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted obid for LANDWER HOUSE RENOVATION (Here insert full name, address and description mproject) NDVV THEREFORE, if the Obligee, shall accept the bid ofthe Principal and the Principal shall enter into eContract with the Obligee, in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the *vent of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay 0nthe Ob|igee, the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Ob|i0ee, may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid. then this obligation shall benull and void, otherwise toremain infull force and effect. Signed and sealed this 16th day of April, 2014 Donna Walker Pharr Construction Cu..Inc. dbaPharr &Con/oan (Principal) (Seal) arr (Title) Vice President Travelers Casualty and Surety CompanV of (Surety) (Seal) America th (Title) Attorney -in -Fact AIA DOCUMENT A3mBID BOND 'AIA 0-BBRUARY 1970 ED - THE»MERICAN Printed on Recycled Paper 9/93 INVALID WITHOUT THE RED POWER OFVrTO-RNEY TRAVELERJ Farmington Casualty Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Travelers Casualtr and Surety Cornp any Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. 'travelers Casualty and Surety Company of'Aniericri St, Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guarantv CornparS St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Attornev-In Fact No. 226008 Certificate No. 005637158 KNOW ALL NIFN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Farmington Casualty Company, St. Paul Fire an(] \urine Insurance Conipaiu,, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Couipany. St, Paul Mercul-V 11111UNIIIICC ('0110Mm, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company. Traxelers Casualv, "ad Surer " Conipariv oAnncnc,, and U11fited State's F;&fitv and Guaranty Con ipany are cor oranow, duk organized Linder the laws of the State of Connecticut. that Fidelity and Guarants filsin-ance Compaatill, is P corporation duly organized under th-1, of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity arid Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc-, is a corporation duIV or"'anized under Tbe br,vs ofthe State of Wklon,,car 1hereir lectively called the "Coniparties"), and that the Companies do hereby rnake. COustitUIC soad appoint Steve Burleson, Staci Gross. and Julie Smith Wichita Falls Texas of the City of - ---------- ------------ ---------- ----------- ---- --� State of, their true and kikk1ul Arnwnevis)-M-Fact, each in their separate cap -achy at inorc than one is named above, to sign, execute, seat and acknowledge any and all bondx, rccm,,ni7aaCCs, C(ffldiliOled UnUeltakings and other vrifings obfigatcn-- in the nature theiLofort behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelitv of' per,on,, guaraate chits the perforn-ance of contracts and exccufinlcs-,,zuarantccinnw bond,., and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or Proceedings allovred hv lay— INWITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies hme caused this intruntent to be signed and their corporate seeds to be heretc, affixed, dik 1 11 2 11 t I It tea; of September 1 2013 - - - - - -- ------------------------ ----------- -------------------- ----------------- - --- Farmington Casualty Company St. Paul Mercury insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Suret N Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance''Underwriters, Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company al'Ancerica St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidefitv and Guarani-v Containv St. Paul Guardian tnsurance Company -4t 4,77of A" 's lA Y 4;PlIII oito W%*%00RAY�: OsOHsePD -91 sEa, ' CONN State o! Connecticut Cro, of 1-hufford ss, Bv: ---------------- -------- Roh,e,rr 1- Ranc-% - - - - --- - -- --------- --- 1, Scyllw Vice Pre,idcm Oil dn� the I 2th &n of September 2013 before me pet sonally appeared Robert !- Rails,— who acknws, ledged hu Hsel fto - ---- - - ------------ - ------ - ---------- -idefitv and Gu raniv lreurance Underkrilers, hi - si, Paul be the Senior Vice Isi-csident of Farniininon Conipan�, Fidelity and Guarant,, Insurance Company, 1, a St, Paul Guardian Insuntric ornpany, St. Paul 'vlercur), Insurance Corripans. Thavelers a,ualt snd Staev, Coo ntarn,. t'.a,eler F're and X-larine Instinuce Coinnan" c C C Ca,ualty and SLJ1-CZ% C0a--a`),M-, (,1'Aa)u-6ca, and United State-,, Fidefits and Guaratax Company, and that he, as such. heing authorizea st to do, executed tile forc�10a-,L inSWUMM for the ;iliapasse,thm-cin omaniod by signing on behalf of the corporations by hirnsell' as a duh, authorized officer- - In Witne%s Whereof, I hLrcutl3ret ritk hand and official seal, Mv Conlln,6ssion exon-es, flic 1001 da-, ofRote, 2o 16. tIr ---------------- - -- - - - - ----------------- 584AO-8-'2 Printed in U.S.A. VVARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID CONTWIvCTORS STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS Individual contractors and joint ventures submitting a bid must complete the following evaluation information for the Project- Joint ventures shall be composed of not more than two firms and each firm must complete separate evaluations. Evaluation information must be submitted at tinne of bid submirtal. Failure to submit the following Bidder Evaluation information may result in the OWNER considering the bid non -responsive and result in rejection of the bid by the OWNER, Bidders are to provide any additional information requested by the OWNER, In evaluating a firm's qualifications, the following major factors will be considered: For this project, the CONTRACTOR'S financial capability to undertake the project will be determined by the CONTRACTOR'S ability to secure bonding satisfactory to the OWNER. B. EXPERIENCE: Do the organization and key personnel have appropriate technical experience on similar projects`' C. SAFETY: Refer to attached Current and Completed Projects and Key Personnel resumes, Does the organization stress and support safety as an important function of the work process? Refer to Proposal - Contractor's Project Experience & Resources (pg,15) - #6, D. QUALITY OF WORK: Project Site Safety - Response, Company Safety Policy also available upon request, (1) Does the organization have a commitment to quality in every facet of their work - the process as well as the product? (2) Does the organization have a written quality philosophy and/or principles that exemplifies their work? If so, submit as Attachment "A". (3) Has this organization ever received an award or been recognized for doing "quality" work on a project? If so, give details under Attachment "A". YES - See attached Texas Tech West Hall article. E. CONFORMANCE TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, (1) Does the organization have a commitment and philosophy to construct projects as designed and as defined in the Contract Documents? Pharr and Company has never failed to fulfill the terms of any contract with an Owner, The OWNER reserves the right to waive irregularities in determining the firm's qualifications and reserves the right to require the submission of additional information. The qualifications of a fin-n shall not deprive the OWNER of the right to accept a bid, which in its judgement is the lowest and best bid, to reject any and all bids, to waive irregularities in the bids, or to reject nonconforming, non -responsive, or conditional bids. In addition, the OANER reserves the right to reject any bid where circumstances and developments have in the opinion of the OWNER changed the qualifications or responsibility of the firm, Material misstatements on the qualifications forms may be grounds for rejection of the firm's bid on this project. Any such misstatement, if discovered after award of the contract to such firm, may be grounds for immediate termination of the' contract. Additionally, the firm will be liable to the OWNER for any additional costs or damages to the OWNER resulting from such misstatements, including costs and attorney's fees for collecting such costs and damages. Complete the following information for your organization: Contractor's General Information Organization Doing Business As j PHARR AND COMPANY 907 N Avenue Q Drive Business Address of Principle Office Lubbock, Texas 79408 Telephone Numbers Main Number 806-763-5263 Fax Number 806-763-5843 Web Site Address Form of Business (Check One} X A Corporation A Partnership An Individual Date of Incorporation 1987 State of Incorporation Texas Chief Executive Officer's Name N7A President's Name John K. Pharr Jimmy R. Pharr Vice President's Name(s) Secretary's Name Jimmy R. Pharr Treasurer's blame Jimmy R. Pharr Date of Organization N/A State whether partnership is general or limited N/A Name N/A N/A Business Address 7A777!!! Average Number of Current Full Time 38 Average Estimate of Revenue for $20 Million E to >ees the Current Year Contractor's Organizational Experience Organization Doing Business As I PHARR AND COMPANY r� N/A Business Address of Regional Office Name of Regional Office Manager Telephone Numbers Main Number Fax Number Web Site Address List of names that this organization currently, has or anticipates operating under over the history of the organization including the names of related companies presentiv doiniz business: Names of Organization From Date To Date Pharr and Pharr Enterprises 1976 1984 Pharr Construction Company, Inc. 1984 1987 Pharr and Company 1987 Current List of companies, firms or organizations that own any part of the organization. Name of companies, firms or organization Percent Ownership N/A Years experience in projects similar to the proposed project: As a General Contractor 1 38 1 As a Joint Venture Partner N/A Has this or a predecessor organization ever defaulted on a project or failed to complete any work awarded to it? No If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization been released from a bid or proposal in the past ten years? No If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization ever been disqualification as a bidder or proposer by any No state, or federalNo If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Is this organization or your proposed surety currently in any litigation or contemplating li No If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization ever refused to construct or refused to provide materials defined in the contract documents? No If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. E Contractor's Proposed Key Personnel Organization Doing Business As PHARR AND COMPANY Provide a brief description of the managerial structure of the organization and illustrate with an organizational cart. Include the title and names of key personnel. Include this chart at an attachment to this description. See attachment No. A L= EAMWORK! Our goal is to accomplish teamwork with Owners, Architects and Subcontractors o produce a winning and successful project. We strive to accomplish this by using experiencec, ompetent superintendents and reputable and reliable subcontractors. With this winning ombinations we will build your construction project with skill and integrity, completing the wo-k n schedule and at the best price. Safety is Number 1 on all our projects and is implemented ill every aspect of our construction. PHARR AND COMPANY pledges to give you this winning combination of teamwork to produce a superior project of excellence. *Organizational Chart attached Provide a brief description of the managerial structure proposed for this project and illustrate with an organizational cart. Include the title and names of proposed key personnel and alternates. Include this chart at an attachment to this description, See attachment No. B Project Executive/Manager Jimmy R. Pharr Superintendent Billy Reed Safety Jimmy Pharr Quality Control Manger Jason Pharr *Organizational Chart attached, Provide information on the key personnel proposed for this project that will provide the following key functions. Provide information for candidates for each of these positions on the pages for each of these key personnel. Also provide biographical information for each primary and alternate candidate as an attachment. The biographical information must include the following as a minimum: technical experience, managerial experience, education and formal training, work history which describes project experience, including the roles and responsibilities for each assignment, and primary language. Additional information highlighting experience which makes them the best candidate for the assignment should also be included. Role Primary Candidate Alternate Candidate Project Manager Jimmy R. Pharr 'N/A Project Superintendent Billy Reed N/A Project Safety Officer Jimmy Pharr N 'A Quality Control Manager Jason Pharr N/A If key personnel are to fulfill more than one of the roles listed above, provide a written narrative describing how much time will be devoted to each function, their qualifications to fulfill each role and the percentage of their time that will be devoted to each role. If the individual is not to be devoted solely to this project, indicate how time it to be divided between this project and their other assignments. Z ProjectExecutive John K. Pharr firnmy R. Pharr Bob ReDne — Project Estimato Gary Stringer Jason Pharr Jacob Tyler - Project Engineer Safety Officer Charles Annacost Bradley Flood Taz Miller Billy Reed, Duggan Wood ' Gary Stringer Quality Control Jason Pharr Manager Project Marinda Pharr Accountant Pharr . •Compar Proposed Key Pers Project Executive Jimmy Pharr Project Engineer Assistant Project FN/A-- Manager Project Safety [Ji:mmy Pharr. Manager Quality Control EJan �Phrr Manager --] Project [Bil:lyReed Superintendent ___ Project [Ma:rind:a Pharr Accountant Proposed Project Managers Name of Individual Years of Experience as Project Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Project Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Ropes ISD Bond Projects New Home ISD Bond Projects South Plains Food Bank - New Warehouse Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates Name Joe McKay Title/ Position Architect Organization JDMA, Inc. Telephone 806-744-4490 E-mail I imckavOjdmate)� Project Ropes es ISD Bond F K— Candidate role on Project Executive Name of Individual S .9 RKETT. MID Jimmy R, Pharr 38 38 Percent of Time Used for Estimated Project I this Project I Completion Date I June 2014 Newly Awarded I Newly Awarded I Feb. 2015 )val to contacting the names individuals as a reference Name Steven Aufill Title/ Position Architect Org nization Inc. Telephone -BQRArchitect 806-747-3881 E-mailProject - aufillQhqronline.com NIPW Hnmp Tqr) Candidates role on Proiect Project Executive Years of Experience as Project Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Project Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for Estimated Project I this Protect I Completion Date Name Name Title/Position Title/ Position E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Candidate role Project on Project M GENERAL CONTRACTOR ■ JIMMY R. PHARR - PROJECT MANAGER / ESTIMATOR 37 years experience Jimmy R. Pharr is Vice President of Pharr & Company. He has been involved in projects of all types — including new construction as well as renovation and repairlmaintenance of existing facilities. Mr. Pharr has extensive experience in cost estimating, project scheduling, and construction management. He has managed the following projects: Project: Midland Centennial Library Owner. Midland County, Texas Construction Cost: $3,339,160 Architect: Dewberry Architects Project: CM Phase VI Renovations Owner: Westbrook, ISD Construction Cost: $1,846,000 Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. Project: CM Phase III Improvements - Westbrook I.S.D. Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Construction Cost: $2,040,000 Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. Project: CM Yoakum County Hospital Additions & Renovations Owner: Yoakum County Courthouse Construction Cost: $1,491,043 Architect: Walter Pate & Associates Architects -Planners, Inc. Project: CM I iighland ISD Additions/ Renovations Project: UMC Westwind Primary Health Center Owner: Highland Independent School District - Roscoe, Texas Owner: University Medical Center Construction Cost: $8,130,500 Construction Cost: $949,575 Architect: Grimes & Associates, Consulting Engineers, LP Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc. Project: University Medical Center Ophthalmology Building Project: CM Estacado High School Additions /Alterations Owner: University Medical Center Owner: Lubbock Independent School District Construction Cost: $1,683,500.00 Construction Cost: $3,581,413 Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc. Architect: BGR Architects, Inc Project: CM Phase IV Improvements - Westbrook 1. & D. Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Construction Cost: $1,442,080 Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. Project: Bowie Fine Arts Academy Owner: Midland Independent School District Construction Cost: $3,655,090 Architect: Rhotenberry Wellen Architects Project: De7avala Elementary School - Additions & Renovations Owner: Midland Independent School District Construction Cost: $1,043,541 Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planner, Inc. Project: New Branch for SouthWest Bank Owner: SouthWest Bank Construction Cost: $1,978,244 Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planner, Inc. Project: Kent County Nursing Home in Jayton, Texas Construction Cost: $2,549,632 Project: Burnet Elementary School Renovations & Alterations Owner: Midland I.S.D. Construction Cost: $2,531,185 Architect: Associated Architects of Midland Project: New Facility for Hunter Millworks, Inc. Owner: B.L. Hunter Family Construction Cost: $1,489,094 Architect: Architects Developers Contractors, Inc. GENERAL CONTRACTOR ♦JIMMY R. PHARR — PROJECT MANAGER / ESTIMATOR References - Condray Design Group, Inc. 1402 Avenue N Lubbock, Texas 79401 Ken Condray kencondray@condray.com (806) 748-6190 JDMA, Inc. 1402 Avenue N Lubbock, Texas 79401 Joe D. McKay imckav(Pnts-online. net (806) 744-4490 Pate & Associates Architects, Inc. 4500 W. Illinois Avenue, Suite 302 Midland, Texas 79703 Walter F. Pate WFP.AIA@PateArchitects_com (432) 697-0037 Cox -Dirks Architects, P. C. 171015tn Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Jimmy Dirks iimmyC)coxdirksarchitects.cam (806) 762-1226 Proposed Project Superintendent Organization Doing Business As 'Tame of Individual Years of Experience as Project Superintendent I PHARR AND COMPANY Billy Reed 31 Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Superintendent 3 Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment None at this time Percent of Time Used for this Pro`ect 100 Estimated Project Com letian Date Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates ap oval to contacting the names individuals as a reference Name Ed Stiles Name Randy Trull Titlei Position Architect Tide/ Position Organization Stiles, Nash & Associates Or anization D & L Mason!: Telephone 806-795-6431 Telephone 806-797-2274 E-mail E-mail Project Candidate role on Project Name of Individual [_ISD Lubbock High School Cafeteria Project Manager Protect Candidate role on Project Years of Experience as Project Superintendent Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position I Or anization Organization Tele hone E-mail Tele hone E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project GENERAL CONTRACTOR ■ BILLY REED - PROJECT SUPERINTENDENT 31 + years construction experience A graduate of Texas A&M University with a B.S. Degree in Building Construction and Education, Mr. Reed joined the team at Pharr & Company with experience as a Project ManagerlSuperintendent. His focus is to complete projects under budget and on time. • Completed Projects: Project: CMAR - Lubbock High School New High School Cafeteria - Kitchen Owner: Lubbock LS.D. Construction Cost: $9 Million Architect: Stiles, Wallace & Associates - Lubbock, Texas Project: Happy State Bank - Interior Finishout Lubbock, Texas Owner: Happy State Bank, Amarillo, Texas Construction Cost: $595,000 Architect: D. Scott Stark, Amarillo, Texas EXPERIENCE IN THE AREA OF: • computer technology as it relates to the industry • working with architects and engineers • full, on -site construction management • estimating • prototype design, development and management • project final stage/wrap-up skills Past Experience includes Superintendent for construction of: Warehouses, churches, college dormitories, banks, restaurants and commercial/retail development projects. GENERAL CONTRACTOR *BILLY REED - SUPERINTENDENT References - Stiles, Wallace & Associates 1615 Avenue M Lubbock, Texas 79401 Ed Stiles ed@swalubbock.com (806) 795-6431 D & L Masonry 7720 191h Street Lubbock, TX 79407 Randy Trull (806) 797-2274 Harman Construction, Inc. 1633 Rogers Rd. Fort Worth, Texas 76107 Rob Harman (817) 336-5780 Proposed Project Safety Officer Organization Doing Business As Name of Individual Years of Experience as Project Safety Officer PHARR AND COMPANY Jimmy R. Pharr Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Safety Officer Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Naive of Assignment Percent of Time Ltsed for this Project Estimated Project Com letion Date Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates a roval to contactingthe names individuals as a reference Name Flame Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Telephone Or anization Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Name of Individual Candidate role on Project Years of Experience as Project Safety Officer Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Safety Officer Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Name Name Title/ Position Titl& Position Or anization Organization Tele bone E-mail Tele hone E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project I Candidate role on Project Proposed Project Quality Control Manager aive of Individual Years of Experience as Quality Control Manager Jason Pharr Years of Experience with this organization _Number of similar projects as Quality Manager 8 Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Westbrook ISD Classroom Addition/Renovation Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Com letion Date April 2014 New Home ISD Bond Projects Newly Awarded Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates a roval to contactin the names individuals a�reference Name Steven Aufill Name Title/ Position Architect Title/ Position C}r anization BGR Architects Inc. Oranization Telephone 806-74?-3881 Tele hone E-mail saufill@b ronline.com E-mail Project Westbrook ISD Project Candidate role on Project Project Manager Name of Individual Candidate role on Pra'eet Years of Experience as Quality Control Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Quality Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Date -Completion Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Qr anization Tele hone E-mail Tele hone E-mail i Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project a] GENERAL ■ JASON R. PHARR- PROJECT MANAGER CONTRACTOR 10 years experience Jason began working for Pharr & Company in 2006 and graduated with a Bachelor of Science Degree in Engineering Technology from Texas Tech University in 2010. He has served in a number of capacities including, estimating, scheduling and project management and has assisted in managing new construction and renovations of commercial, educational, and medical facilities. • Current Projects Project: Pre -Trial Bonding Building Owner: Midland County, Texas Cost: $1,200,097 Architect: Jenenifer Joseph, AIA Project: Phase VII Building Improvements Owner: Westbrook ISD Cost: $2,125,000 Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. • Completed projects Project: Covenant Presbyterian Church - Lubbock Owner: Covenant Presbyterian Church Construction Cost: $1,460,595 Architect: Condray Desgin Group, Inc. Project: Westbrook ISD -Phase VI Owner: Westbrook ISD Construction Cost: $1,846,000 Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. Project: Window Replacement/Corridor Renovation Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Construction Cost: $608,513 Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. Project: Dr. Khater Office Addition Owner: Luzern I,TD Cost: $399,925.00 Architect: JDMA, Inc. • Project Engineer for the following Project: Day Care Facility for Brenda Jones Owner: Thomas and Brenda Jones Construction Cost: $2,301,691 Architect: Cox/Dirks Architects, P. C. Project: Facility Renovations - Lubbock Central Appraisal District Owner: Lubbock Central Appraisal District Construction Cost: $1,789,000 Architect: Cox/Dirks Architects, P. C. Project: Citizens Bank Branch Remodeling - Post Owner: Citizens Bank, Slaton, Texas Construction Cost: $653,279 Architect: Cox/Dirks Architects, P. C. Project: Citizens Bank - New Branch - Lubbock Owner: Citizens Bank, Slaton, Texas Construction Cost: $1,564,000 Architect: MWM Architects, inc. Project: Phase IV Improvements - Concession/Science Lab Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Construction Cost: $1,442,080 Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. Project: McPherson Cellars Winery & Event Center, Phase III Owner: Cucamunga Old Vine Estates, Ltd. Construction Cost: $600,000 Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc. Project: University Medical Center Ophthalmology Building Project: Brownfield High School Renovations Owner: University Medical Center Owner: Brownfield Independent School District Construction Cost: $1,683,500 Construction Cost: $1,355,000.00 Architect: Condray Design Croup, Inc. Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper Architects, Inc. Project: CM Phase III Improvements - Westbrook LS.D. Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Construction Cost: $2,040,000 Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. GENERAL CONTRACTOR ♦JASON PHARR — PROJECT MANAGER / ESTIMATOR References - JDMA, Inc. 1402 Avenue N Lubbock, Texas 79401 Joe D. McKay imckavC>nts-online.net (806)744-4490 BGR Architects, Inc. 2118 - 34" Street Lubbock, Texas 79411 Steven C. Aufill saufill@bgronline.com (806) 747-3881 Contractor's Project Experience and Resources Business As Provide a list of major projects that are currently underway, or have been completed within the last ten years on Attachment A See attached Provide a completed Project Information form (Attachment B) for projects that have been completed in the last five ears which specifically illustrate the organizations capability to provide best value to the Owner for this project, At Include a completed Project Information form (Attachment B) for projects which illustrate the experience of the proposed key personnel. Referto attaChed Proposed Project Personnel resurnes, Provide a description of your organizations approach to completing this project to provide best value for the Owner. Including a description of your approach in the following areas: I . Contract administration 2. Management of subcontractor and suppliers 3. Time management *RESPONSES A-11TACHED 4. Cost control 5. Quality management 6. Project site safety 7. Managing changes to the project 8. Managing equipment 9. Meeting HUB / MWBE Participation Goal Provide a list of major equipmeat to osed for use on this project. Attach Additional Information if neces ry this 1-' vu for Use :E::quipment Item Primary Use on Project Own Will Lease ft Buy Forklift _t__ What work will the organization complete using its own resources? Demolition, Rough Carpentry, Forming as Required, Speciality Installations What work does the oEganization propose to subcontract on this iroject? 13, wo 90° rk 10 W *Ref(,,r to attached A, - CUrrent Projects and Cornpleted Major Project Attachment A Current Projects and Project Completed within the last 10 Years withn the Last Ten (10) Years, Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project: Project Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project: Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control _...._Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager MOMMMM Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project: Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Prcject Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager 17 GENERAL CONTRACTOR Contractor's Project Experience and Resources - Attachment A - Major Projects — Current and Completed in the Last Ten Years CURRENT: Project: Construction Manager —2013 Bond Project New Classrooms -Cafeteria -Commons Area -Gymnasium -Locker Rooms Renovations to former Cafeteria/Kitchen to New Kitchen Owner: New Home Independent School District, New Home, TX Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Contract: $4 Million — Estimated GMP Percent Complete: 0% - Newly Awarded Completion Date: TBD Project: Construction Manager - New Warehouse and Educational Facility 63,000 sq. ft. warehouse/educational/storage facility with commercial kitchen/equipment Owner: South Plains Food Bank — Lubbock, TX Architect: MWM Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Contract: $9 Million — Estimated GMP Percent Complete: 0% - Newly Awarded Completion Date: February 2015 Project: Construction Manager — 2013 Bond Project Entrance, Administration Office & Elementary School Renovation and Door/Window Security Upgrades Owner: Ropes Independent School District, Ropesville, TX Architect: JDMA, Inc. -- Lubbock, TX Project Manger: Jacob Tyler— Assistant Project Manager Superintendent: Duggan Wood Contract: $1,780,917.00 Percent Complete: 40% Completion Date: June 2014 —1— Project: Construction Manager -at -Risk — New K-12 Campus Owner: Wellman -Union CISD, Wellman, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. ---- Lubbock,'I'X Project Manger: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Contract: $14 Million — Estimated GMP Percent Complete: 0% - Newly Awarded Completion Date: March 2016 Project: Construction Manager - Westbrook I. S. D. Phase VII — Building Improvement Projects Classroom/Office-Media Center Renovations and Classroom Addition Owner: Westbrook Independent School District -- Westbrook, TX Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manger: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Contract: $2,125,000.00 Percent Complete: 98% Completion Date: April 2014 Project: Construction Manager —High School Renovations/Addition High School Interior Renovations and New Elevator/New Administrative Additions and Vestibule Owner: Lamesa Independent School District, Lamesa, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Lubbock, TX Project Manager: Kenneth Barthold Superintendent: Charles Armacost Contract: $5,559,159.00 Percent Complete: 87% Completion Date: June 2014 Project: The Larry Combest Community Health/Wellness Center Expansion New Office/Exam Room Addition & Renovations to existing facility Owner: Texas Tech University System, Lubbock, TX Architect: MWM Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: Kenneth Barthold Superintendent: Jett Folsom Contract: $2,594,050.00 Percent Complete: 93% Completion Date: May 2014 —2— COMPLETED IN THE LAST TEN (10) YEARS: Project: Midland County Pre -Trial Bonding Building New 3,800 % f Metal Framed Building with Lobby/Office areas Owner: Midland County, TX Architect: Jennifer Joseph, AIA, Plano, TX Pro-iect Execufive: Ji-inmy Pharr Prqj'ect Mana_ r: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Richard Freeman/Brad Bolm Final Cost: $1,032,660.00 Completion Date: February 6, 2014 Project: City of Brownfield Public Safety Facility, New 11,780 s. f. building with Offices, File/Storage Briefing/Exercise/Training Rooms Owner: City of Brownfield, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Kenneth Barthold Superintendent: Taz Miller Final Cost: $2,843,127.00 Completion Date: December 9, 2013 Project: UMC 3W Tower Remodel Renovation to existing patient rooms Owner: University Medical Center — Lubbock, TX Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc, — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: Jimmv Pharr Prcliect Manager- Jason PhPIT Final Cost: $1,251,823.00 Completion Date: September 30, 2013 Project: Construction Manager for 2010 Bond Program Demo /Replace High School Gymnasium Bleachers/ New High School Parking Lot/New Cafeteria -Kitchen/ Interior Renovations to (2) Middle Schools Owner: Lubbock Independent School District, Lubbock, TX Architect: Stiles, Wallace & Associates - Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Supenn'endents, Billy Reed — High School Cafetena Duggan Wood — Middle Schools Final Cost: $15,432,216.00 Completion Date: August 26, 2013 Project: Construction Manager for Midland County Library Addition and Renovation of existing Library Owner: County of Midland, TX Architect: Dewberry Architects, Inc, — Dallas, TX Pn. ect Executive: Jimmy Pharr Pr6ect Manager: Jason PhaiT Superintendent: Bill Baker Final Cost: $3,496,263. 12 Completion Date: April 4. 2013 Project: Covenant Presbyterian Church Two additional classrooms and Interior Renovations Owner: Covenant Presbyterian Church, Lubbock, TX Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc.- Lubbock, Texas Prqject Exl-cunve: Jimmy Pharr PrQject Manager Jason Pharr Superintendent: Taz Miller Final Cost: $1,475,532.74 Completion Date: January 31, 2013 Project: Construction Manager for Westbrook I. S. D. — Phase VI New Show Barn, Renovations to existing Auditorium & Addition to Vocational Ag Building, New parking lot/sidewalks/septic system Owner: Westbrook Independent School District — Westbrook, TX Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. - Lubbock, Texas Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Prrqjiect Manager Jason Pharri Superintendent: Bradley Flood Final Cost: $1,831,866.75 Completion Date: January 18, 2013 Project: Construction Management -at -Risk Services for 2011 District Facility Improvements - Demo of existing Fieldhouse, Renovations to Restrooms/Bleachers/Press Box, New Fieldhouse/Indoor Practice Facility and Renovations to classrooms Owner: Brownfield Independent School District, Brownfield, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Kenneth Barthold Superintendent: Charles Armacost Final Cost: $4,634,647.96 Completion Date: November 29, 2012 —4— Project: Construction Manager for Glasscock County I. S. D. — Hiah School Remodel Owner: Glasscock County Independent School District Garden City, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Midland, Texas Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Kenneth Barthold Superintendent: Duggan Wood Final Cost: $1,830,991.00 Completion Date: August 20, 2012 Project: Worsham High School Auditorium — Snyder, Texas Renovations to existing Auditorium Owner: Snyder Independent School District Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Midland, Texas Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Richard Freeman Final Cost: $2,928,015.00 Completion Date: August 15, 2012 Project: Highland I. S. D. New locker rooms, two new classrooms, new multi -purpose facility (gymnasium) Owner: Highland Independent School District - Roscoe, Texas Architect: Grimes & Associates, Consulting Engineers, LP. Project Enxecubve: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Randy Leonard/Richard Freeman Final Cost: $8,130,500.00 Date of Completion: August 22, 2011 Project: Elementary School Garden City, TX - Renovations Owner: Glasscock County Independent School District - Garden City, Texas Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Midland, Texas Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Sonny Owen Superintendent- Duggan Wood Final Cost: $1,605,3215.00 Date of Completion: August 19, 2011 Project: University Medical Center Ophthalmology Building — Lubbock, TX New Construction Owner: University Medical Center Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Pr 'ect Executive* JIMMV �harr N 'ect Manawn Jason P"I'an, Superintendent: Charles Annacost Final Cost: $1,691,324224 Date of Completion: January 3, 2011 Project: Lubbock Central Appraisal District — Lubbock, TX Facility Renovations Owner: Lubbock Central Appraisal District Architect: Cox/Dirks Architects, P. C. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Project Eng 6neer- Jason Phan, Superintendent: Duggan Wood Final Cost: $1,784,578.44 Date of Completion: December 29, 2010 Project: Day Care Facility for Brenda Jones — Lubbock, TX New Construction Owner: Thomas and Brenda Jones Architect: Cox/Dirks Architects, P. C. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John Pharr P"( eat Engineer: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Final Cost: $2,306,09631 Date of Completion: December 22, 2010 Project: Fort Stockton Tourism Enhancement Center — Ft. Stockton, TX Renovations and Addition to tourism center Owner: City of Ft. Stockton, Texas Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planner, Inc. — Midland, TX Project Executive: i1mmy lPha-r Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Richard Freeman Final Cost: $1,695,394.56 Date of Completion: July 3, 2010 Project: Westbrook ISD - Phase IV— Westbrook, TX Traclo"New Concession/Science Lab Renovations Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Prfcniect Executive: J Jimmv Pharr Pro'ect EnSoineer, J Jason Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Final Cost: $1,466,333.00 Date of Completion: December 2009 Project: Bowie Fine Arts Academy — Midland, TX Renovations Owner: Midland Independent School District Architect: Rhotenberry Wellen Architects — Midland, TX Protect Executive: lid iliv Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Gerry Velasquez Final Cost: $3,986,833.00 Date of Completion: August 20, 2009 Project: Vista Bank — Lubbock, TX New Construction Owner: Vista Bank - Lubbock Architect: MWM Architects, Inc. - Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Duggan Wood Final Cost: $1,189,500.00 Completion Date: August 27, 2009 Project: DeZavala Elementary School — Midland, TX Additions & Renovations Owner: Midland Independent School District Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planners, Inc.- Midland, TX ProJect Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Richard Freeman Final Cost: $1,159,461.50 Date of Completion: August 12, 2009 Project: Brownfield 1. S. D.— Brownfield, TX High School Renovations Owner: Brownfield Independent School District - Brownfield, Texas Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc.- Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Prqj'ect Engineer, Jason Pharr Superintendent: Charles Artriacost Final Cost: $1,355,000.00 Date of Completion: August 24, 2009 Project: SouthWest Bank — Lubbock, TX New Branch Owner: SouthWest Bank Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planners, Inc. --- Midland, TX Prolect Manager- Jnninv Pharr Superintendent: Monty Matthews Final Cost: $2,064,079.52 Date of Completion: May 27, 2009 —7 Project: Technicare Dental Office Building — Lubbock, TX New Construction Owner: Bromley Investments, LLC Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Ron Allen Final Cost: $1,171,96640 Date of Completion: November 1, 2008 Project: Citizens Bank — Lubbock TX New Branch Owner: Citizens Bank Architect: MWM Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Duggan Wood Final Cost: $1,580,000.00 Date of Completion: October 9, 2008 Project: ABC Bank — Lubbock, TX New Northstar Branch Owner: American Bank of Commerce Architect: MWM Architects, Inc, — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Charles Armacost Final Cost: $1,284,839.34 Date of Complete: October 6, 2008 Project: Westbrook I.S.D. — Westbrook, TX Phase III Improvements Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Pr,�Je t Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Engineer- I, asp n Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Final Cost: $2,061,814.00 Date of Completion: August 1, 2008 Project: St. John Neumann Catholic Church — Lubbock, TX Office & Conference Center Addition Owner: Catholic Diocese of Lubbock Architect: Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Monty Matthews Final Cost: $2,434,872-53 Date of Completion: June 9, 2008 —8— Project: Brownfield Family Aquatic Center — Brownfield, TX New Construction Owner: City of Brownfield Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Taz Miller Final Cost- $2,400,969.80 Date of Completion: May 28, 2008 Project: Yoakum County Hospital — Denver City, TX Additions & Renovations Owner: Yoakum County Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planners, hie. Midland, TX Prqj'ect Mapager: Jimmy Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Final Cost: $1,698,216.45 Date of Completion: March 31, 2008 Project: New City Hall - Slaton, TX New 7,098 s. f municipality building Owner: City of Slaton, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Charles Armacost Final Cost: $1,410,884.73 Date of Completion: August 2007 Project: Stanley Ford Dealership — Andrews, TX Remodel of auto dealership Owner: Automotive Properties Unlimited, Ltd. — Dallas, TX Architect: Architect's Ink — Midland, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Gerry Velasquez Final Cost: $2,268,735 Date of Completion: June 2007 Project: Additions & Renovations - Estacado High School Renovation to existing Hunt Field House, Science Labs, Classrooms., Boys & Girls Dressing Rooms, New Coaches Offices &,New Gymnasium Lubbock, Texas Owner: Lubbock Independent School District Architect: BOR Architects, Inc. Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Danny Heath/Taz Miller Final Cost: $6,017,485.90 Date of Completion: April 2007 —9— Project: Texas National Guard Readiness Center New 34,600 s. f. construction Owner: Texas Military Facilities Commission Architect: Parhkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. — Lubbock, TX ProJect !vla_eau r- Jinniny Pharr Superintendent: Gerry Velasquez Final Cost: $4,718,265 Date of Completion: July 2006 Project: Brownfield Church of Christ New 17,000 s. f. Auditorium/ChapeliWelcome Center/ Classrooms/Office Area Owner: Brownfield, TX Church of Christ Architect: Lee Architects -Interior Designers Project Manager: John Phar Superintendent: Charles Armacost Final Cost: $2,837,175 Date of Completion: March 2006 Project: Lubbock National Bank Retail/Shopping Center New 16,300 s. f banking facility & shopping center Owner: Graco Real Estate Development — Lubbock, TX Architect: MWM Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: Jimmy Pharr Superintendent: Duggan Wood Final Cost: $1,196,788 Date of Completion: November 2005 Project: Bio-Safety Level 3 Laboratory Facility— Lubbock, TX Owner: City of Lubbock, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Charles Armacost Final Cost: $1,132,123 Date of Completion: April 2005 Project: Alliance Federal Credit Union Facility — Lubbock, TX Owner: Alliance Federal Credit Union -- Lubbock, TX Architect: BGR Architects Lubbock, TX Project Manager: Jimmy Pharr Superintendent: Duggan Wood Final Cost: $1,122,295 Date of Completion: December 2004 *Refer to attached - Attachment B. - Major Projects Completed in Last Five (5) Years - Illustrate Capability to Provide Best Value. Project Information Project Owner 1Project Name General Description of Project Budget History Schedule Performance Amount % of Bid Amount Date Days Bid Notice to Proceed Change Orders Contract Substantial Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Owner Enhancements Contract Final Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Unforeseen Conditions Change Order Authorized Substantial Completion Date Design Issues Change Order Authorized Final Completion Date Total Actual / Estimated Substantial Completion Date Final Cost Actual / Estimated Final Completion Date Project Manager Project Sup Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Percentage of Time Devoted to the Project Proposed for this Project Did Individual Start and Complete the Project? If not, who started or completed the project in their place. Reason for change. Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager Sure« Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Resolved Resolved Issues Pending Resolved Issues Is GENERAL CONTRACTOR Contractor's Project Experience and Resources - Attachment B — Major Projects Completed in the Last Five Years — Illustrate Capability to Provide Best Value Project: Construction Manager for 2010 Bond Program Demo /Replace High School Gymnasium Bleachers/ New Parking Lot/New Cafeteria -Kitchen/ Interior Renovations to (2) Middle Schools Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Billy Reed — High School/Duggan Wood — Middle Schools Owner: Lubbock Independent School District, Lubbock, TX Date Completed: August 26, 2013 Contract Amount: $15,125,265.00 Final Cost: $15,239,992.44 Reference: Ed Stiles, Architect — Stiles Wallace & Associates (806)795-6431 Project: Construction Manager for Westbrook I. S. D. — Phase VI New Show Barn, Renovations to existing Auditorium & Addition to Vocational Ag Building/New parking lot/sidewalks Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Owner: Westbrook Independent School District — Westbrook, TX Date Completed: January 18, 2013 Contract Amount: $1,831,866.75 Final Cost: $1,817,000.00 Reference: Todd Burleson, Superintendent WISD, (325) 644-2311 Project: Construction Management -at -Risk Services for 2011 District Facility Improvements Demo of existing Fieldhouse/Pratice Facility/Renovations to RestroomsBleachers and Renovations to classrooms Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Kenneth Barthold Superintendent: Charles Armacost Owner: Brownfield Independent School District, Brownfield, TX Date Completed: November 29, 2012 Contract Amount: $4,057,515.00 Final Cost: $4,018,450.96 Reference: Jerry Jones, BISD Superintendent, (806) 637-2591 Project: Construction Manager for Glasscock County 1. S. D. — High School Remodel Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Sonny Owens/Kenneth Barthold Job Superintendent: Duggan Wood Owner: Glasscock County Independent School District — Garden City, TX Date Completed: August 20, 2012 Contract Amount: $1,699,026.00 Final Cost: $1,830,991.00 Reference: Phillip Ferqueron, Architect -Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. (432) 697-1447 Project: University Medical Center Ophthalmology Building Prqject Executive: Jimmy Pharr Pr(Iject Manager- Jason Phair Job Superintendent: Charles Armacost Owner: University Medical Center Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc. Contract Amount: $1,683,500.00 Final Cost: $1,691,324.00 Date of Completion: December 31, 2010 Project Manager: Jimmy R. Pharr Superintendent: Charlie Annacost Project: Facility Renovations - Lubbock Central Appraisal District Project Ject Execufive: Jimmy Pharr Pro9ect Manager: ason PhwT Job Superintendent: Duggan Wood Owner: Lubbock Central Appraisal District Architect: Cox/Dirks Architects, P. C. Contract Amount: $1,789,000.00 Completion Amount: $1,784,587.44 Date of Completion: December 29, 2010 Project Manager: John K. Pharr Superintendent: Duggan Wood Project: Project Executive: Project Manager: Job Superintendent: Owner: Architect: Contract Amount: Completion Amount: Date of Completion: Project Manager: Superintendent: Day Care Facility for Brenda Jones John Pharr jason Pharr Bradley Flood Thomas and Brenda Jones Cox/Dirks Architects, P. C. $2,301,691.00 $2,303,051.43 December 22. 2010 John K. Pharr Bradley Flood -1- Project: Highland 1. S. D. - Additions & Renovations PrO ied 1-_'XeCUfive' 'filrully Pnarr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Job Superintendent: Richard FreeniarvRandy Leonard Owner: Highland Independent School District - Roscoe, Texas Architect: Grimes & Associates, Consulting Engineers, LP. Contract Amount: $4,130,500.00 Completion Amount: $4,123,697.81 Date of Completion: August 20, 2010 Project Manager: Jimmy R. Pharr Superintendent: Randy Leonard Project: Fort Stockton Tourism Enhancement Center Prqject Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Richard Freeman Owner: City of Ft. Stockton, Texas Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planner, Inc. Contract Amount: $L699,200.00 Completion Amount: $1,695,394,56 Date of Completion: July 3, 2010 Project Manger: Jimmy R. Pharr Superintendent: Richard Freeman Project: Westbrook ISD - Phase IV - Track/Concession/Science Lab Prqject Executive, jimmv Pharr Pro,ject Engineer: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. Contract Amount: $1,442,080.00 Completion Amount: $1,466,333.00 Date of Completion: December 2009 Project Manager: Jimmy R. Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Project: Bowie Fine Arts Academy - Midland 1. S. D. Pro-ect Execufive J i Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Gerry Velasquez Owner: Midland Independent School District Architect: Rhotenberry Weller Architects Contract Amount: $3,655,090.00 Completion Amount: $3,986,83164 Date of Completion: August 20, 2009 Project Manager: Jimmy R. Pharr Superintendent: Gerry Velasquez Project: Project Manager: Superintendent: Owner: Architect: Contract Amount: Completion Amount: Completion Date: Project Manger: Superintendent: Vista Bank John Pharr Duggan Wood Vista Bank - Lubbock MWM Architects, Inc. $1,279,067.00 $1'189,500.00 August 27, 2009 John K. Pharr Duggan Wood Z� Project: DeZavala Elementary School - Additions & Renovations Praject Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Richard Freeman Owner: Midland Independent School District Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planners, Inc. Contract Amount: $1,253453.00 Completion Amount: $1,159,461.50 Date of Completion: August 12, 2009 Project Manager: Jimmy R Pharr Superintendent: Richard Freeman Project: Brownfield I. S. D. High School Renovations Owner: Brownfield Independent School District - Brownfield, Texas Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. Contract Amount: $1,355,000.00 Completion Amount: $1,355,000.00 Date of Completion: August 24, 2009 Project Manager: John K Pharr Superintendent: Charlie Armacost Project: SouthWest Bank - New Branch Owner- SouthWest Bank Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planners, Inc. Contract Amount: $1,978,244.00 Completion Amount. $2.097,815.00 Date of Completion: May 27, 2009 Project Manager: Jimmy R. Pharr Superintendent: Monty Matthew M GENERAL CONTRACTOR Contractor's Project Experience and Resources - Attachment B - Capability to Provide Best Value Approach to Provide Best Value: 1. Contract Administration: PHARR & COMPANY utilizes Timberline Construction Management Program and our accounting system in order to monitor all aspects of the project. A full staff, comprised of Project Executive, Estimator, Manager, Quality Control Officer, Superintendent and Accounting Department, works in conjunction with the Timberline Construction Management Program to manage the operation of subcontractors and material suppliers. 2. Management of Subcontractors/Suppliers: Choosing the correct subcontractors and suppliers is paramount to a quality project. PHARR & COMPANY will work with the Owner to choose subcontractors and material suppliers that have demonstrated the ability to meet quality standards. Factors used in selecting subcontractors and suppliers are as follows: Experience with the Owner. Experience with similar projects. Reputation for quality. Ability to work in a team atmosphere. Quality of field personnel. Financial stability. Cost of product or service. 3. Time Management: PHARR & COMPANY has vast experience in providing schedules during the schematic, design development and construction document phases of a project. The ability to provide accurate schedules is a key element of the pre -construction services we provide. At the Schematic Design and Design Development Stage we prepare conceptual schedules for the project. The level of detail of the schedule increases as more information and refinement of the documents are provided. The schedule as developed can then be tracked and monitored using the Timberline Construction Management System. 4. Cost Control: PHARR & COMPANY will construct the project with the best quality in materials and workmanship while retaining the lowest possible cost for the City of Lubbock. We will offer value engineering on any item and/or items we feel will benefit the city in saving money. Our goal is to build your project with skill and integrity. Therefore, PHARR & COMPANY strives to minimize any long-term cost to the city. During the Construction Phase - PHARR & COMPANY controls costs by providing accurate cost estimates in the formulation of the bid price. We utilize state-of-the-art estimating software to compile a definitive estimate in recognized Construction Specifications Institute cost codes. This system allows us to track each cost item through a controlled, efficient buy-out of that item. Through the use of our project management software, PHARR & COMPANY has an organized method to track each item and aggressively manage any changes to that cost item. Cost reports are generated for review with the Project Team at regularly scheduled meetings, 5. Ouality Management: PHARR & COMPANY'S Quality Control Manager is responsible for monitoring the standards specified and incorporated for all projects. Submittal examination and final installation of all materials and labor will be monitored to make sure that all contract document requirements are adhered to. 6. Project Site Safety: It is PHARR & COMPANY'S goal to continue the impeccable safety standards that we pride ourselves on. We have an extensive written safety program for all employees to follow: It is our goal to ensure that our personal employees and all of our subcontractors are not just given the policies, but know the policies and adhere to them. We conduct weekly spot checks on all of our jobs: These reports are then communicated with each superintendent. The superintendent then follows up with the foreman to discuss any infractions that need to be corrected. If infractions are repeated, the visits are made with the owner and the foreman to establish a resolution. We host weekly Safety Tool Box meetings: Superintendents host these meetings with all subcontractors on the job. Records of those meetings are maintained in our office and are available for review. PHARR & COMPANY believes in continuing education: We provide our superintendents the most up -to -date -training. It is evident through the many safety awards we receive each year that our team is diligent in maintaining a safe job site. Our Corporate Safety Policy Manual is available upon request. 7. Managing Changes to the Project: All changes must be handled through written directive, all verbal changes must be documented in writing and approved and signed by appropriate personnel. 8. Managing Equipment: PHARR & COMPANY will supervise all equipment installed as required per contract documents. We will also coordinate the installation of any Owner supplied equipment. 9. Meeting HUB/MWBE Participation Goal: PHARR & COMPANY strives to encourage all Historically Undertailized Businesses (HUB) to participate in the bidding process by submitting their quotes to us. We will put forth a good faith effort to attain the percentage required by law. We will adhere to every step of the established guidelines for the procurement of bids. Even though this project does not required Historically Underutilized Businesses to participate, it is our policy to make every effort to solicit HUB subcontractors in order to utilize local resources available. *RFFFR TO PROPOSED LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS INCLUDED Contractor's Subcontractors and Vendors IN PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS, Organization Orgaiiization Doing Business As HARR AND COMPANY aaiki� Provide a list of subcontractors that will provide more than 10 percent of the work (based on contract amounts Name Work to be Provided Est. Percent I I MW HUB/ BE I of Contract 1' Firm Provide information on the proposed key personnel, project experience and a description of past relationship and work experience for each subcontractor listed above nsiruz the Project Information Forms. I Provide a list of major equipment proposed for use on this project. Attach Additional Information if necessar I Furnish Furnish HUB/M Vendor Name Equipment / Material Provided Only and VIBE Install I Firm HM CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT Co ntra a r (Original Signature) Jimmy R. Pharr Contractor (Print) (Print or Type) Lubbock, Texas 79408 NOTE TO CONTRACTOR ontract Nfa-nagemenf for The Uity of Lubbock at (A'Tf0=- 12572. Boley Featherston Insurance Company P 0 Box 97513 Wichita Falls, TX 76307 (940) 723-7111 RFP 14-11838-TF - Landwer House Renovation Page Intentionally Left Blank SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE The City of Lubbock City Council desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252,0435 of the Local Government Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts. Pursuant to Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, City of Lubbock has adopted the following written definition and criteria for accurately determining the safety record of a proposer prior to awarding proposals on City contracts. The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a proposer for this consideration shall be. The City of Lubbock shall consider the safety record of the offerors in determining the responsibility thereof. The City may consider any incidence involving worker safety or safety of the citizens of the City of Lubbock, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City may consider, among other things: a. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission (OSHRC), against the proposer for violations of OSHA regulations within the past three (3) years. b. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as defined below) for violations within the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of State Health Services (DSHS), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TPWD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies of local governments responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United States. Citations include notices of violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. c. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted in bodily harm or death. d. Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in determining the responsibility of the offeror and his or her ability to perform the services or goods required by the proposal documents in a safe environment, both for the workers and other employees of offeror and the citizens of the City of Lubbock. In order to obtain proper information from offerors so that City of Lubbock may consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts, City of Lubbock requires that offerors answer the following three (3) questions and submit them with their proposals: QUESTION ONE Has the offeror, or the finn, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of OSHA within the past three () years? YES NO If the offeror has indicated YES for question number one above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such citation: Date of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. ' Offeror's Initials QUESTION TWO Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, , partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of environmental protection laws or regulations, of any kind or type, within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement, suspension revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments, YES NO X If the offeror has indicated YES for question number two above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. QUESTION THREE Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which resulted in serious bodily injury or death? YES NO - X If the offeror has indicated YES for question number three above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, in any, and penalty assessed, QUESTION FOUR Provide your company's Experience Modification Rate and supporting information: •86 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THE STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK I certify that I have made no willful misrepresentations in this Questionnaire nor have I withheld information in my statements and answers to questions. I am aware that the information given by me in this questionnaire will be investigated, with my full permission, and that any misrepresentations or omissions may cause my proposal to be rejected, �i0qature Timmy R. Pharr LTAZMWI*. � N SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION Federal Law (A- 102 Common Rule and OMB Circular A- I 10) prohibits non -Federal entities from contractina with or making sub -awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose principals are suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement contracts for goods or seii ices equal to or in excess of $25,000 and all non -procurement transactions {e.g., sub -awards to sub -recipients). Contractors receiving individual awards of $25,000 or more and all sub -recipients must certify that their organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. Before an award of $25,000 or more can be made to your firm, you must certify that your organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency, 1, the undersigned agent for the firm named below, certify that neither this firm nor its principals are suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. COMPANY NAME: Pharr and Company FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SE �RITIVV No. _ 75-2187285 Signature of Company Official: ji2 a oj�e. Jimmy R, Pharr Printed name of company officia"I signing cave: Page Intentionally Left Blank PROPOSED LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS Minority Owned Company Name Location Services Provided Yes No 8. o o 2. R&RDitching Lubbock Sitework & Demo o �� l Pharr &Company Lubbock Concrete Paving o W 4, T & S Plastering Lubbock EFI5 o x 5, Hamilton Roofing Lubbock Roofing o x 6. HaUgren Lubbock Doors &Hardware o x 7. Stock Building Supply Lubbock Glass o x 8. L.V. R.Carpet Lubbock Ceramic o >0 9^ L.V. R.Carpet Lubbock Flooring o � |R^ Landscapes ufLubbock Lubbock Landscaping o & 11. Bear Lake Enterprises Lubbock Fencing o x 12. Kerr & Son Plumbing Lubbock Plumbing o %) 13. White Services Co., Inc. Lubbock Mechanical o � 14, Sonny Rowan Lubbock Electrical o x 15, Grant -Hill Lubbock Drya|| -Cei|inge o x 16, LoyaPa|nbng Lubbock Painting X o SUBMITTED BY: Pharr and Company PRINT NAME F COMPANY) RUFP 14-11038-TF-LandvwexHouse Renovation POST -CLOSING DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS The below -listed document must be received in the Purchasing Manager Office Not Later Than SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS after the close date when proposals are due. FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS Page Intentionally Left Blank FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS Minority Owned Company Name Location Services Provided Yes No 1. El 2. McHam, Ltd Lubbock Sitework/Demo ❑ 3. McHam, Ltd Lubbock Concrete Paving ❑ x 4. T & S Plastering Lubbock EFIS El 5 . Hamilton Roofing Lubbock Roofing El 6. RSM Builders Supply Lubbock Doors/Hardware ❑ 7. Pella Lubbock Windows ❑ Ix 8. LVR Carpet Lubbock Ceramic ❑ R 9. LVR Carpet Lubbock Flooring El x io. Landscape of Lubbock Lubbock Landscaping ❑ x 11. Pharr & Company Lubbock Fencing ❑ IR 12. _Kerr &_ Son _PtWnbjM Lubbock 1 0 _FtUMbh,_ ❑ x 13. White Services Co. Lubbock HVAQ ❑ 9 14. Sonny Rowan Lubbock Electrical ❑ 9 15. Grant -Hill, Inc. Lubbock Drywall/Ceilings El 9 16. Loya Painting Lubbock Painting IR El SUBMITTED BY: Pharr and Company (PRINT NAME _OFCOXV^Y_��_ THIS FORM SHALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED NOT LATER THAN SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS AFTER THE CLOSE DATE WHEN PROPOSALS ARE DUE IF NO SUB -CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED PLEASE INDICATE SO RFP 14-11838-TF - Landwer House Renovation Pate Intentionally Left Blank PAYMENT BOND Page Intentionally Left Blank STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $50,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Seven Hundred Forty Five Thousand Dollars ($745 000 lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the day of , 2014, to RFP 14-11838-TF Landwer House Renovation and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this day of Surety *By: (Title) 2014. (Company Name) By: (Printed Name) (Signature) (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Surety * By: Approved as to form: City of Lubbock By: City Attorney (Title) * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. PERFORMANCE BOND Page Intentionally Left Blank STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that as Principal(s), and (hereinafter called the Principal(s), (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Seven Hundred Forty Five Thousand Dollars ($745,000) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the day of , 2014, to RFP 14-11838-TF Landwer House Renovation and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this day of Surety * By: (Title) 2014. (Company Name) By: (Printed Name) (Signature) (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Surety *By. (Title) Approved as to Form City of Lubbock By: City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Pate Intentionally Left Blank TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000, Room 204 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DATE: TYPE OF PROJECT: (Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, the further hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE EFFECTIVE LIMITS DATE DATE GENERAL LIABILITY ❑ Commercial General Liability General Aggregate $ ❑ Claims Made Products-Comp/Op AGG $ ❑ Occurrence Personal & Adv. Injury $ ❑ Owner's & Contractors Protective Each Occurrence $ ❑ Fire Damage (Any one Fire) $ Med Exp (Any one Person) $ AUTOMOTIVE LIABILITY ❑ Any Auto Combined Single Limit $ ❑ All Owned Autos Bodily Injury (Per Person) $ ❑ Scheduled Autos Bodily Injury (Per Accident) $ ❑ Hired Autos Property Damage $ ❑ Non -Owned Autos 11 GARAGE LIABILITY ❑ Any Auto Auto Only - Each Accident $ ❑ Other than Auto Only: Each Accident $ Aggregate $ ❑ BUILDER'S RISK ❑ 100% of the Total Contract Price $ ❑ INSTALLATIONFLOATER $ EXCESS LIABILITY ❑ Umbrella Form Each Occurrence $ Aggregate $ ❑ Other Than Umbrella Form $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY The Proprietor/ ❑ Included Statutory Limits Partners/Executive ❑ Excluded Each Accident $ Officers are: Disease Policy Limit $ Disease -Each Employee $ OTHER The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancellation, or in case there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advance of cancellation. FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK (Name of Insurer) By: Title: The Insurance Certificates Furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as Additional Insured on Auto /General Liability and provide a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the City of Lubbock. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S. THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. CONTRACTORCHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS ADDITIONAL INSURED ON AUTO/GENERAL LIABILITY ON A PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY BASIS TO INCLUDE PRODUCTS OF COMPLETE OPERATIONS. PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. COPIES OF THE ENDORSEMENTS ARE REQUIRED. REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512-305-7238 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (D) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (F) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (G) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. Pale Intentionally Left Blank CONTRACT Pate Intentionally Left Blank Page Intentionally Left Blank CONTRACT 11838 STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 22"d day of May, 2014 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Pharr and Company of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: RFP 14-11838-TF Landwer House Renovation and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement Pharr and Company's proposal dated April 16, 2014 is incorporated into and made a part of this agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. CONTRACTOR: CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS (OWNER): By: PRINTED NAME: TITLE: COMPLETE ADDRESS: Company Address City, State, Zip ATTEST: Corporate Secretary Un Glen C. Robertson, Mayor ATTEST: Rebecca Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Wesley Everett, Director of Facilities Management Mark Yearwood, Assistant City Manager, Chief Information Officer APPROVED AS TO FORM: Amy L. Sims, Assistant City Attorney Page Intentionally Left Blank GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT Pate Intentionally Left Blank GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to wit Pharr and Company, who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative, Wesley Everett, Director of Facilities Management, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or Resident Project Representatives as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular way under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or Resident Project Representatives will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Offerors, General Instructions to Offerors, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificates, and all other documents made available to Offeror for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. The City reserves the right to approve or disapprove the selection of any subcontractor(s). 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. The pipeline must be backfilled, tested, final grading and seeding performed for substantial completion. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished ten copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES The Contractor is responsible for construction layout based on the control provided in the construction documents. All lines and grades shall be furnished whenever Owner's Representative (as distinguished from Resident Project Representative(s)) deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative (as distinguished from Resident Project Representative(s))has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors, as distinguished from Resident Project Representative, as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Contractor is responsible for construction quality control testing, cost, and reporting of the type and extent required by the contract documents. The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective 4 or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations in Paragraph 23. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the observation of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent to the firm actually performing the work, and additional higher -tier markups limited to 5% to cover additional overhead and insurance costs; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work, as estimated by the Engineer and approved by the Owner.. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor 6 should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C) (1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before offering of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than seven (7) calendar days prior to the opening of proposals. In the absence of a requested clarification for a conflict in the documents prior to proposals being reviewed, it will be assumed that the Contractor proposes the higher cost alternative on conflicts identified after proposals are reviewed. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL NOWul► Im The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Engineer and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERFICATE OF INSURANCE ALONG WITH A COPY OF THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A ADDITIONAL INSURED ON AUTO/GENERAL LIABILITY ON A PRIMARY AND NON CONTRIBUTORY BASIS TO INCLUDE PRODUCT- COMP/OP AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKER'S COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. A. Commercial General Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Products-Comp/Op AGG Contractual Liability Personal Injury & Advertising Injury B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. -DELETED C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation Required) The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. - DELETED E. Umbrella Liability Insurance - DELETED F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required) Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 9 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and 10 (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self - insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. F. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the proposal specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. 11 (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30-point bold type and text in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment 12 (h) or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. " "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 800-372-7713 or 512- 804-4000 (www.tdi.stateamus) to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage, " and contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self - insured, with the commission's Division of Self - Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; 13 (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN, AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and Engineer and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material men and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner and Engineer, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to offering. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify 14 and save harmless the Owner and Engineer and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to proposing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising there from. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the Notice to Proceed and contract documents, respectively, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $150 (One Hundred Fifty) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 15 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposal; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative (as distinguished from the Resident Project Representative) may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than within twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all 16 work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project, provided that the over run or under run of estimated quantities note exceed 15% of the estimated quantity. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner and Engineer, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work 17 done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Payment for materials on hand and delivered to the project site will be limited to 100 percent less the 5 percent standard retainage until actually incorporated into the project. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time but not to exceed 30 days after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall pay all claims, cost, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of the engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution cost) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal. 18 Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of - (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed, (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims, (c) Damage to another contractor, (d) Notification to owner of failure to make payments to Subcontractors or Suppliers, (e) Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required, (f) Failure to submit monthly progress schedule updates or revised scheduled as requested by Owner, (g) Failure to provide Project photographs required by Specifications. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. hi the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall 19 not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed proposals, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said 20 notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by a Surety Company listed on the State Treasury's "Approved" list and authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an 21 independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. hi the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 56. NONAPPROPRIATION All funds for payment by the City under this contract are subject to the availability of an annual appropriation for this purpose by the City. In the event of non -appropriation of funds by the City Council of the City of Lubbock for the goods or services provided under the contract, the City will terminate the contract, without termination charge or other liability, on the last day of the then -current fiscal year or when the appropriation made for the then -current year for the goods or services covered by this contract is spent, whichever event occurs first. If at any time funds are not appropriated for the continuance of this contract, cancellation shall be accepted by the Seller on thirty (30) days prior written notice, but failure to give such notice shall be of no effect and the City shall not be obligated under this contract beyond the date of termination. 22 57. THE CITY RIGHT TO AUDIT At any time during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years thereafter the City or a duly authorized audit representative of the City, or the State of Texas, at its expense and at reasonable times, reserves the right to audit Contractor's records and books relevant to all services provided under this Contract. In the event such an audit by the City reveals any errors/overpayments by the City, Contractor shall refund the City the full amount of such overpayments within thirty (30) days of such audit findings, or the City, at its option, reserves the right to deduct such amounts owing the City from any payments due Contractor. 58. NON -ARBITRATION The City reserves the right to exercise any right or remedy available to it by law, contract, equity, or otherwise, including without limitation, the right to seek any and all forms of relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. Further, the City shall not be subject to any arbitration process prior to exercising its unrestricted right to seek judicial remedy. The remedies set forth herein are cumulative and not exclusive, and may be exercised concurrently. To the extent of any conflict between this provision and another provision in, or related to, this document, this provision shall control. 59. HOUSE BILL 2015 House Bill 2015signed by the Governor on June 14, 2013 and effective on January 1, 2014, authorizes a penalty to be imposed on a person who contracts for certain services with a governmental entity and who fails to properly classify their workers. This applies to subcontractors as well. Contractors and subcontractors who fail to properly classify individuals performing work under a governmental contract will be penalized $200 for each individual that has been misclassified. (Texas Government Code Section 2155.001). 60. ASSIGNING OR SUBLETTING THE CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign or sublet the contract, or any portion of the contract, without written consent from the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management. Should consent be given, the Contractor shall insure the Subcontractor or shall provide proof on insurance from the Subcontractor that complies with all contract Insurance requirements. 23 Pale Intentionally Left Blank DAVIS-BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS EXHIBIT A General Decision Number: TX140262 01/03/2014 TX262 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20130262 State: Texas Construction Type: Building County: Lubbock County in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/03/2014 BOIL0531-001 01/01/2013 Rates Fringes Boilermaker ....................$ 22.71 20.63 ---------------------------------------------------------------- BRTX0005-003 06/01/2012 Rates Fringes Bricklayer .....................$ 19.50 1.73 ---------------------------------------------------------------- CARP0665-002 05/01/2010 Rates Fringes Carpenter ......................$ 20.18 5.56 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0178-004 12/01/2009 Rates Fringes OPERATOR: Forklift ..............$ 21.20 9.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * IRON0263-017 06/01/2013 Rates Fringes Ironworker, reinforcing ........ $ 22.50 5.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PAIN0053-003 04/01/2008 Rates Fringes Painter - Brush, Roller & Spray ............................$ 15.81 4.56 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLUM0404-022 09/24/2012 Rates Fringes PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER...............$ 22.50 6.25 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SHEE0049-007 06/01/2011 Rates Fringes SHEETMETAL WORKER (HVAC Duct and Unit Installation) ........... $ 22.18 9.47 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2009-168 06/03/2009 Rates Fringes CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER ... $ 18.58 0.00 ELECTRICIAN ......................$ 18.09 2.36 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL ........... $ 10.38 0.00 LABORER: Common or General ...... $ 8.86 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick ... $ 11.00 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator..... $ 13.81 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade .......... $ 12.97 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader (Front End) .... $ 12.23 0.00 ROOFER ...........................$ 12.06 0.00 TILE SETTER ......................$ 8.50 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER .....................$ ---------------------------------------------------------------- 10.15 0.00 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii) ) . The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is union or non -union. Union Identifiers An identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" denotes that the union classification and rate have found to be prevailing for that classification. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2011. The first four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union and the four -digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable , i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2011, following these characters is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate/collective bargaining agreement which would be July 1, 2011 in the above example. Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any changes in the collective bargaining agreements governing the rates. 0000/9999: weighted union wage rates will be published annually each January. Non -Union Identifiers Classifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derived from survey data by computing average rates and are not union rates; however, the data used in computing these rates may include both union and non -union data. Example: SULA2004-007 5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union majority rates, LA indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. A 1993 or later date, 5/13/2010, indicates the classifications and rates under that identifier were issued as a General Wage Determination on that date. Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not change until a new survey is conducted. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be. * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION EXHIBIT B Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. Page Intentionally Left Blank SPECIFICATIONS Wlubbo&k TEXAS Project Number: 92287 Landover House Renovation Project Manual 7 March, 2014 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 000010 — TABLE OF CONTENTS COVER TABLE OF CONTENTS DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY OWNER PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary 012500 Substitution Procedures 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013200 Construction progress Documentation 013300 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 014200 References 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 015639 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 017700 Closeout Procedures DIVISION 02 — EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 033000 Structural Concrete 033500 Concrete Floor Toppings 033543 Polished Concrete Finishing Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000010 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas DIVISION 04 — MASONRY DIVISION 05 — METALS 051200 Structural Steel Framing 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings DIVISION 06 — WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry 064219 Plastic -Laminate -Faced Wood Paneling DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07321 Clay Roofing Preparation 074646 Fiber -Cement Siding 07591 Roofing Preparation 07620 Sheet Metal and Miscellaneous Accessories 07920 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 083323 Overhead Coiling Doors 085200 Wood Windows 087100 Door Hardware DIVISION 09 — FINISHES 092400 Cement Plastering 092900 Gypsum Board 093013 Ceramic Tiling 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 099100 Painting 099630 Elastomeric Wall Coatings Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000010 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 102113 Phenolic -Core Toilet Compartments 102600 Wall and Door Protection 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories DIVISION 11— EQUIPMENT 113100 Residential Appliances DIVISION 12 — NOT USED DIVISIONS 13-14 — NOT USED DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING 15000 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Specialties 15200 Site Utilities 15300 Piping and Accessories 15350 Plumbing Systems 15400 Air Distribution 15500 Hangers and Supports 15600 Insulation 15700 Equipment 15800 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 16110 Raceways 16120 Wires and Cables 16130 Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16170 Grounding and Bonding Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000010 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 16195 Electrical Identification 16441 Safety Switches 16470 Panelboards 16510 Lighting DIVISION 17-30 — NOT USED DIVISION 31— EARTHWORK 312000 Earthwork 312324 CLSM 313116 Termite Control DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216 Asphalt Paving 321613 Concrete Curbs and Gutters 323223 Segmental Retaining Walls 329115 Soil Preparation 329200 Turf and Grasses 329300 Plants DIVISION 33 — NOT USED END OF DOCUMENT 000010 Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000010 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY Architect: Mary K. Crites, AIA- ARCHITECT 2801 26th St Lubbock, TX 79410 806-790-7114 Responsible for Divisions 01-32 Sections except where indicated as prepared by other design professionals of record. tQF�c Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY 000107 - 1 Landwer House Renovation City of Lubbock 1205 N. University Avenue Lubbock, Texas TEI F-1575 Specification Index 033000 Structural Concrete 033500 Concrete Floor Toppings 051200 Structural Steel Framing 061000 Rough Carpentry 312000 Earthwork 312324 Controlled Low Strength Backfill Material 321216 Asphalt Paving 32I613 Concrete Curbs and Gutters Thoma Engineering, Inc. Texas Registered Engineering Firm F-1575 5502 5$`h, Suite 200 Lubbock, Texas 79414-2074 0 F R. J. THOMAr„JR; �569204�' 1�41 I[VW.Jr, 03/07/14 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBIILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 06 CARPENTRY 105 Miscellaneous Carpentry DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 321 Clay Tile Roofing 591 Reroofing Preparation 620 Sheet Metal and Miscellaneous Accessories 920 Sealants and Caulks DIVISION 09 FINISHES 963 Coatings for Concrete & Masonry DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Specialties C. Armko Industries, Inc. Texas Registered Engineering Firm F-006498 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY ARMKO - 1 Landwer House Renovation City of Lubbock 1205 N. University Avenue Lubbock, Texas FFA #12090 Specifications Index 15000 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15200 Site Utilities 15300 Piping and Accessories 15350 Plumbing Systems 15400 Air Distribution 15500 Hangers and Supports 15600 Insulation 15700 Equipment 15800 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 16110 Raceways 16120 Wires and Cables 16130 Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16170 Grounding and Bonding 16195 Electrical Identification 16441 Safety Switches 16470 Panelboards 16510 Lighting Fanning, Fanning & Associates, Inc. Texas Registered Engineering Firm F-00294 2555 74`h Street Lubbock,Texas 79423 Tel 806.745.2533 Fax 806.745.3596 www.fannincifanninci.com LNG &ASSoo ............. ..........i * `� �SCOTT M..FANNING 61441 c4 03/07'/14 03/07/14 Landwer House Renovation City of Lubbock 1205 N. University Avenue Lubbock, Texas Specification Index 015639 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings 321400 Unit Paving 323223 Segmental Retaining Walls 329115 Soil Preparation (Performance Specification) 329200 Turf and Grasses 329300 Plants KBLandArchitecture Katheryn Lust, RLA 41509, ASLA 8204 Joliet Avenue Lubbock, Texas 79423 806.777.5387 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 011000 — SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Work under separate contracts. 6. Future work. 7. Purchase contracts. 8. Owner -furnished products. 9. Contractor -furnished, Owner -installed products. 10. Access to site. 11. Work restrictions. 12. Specification and drawing conventions. 13. Miscellaneous provisions. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: 1. Landwer House Renovation 2. Project Location: a. 1205 N. University, Lubbock, TX B. Owner: City of Lubbock. 1. Owner's Representative: a. Wes Everett, Director of Facilities Management. C. Architect: Mary K. Crites, AIA- ARCHITECT 806-790-7114 D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Thoma Engineering Structural Engineering 806-745-4881 2. Fanning, Fanning & Associates MPE Engineering 806-745-2533 3. Armko Industries Roof Consultant 806-833-6953 4. KBLandArchitecture Landscape Architecture 806-777-5387 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. The project consists of a renovation of an existing single story building. The building use is classified as an Assembly A.2 occupancy. The project, in addition to the building renovation includes site work, landscaping and a small paved area. 2. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER: A. Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1. Irrigation Sprinkler System 1.6 CONTRACTOR -FURNISHED, OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Contractor shall furnish products indicated. The Work includes unloading, handling, storing, and protecting Contractor -furnished products as directed and turning them over to Owner at Project closeout. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Summary 011000 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Contractor -Furnished, Owner -Installed Products: 1. Refrigerator PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 2 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Summary 011000 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. . j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. 1. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Substitution Procedures 012500 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Bidder Certification: Bidder certifies the following concerning a Substitution: 1. Contractor has investigated the substitution and determined that it is equivalent or better than the specified work, in every way and it functions and performs in the same manner. 2. Warranty scope and time is the same or better. 3. It has no adverse impact on related or adjacent work nor on dimensions or construction progress. 4. Maintenance service and availability of parts is the same. 5. The cost identified in the request is complete and final and represents all related costs. Subsequent claims for additional costs which may later become apparent are waived. 6. Should substitution fail to function and perform as the specified work, the Contractor will remove the substitution at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Substitution Procedures 012500 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Contract Modification Procedures 1111PT.'TIZI1aI Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Contract Modification Procedures 012600 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. C. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Owner and Owner contract number C. Name of Architect. d. Architect's project number. e. Contractor's name and address. £ Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one -hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts of the Contract Sum. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Payment Procedures 012900 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site, include evidence of insurance for items stored off site. 6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL TIME A. When relevant, attach a request for additional time due to weather delays for the month, to that month's Application for Payment. Requests for additional time due to weather delays will only be considered when submitted with the Application for payment for that same month. Delays due to weather will only be considered when the cause for the delay exceeds the average number of weather event days for that month. Provide as supporting evidence the following: 1. Date of delay and type of weather event that caused the delay 2. Describe specifically what work was delayed 3. National Weather Service report for each day providing detail related to the weather event 4. National Weather Service report of historical average for the month related to high and low temperatures, rain, snow averages and other weather events. 1.6 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the 7t' day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 or a form with similar information as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Payment Procedures 012900 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. C. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. All copies shall include waivers of lien and updated construction schedule. H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner. I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Payment Procedures 012900 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Payment Procedures 012900 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project meetings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Description of work to be performed by that entity B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. 1. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list telephone numbers, including, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. I. Content: Project -specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. C. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. e. Indicate required installation sequences. £ Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or Contractor generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFL RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor -generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. £ Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Update and Submit log with Contractor's Application for Payment. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identiiication of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. 1. Preparation of record documents. in. Use of the premises. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. S. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. U. Parking availability. V. Office, work, and storage areas. W. Equipment deliveries and priorities. X. First aid. Y. Security. Z. Progress cleaning. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect, of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. 1. Weather limitations. in. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas r. Space and access limitations. S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. U. Installation procedures. V. Coordination with other work. W. Required performance results. X. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. C. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. k. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. 1. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off -site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of proposal requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULE A. Construction Schedule: Prepare schedule using software program designed for scheduling. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. B. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in propersequence C. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion and final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early or later completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 3. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 4. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion F. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance and date by which recovery will be accomplished. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Construction Progress Documentation 013200- Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas H. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time -impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. I. Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals update schedule to reflect actual construction schedule. J. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. 1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 3. hi subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom. b. Submit value summary printouts one week time before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 3.2 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Construction Progress Documentation 013200 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.3 SPECIAL REPORTS A. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Document construction progress with digital images. B. Date each image. C. Pre -construction: 1. Before starting construction, take photographs of the site and existing building. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: 1. Take photographs at least at monthly intervals documenting the construction progress. 2. Submit photographs with monthly pay application. E. Final Completion: 1. Take photographs after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Submit photographs with Project Record Documents. END OF SECTION 013200 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Construction Progress Documentation 013200 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect] and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Submittal Schedule: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 2. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. C. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. 1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: No more than 5 submittals may be submitted in one week. Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. Submittals received after 2pm shall be considered received the next day. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Submitttal Procedures 013300 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. D. Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 1. Other necessary identification. E. Electronic Submittals: Submit in Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) format and transmit via email. Coordinate with Architect when file size precludes use of email. Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project name, Submittal Number, and Specification Section number. Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix. 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form shall contain the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j . Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 1. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. in. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. n. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. o. Other necessary identification. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Submitttal Procedures 013300 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas p. Remarks. F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) will not be reviewed by Architect. Do no submit. 1. Submit submittals electronically via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect, will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. C. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Submitttal Procedures 013300 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. C. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. h. Dimensions. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm). D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality - control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Submitttal Procedures 013300 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. F. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. G. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. H. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 1. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. J. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. L. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. M. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. N. Building Code Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. O. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Submitttal Procedures 013300 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas Q. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." C. Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect] will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Architect will not review submittals that do not bear the Contractor's approval stamp and the submittal will be returned without action. D. Partial submittals submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. G. Maintenance Material Submittals: Deliver to Owner and forward list to Architect. END OF SECTION 013300 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Submitttal Procedures 013300 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality - assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on -site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on -site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Experienced: Unless otherwise indicated, when used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Quality Requirements 014000 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory -Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory -authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory -authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Quality Requirements 014000 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329 and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. H. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Proj ect. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality -control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality -control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Quality Requirements 014000 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in -situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. D. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. E. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections when noted as the responsibility of Owner: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality -control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service to Architect] with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Quality Requirements 014000 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 014000 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Quality Requirements 014000 - 5 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 3. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 References 014200 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 4. DOD - Department of Defense; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil. 5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov. 9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division; http://eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; www.trb.org. 15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov. 18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; www.usp.org. 19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com. D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil. 3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED -STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil. a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. C. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb. 6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB). Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 References 014200 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 References 014200 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer -service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water -service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric -power -service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. E. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. F. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Erosion- and Sedimentation -Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. B. Fire -Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire -prevention program. C. Moisture -Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water -damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water -damaged Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized -steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized -steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails, with galvanized barbed-wire top strand. B. Portable Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized -steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized -steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete galvanized -steel bases for supporting posts. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common -Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project -site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-) square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C). 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 Ix) at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid -propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of [8 > at each return -air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all construction personnel. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a computer in the primary field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 2. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot -mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot -mix asphalt base -course pavement before installation of final course. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire -fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas D. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. E. Project Signs: Provide Project signs. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. 3. Sign Description: a. Layout provided after award b. Size: 4 ft by 8 ft C. Sign to contain: 1) Logos of Architect, General Contractor and City. 2) Building Rendering. 3) Project Name. 4) Architect Name. 5) Contractor Name and phone number. 6) Letter font: Helvetica. d. Direct burial mounting. e. Sign Material: 1/4 inch thick medium density fiberboard and 4inch by 4 inch preservative treated posts. f. Install level, plumb and at location directed by the Architect. F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste -collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution." G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones. 2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation -control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. 4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. F. Pest Control: Engage pest -control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of termites, rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. I. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire -prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire -prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire -protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture -Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water -damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry -in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum -based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. C. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. I. Protect existing trees and plants indicated to remain. 2. Remove, relocate, and replant trees as indicated. 3. Provide services of Certified Arborist. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Other Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by at a height of 6 inches above ground for trees up to and including 4-inch size at this height and as measured at a height of 12 inches above the ground for trees larger than 4-inch size. B. Caliper (DBH): Diameter breast height; diameter of a trunk as measured at a height 54 inches above the ground line for trees with caliper of 8 inches or greater as measured at a height of 12 inches above the ground. C. Plant -Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings. D. Tree -Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius of 10'. E. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." B. Review methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Quality -control program. 2. Arborist's responsibilities 3. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of protection zones. 4. Trenching by hand or with air spade within protection zones. 5. Field quality control. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.5.1 Shop Drawings: 1.5.1.1 Include plans, elevations, sections, and locations of protection -zone fencing and signage, showing relation of equipment -movement routes and material storage locations with protection zones. 1.5.1.2 Detail fabrication and assembly of protection -zone fencing and signage. 1.5.1.3 Indicate extent of trenching by hand or with air spade within protection zones. 1.5.2 Samples: For each type of the following: 1.5.2.1 Organic Mulch: I -quart volume of organic mulch; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. 1.5.2.2 Protection -Zone Fencing: Assembled Samples of manufacturer's standard size made from full-size components. 1.5.2.3 Protection -Zone Signage: Full-size Samples of each size and text, ready for installation. 1.5.3 Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction. 1.5.3.1 Species and size of tree. 1.5.3.2 Location on site plan. Include unique identifier for each. 1.5.3.3 Reason for pruning. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 1 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.5.3.4 Description of pruning to be performed. 1.5.3.5 Description of maintenance following pruning. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For arborist and tree service firm. B. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged. C. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work. D. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities. 1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or video recordings. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or other plants designated to remain. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Arborist Qualifications: Licensed arborist in jurisdiction where Project is located. B. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed temporary tree and plant protection work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of the Work. C. Quality -Control Program: Prepare a written program to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and equipment during the Work without damaging trees and plantings. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement of protection zone fencing and signage, the arborist's and tree -service firm's responsibilities, instructions given to workers on the use and care of protection zones, and enforcement of requirements for protection zones. D. Contractors Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are contractors responsibility. FIELD CONDITIONS A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Moving or parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones. C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch. D. Quality -control program. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Arborist Qualifications: Licensed arborist in jurisdiction where Project is located. B. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed temporary tree and plant protection work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of the Work. C. Quality -Control Program: Prepare a written program to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and equipment during the Work without damaging trees and plantings. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement of protection zone fencing and signage, the arborist's and tree -service firm's responsibilities, Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock. Texas instructions given to workers on the use and care of protection zones, and enforcement of requirements for protection zones. D. Contractors Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are contractors responsibility. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Moving or parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones. C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Moving or parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones. C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Protection -Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting one of the following requirements: 1. Chain -Link Protection -Zone Fencing: Galvanized -steel fencing fabricated from minimum 2-inch (50-mm) opening, 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) diameter wire chain -link fabric; with pipe posts, minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts, and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts and 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter bottom tension wire; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system. 2. Plywood Protection -Zone Fencing: Plywood framed with four 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100- mm) rails, with preservative -treated wood posts spaced not more than 96 inches (2400 mm) apart. 3. Wood Protection -Zone Fencing: Constructed of two 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) horizontal rails, with preservative -treated wood posts spaced not more than 96 inches (2400 mm) apart, and lower rail set halfway between top rail and ground. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas sedimentation -control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by arborist, listing conditions detrimental to tree and plant protection. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated. Tie a 1-inch (25-mm) blue vinyl tape around each tree trunk at 54 inches (1372 mm) above the ground. B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations. 3.3 PROTECTION ZONES A. Protection -Zone Fencing: Install protection -zone fencing along edges of protection zones[in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering protected areas except by entrance gates. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close proximity to street intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation. 1. Chain -Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect. B. Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash. C. Maintain protection -zone fencing and signage in good condition as accepted by Architect and remove when operations are complete and equipment has been removed from site. 1. Do not remove protection -zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or equipment access through the protection zone. 2. Temporary access is permitted subject to preapproval in writing by arborist if a root buffer effective against soil compaction is constructed as directed by arborist. Maintain root buffer so long as access is permitted. 3.4 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" unless otherwise indicated. B. Trenching within Protection Zones: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, excavate under or around tree roots by hand or with air spade, or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning. If excavating by hand, use narrow -tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. C. Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches (75 mm) back from new construction and as required for root pruning. D. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. 3.5 ROOT PRUNING A. Prune tree roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as follows: 1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Cut Ends: Coat cut ends of roots more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues and that is acceptable to arborist. 3. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 4. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 5. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune tree roots 6 inches outside of the protection zone by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation. C. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand or with air spade to the depth of the required excavation to minimize damage to tree root systems. If excavating by hand, use narrow -tine spading forks to comb soil to expose roots. Cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 3.6 CROWN PRUNING A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as directed by arborist. 1. Prune to remove only broken, dying, or dead branches unless otherwise indicated. Do not prune for shape unless otherwise indicated. 2. Do not remove or reduce living branches to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. B. Unless otherwise directed by arborist and acceptable to Architect, do not cut tree leaders. C. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. D. Do not paint or apply sealants to wounds. E. Provide subsequent maintenance pruning during Contract period as recommended by arborist. F. Chip removed branches and dispose off -site. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant -protection measures in the vicinity of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports. 3.8 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs. 2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours according to arborist's written instructions. 3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by Architect. B. Soil Aeration: Where directed by Architect, aerate surface soil compacted during construction. Aerate 10 feet beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches to tree trunk. Drill 2 inch diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches (300 min) deep at 24 inches. Backfill holes with an equal mix of angered soil and sand. 3.9 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 015639 Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis -of -design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Product Requirements 016000 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Product Requirements 016000 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis -of -Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Product Requirements 016000 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner -installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in -place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. New construction or expansion of building project: 1. Qualification Data: provide when a land surveyor or professional engineer is required. 2. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. 3. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor or professional engineer. 4. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or increase deflection. 2. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in -place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Execution 017300 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in -place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water -service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: When the project is a new construction project or addition to a building, engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Execution 017300 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field -engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. D. Final Property Survey: When the project is a new construction project or addition to a building engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor or professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Execution 017300 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights recommended by industry standards. . 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. C. Protection: Protect in -place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. D. Cutting: Cut in -place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Execution 017300 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. E. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in -place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in -place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. F. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Execution 017300 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on -site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. ICI �Z�]�.���P►[I�IC�II17 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Execution 017300 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 4. Record Drawings 5. Warranties. 6. Final cleaning. 7. Repair of the Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Closeout Procedures 017700 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Substantial Completion Observation: Submit a written request for Observation to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 5 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Owner will either proceed with Observation or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request re -Observation when the Work identified previously inspected as incomplete is completed or corrected. Completed work will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control final inspection report. B. Final Observation: Submit a written request for final Observation to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Owner will either proceed with Observation or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request Re -Observation when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Closeout Procedures 017700 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance manuals of each system, and piece of equipment. B. Organize manuals in heavy 3-ring binders in a logical order. Identify each binder with project name. Include a Table of Contents in each binder indicating contents of that binder along with a listing of all binders. 1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record Drawings: 1. Maintain and protect Record Drawings during construction from damage. 2. During Construction: a. Mark to show actual locations of installations when varies from that shown originally, particularly in concealed locations. b. Note Construction Change Order work and corresponding Numbers 1.11 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-II-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Closeout Procedures 017700 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. in. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage and experience, licenses exterminator to rid project of rodents, insects and other pests. Prepare written report. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Closeout Procedures 017700 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned -out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 017700 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Closeout Procedures 017700 - 5 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner -occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below -grade improvements not part of selective demolition. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off -site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage for return to Owner: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. Protect as needed to maintain. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection and, for dust control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Pre -demolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Selective Demolition 024119 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials have been removed by Owner. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with AS SE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. 1. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems as needed by Contractor, that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. C. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Selective Demolition 024119 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from other areas of the park. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire -suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. 5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least four hours after flame -cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin -infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off -site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris -removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Selective Demolition 024119 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas protected storage location during selective demolition, cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power -driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power -driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power -driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. D. Concrete Slabs -on -Grade: Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA -approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Selective Demolition 024119 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 033000 - STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Controlled Low Strength Backfill Materials (CLSM) - Section 312324 B. Concrete Curbs and Walks - Section 321613 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 302 "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction". 3. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 4. ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting". 5. ACI 306 "Cold Weather Concreting". 6. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". 7. ACI 318 'Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". 8. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 9. ACI 211.1 "Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete". 10. ACI 212 "Admixtures for Concrete". 11. ACI 117 "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials". 12. MSP-1-01 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice". B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Architect. C. Design and Testing: 1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this Project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the Architect. A proven, established mix from Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Concrete 033000 - 1 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent (less than 24 months old), different compression test reports for the proposed mix. 2. Concrete Testing Service: Employ, at Contractor's expense, a testing laboratory acceptable to Architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. a. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect, at anytime during the progress of the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner's expense, including the retesting of the rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. 3. Test results shall be furnished to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, chemical floor hardeners, dry -shake finish materials and others, as requested by the Architect. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS: A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or "good -as -new". B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. D. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square spot footings are shown on the Drawings. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 18 February 2014 Structural Concrete 033000 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 (Grade 420). B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A1064, welded steel wire fabric in flat sheets. C. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A675, Grade 80 or ASTM A499. Dowels shall be sawn, not sheared. D. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. 2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. 3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot/dip galvanized plastic protected or stainless steel protected. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C150, Type I or 11, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Fine Aggregate: 1. ASTM C33. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. 2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted. 3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles or bars. b. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids. D. Fly Ash: The Contractor may, at his option, use ASTM C618, Type C or Type F fly ash, replacing a minium of 15% and a maximum of 20% of the cementitious materials content. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 18 February 2014 Structural Concrete 033000 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas E. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable. F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A or D, containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. H. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C494, as follows: 1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating. I. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by Architect. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G, containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: ASTM D944, premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 'h" thickness by depth of slab. B. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. D. Liquid Curing Compound: Use on all interior slabs to receive subsequent floor coverings. Shall be dissipating resin type, which chemically breaks down after approximately eight (8) weeks. Membrane forming compound shall meet ASTM C309, Types I and ID, Class B, water based. Meet federal/state VOC/AIM regulations. (Sodium silicates prohibited.) E. Curing and Sealing Compound: Use on all permanently exposed interior and exterior floor/paving surfaces. Conform to ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A or B. The sealer shall not after -yellow or change the natural color of the concrete and shall provide a highly weatherproof, stain -resistant and dust -proof sealer. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Concrete 033000 - 4 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1, ACI 301, and ACI 318. 1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C192 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C39, specified in ACI 301. Establish a curve showing relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when acceptable to the Architect, to establish each point on the curve. 2. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions. 3. If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or ifno suitable records are available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of concrete. 4. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACI 214 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100. C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect. D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: 1. 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/CM ratio, 0.68 maximum (non -air -entrained, except for floor slabs on grade), 0.59 maximum (air -entrained). 2. Interior floor slabs on grade shall have a strength of 3000 psi at 28 days with a water- cementitious ratio of about 0.46 and be non air -entrained. 3. See Section 321613 for additional requirements for concrete mix design for site work concrete. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Concrete 033000 - 5 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. B. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. C. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: l . 5.5% with 1 %2" maximum aggregate 2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate 3. 6.0% with 1/4" maximum aggregate 4. 7.0% with ''/z" maximum aggregate D. Use admixtures for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. E. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 2.7 SLUMP LIMITS A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3". 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3". 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition of HRWR to verified 2"-3" slump concrete. 4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4". 5. Slumps greater than those specified above must be approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to any concrete pour. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C94 and as herein specified. B. Control of Mixing Water: When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, water may be added only if neither the maximum permissible water -cement ratio nor the maximum permissible slump is exceeded. The drum shall be turned an additional 30 revolutions, or more if necessary, until the added water is uniformly mixed into the concrete. C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C94 may be required. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Concrete 033000 - 6 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 %2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for clean out, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap -off metal form ties, designated to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. H. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1'/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. I. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. J. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Re -tighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Structural Concrete 033000 - 7 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.2 PLACING REINFORCING A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. F. Install welded wire fabric in as long of lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.3 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: 1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect. 2. Provide key -ways at least 1'h" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. 3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction joints. B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: 1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. Use screed type joints equal to those manufactured by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. Screed Key j oints are of 24 gage galvanized steel with 1 1/a" dowel knockouts at 6" on centers. Install with a minimum of five special 16 gage by 1" stakes per ten feet of length of material. If saw cut control joints are used, they shall be made with a power saw fitted with an abrasive or diamond blade. Saw cuts must be one-fourth the slab thickness. Sawing shall begin as soon as the concrete surface is firm enough so that it will not be torn or damaged by the blade. This will be within 4 to 12 hours after the concrete finishing operations. C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Structural Concrete 033000 - 8 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. 2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. 3. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to re- handling or flowing. B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Concrete 033000 - 9 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment ofreinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. D. Placing Concrete Slabs: 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. E. Cold Weather Placing: 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of placement. 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. F. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Concrete 033000 - 10 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is the as -cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and smoothed. C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than the day after form removal. 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown. 3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic roofing, and as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. B. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed -to -view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thinfilm finish coating system. 2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free oftrowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding'/8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. C. Non -Slip Broom Finish: 1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before application. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Concrete 033000 - 11 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause excessive moisture loss. C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water -fog spray. b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing period. C. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. D. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides ofbeams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Concrete 033000 - 12 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas E. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. 1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods specified above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. F. Applying Concrete Sealer: Apply on all concrete slab floors scheduled to be left exposed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Concrete shall have cured for a least 7 days. 2. Concrete shall be clean and dry prior to application with oil stains, grease, etc. removed. 3. Apply by spray, brush, or lamb's wool applicator to approximate coverage of 500 square feet per gallon. 4. Do not apply if the temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.11 RE -USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Architect. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Structural Concrete 033000 - 13 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on the Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates ofthe manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: 1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to Architect. 2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over'/4" in any dimension and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1 ". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout or proprietary bonding agent. 3. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless ofwidth, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets and other objectionable conditions. 3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds maybe used when acceptable to Architects. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 " diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 1/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and brush with a neat cement grout Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Structural Concrete 033000 - 14 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2%2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by Architect. E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. 3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The Contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94. 2. Slump: One test for each set of compressive strength test specimens taken at point of discharge. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above and each time a set of compression test specimens made. 5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of 4 or 5 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. 6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 square feet of surface area placed, 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, (2) - 6" x 12" [or (3) - 4" x 8"] specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing, if required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the specimens tested at 28 days. a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cubic yards, the strength test may be waived by the Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. C. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Structural Concrete 033000 - 15 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42 or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION 033000 This Section prepared by Thoma Engineering, Inc. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Concrete 033000 - 16 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 033500 - CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of concrete floor toppings is shown on the drawings and in schedules. B. The types of concrete floor toppings include: 1. Standard aggregate toppings 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Concrete materials and methods: Section 033000 - Concrete Work B. Monolithic floor finishes: Section 033000 - Concrete Work C. Special Applied Finishes: Division 9. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the requirements of Section 033000, Concrete Work, and as herein specified. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish data, samples, laboratory test reports and materials certificates as specified in Section 033000, Concrete Work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type III. B. Standard Aggregate: ASTM C33, and as follows: 1. Fine aggregate, consisting of sand or crushed stone screenings, clean, hard, free from deleterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows: a. 3/8" : 100% b. No. 4: 95 - 100% C. No. 8: 80 - 90% d. No. 16: 50 - 75% e. No. 30: 30 - 50% Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Concrete Floor Toppings 033500 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas f. No. 50: 10 - 20% g. No. 100: 2 - 5% 2. Coarse aggregate consisting of gravel or crushed stone, clean, hard, free from deleterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows: a. ''/z": 100% b. 3/811: 30 - 50% C. No. 4: 0 - 15% d. No. 8: 0 - 5% C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C881, Equal to EUCO #452 Epoxy System, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company. D. Reinforcement: ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric. E. Unless otherwise shown, provide 4 x 4 - W 1.4 x W 1.4 welded wire fabric. 2.2 TOPPING MIX A. Standard Topping - Design mix to produce topping material with the following characteristics: 1. Compressive strength, 3500 psi minimum. 2. Slump, 4" maximum. (8" maximum for concrete containing HRWR, super plasticizer) 3. Cement per cu. yd., 590 lb. minimum 4. W/C ratio, 0.51 maximum. 2.3 MIXING A. Provide a batch type mechanical mixer for mixing topping material at project site. Equip batch mixer with a suitable charging hopper, water storage tank and a water -measuring device. Use only mixers which are capable of mixing aggregates, cement and water into a uniform mix within specified time, and of discharging mix without segregation. B. Mix each batch of 2 cu. yds or less for at least 1'/2 minutes after ingredients are in mixer. Increase mixing time 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd. or fraction thereof. C. Ready -mixed topping may be used when acceptable to the Architect. When acceptable, furnish ready -mixed topping complying with requirements of ASTM C94, as specified in Section 033000, Concrete Work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Topping applicator must examine the substrate and the conditions under which work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Concrete Floor Toppings 033500 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas acceptable to the applicator. B. Topping Applied to Fresh Concrete: Do not begin placement of topping until water ceases to rise to the surface, and all water and laitance have been removed from the base slab surface. C. Topping Applied to Hardened Concrete: Remove all dirt, loose materials, oil, grease, paint or other contaminants, leaving a clean surface. D. When the base slab surface is smooth and unacceptable for good bonding, roughen the surface by chipping or scarifying before cleaning. E. Prior to placing the topping mixture, thoroughly dampen the slab surface but do not leave standing water. Over the dampened surface apply specified bonding compound (rewettable or non-rewettable) or epoxy adhesive. Place topping mix after rewettable bonding compound has dried or while non-rewettable bonding compound or epoxy adhesive is still tacky. F. Prior to placing the topping mixture, thoroughly dampen the slab surface but do not leave standing water. Over the dampened surface apply specified epoxy adhesive. Place topping mix while epoxy adhesive is still wet. G. For reinforced toppings, provide necessary chairs or supports, and maintain position of reinforcing mesh as shown on the drawings. H. Joints: Mark the locations of joints in the base slab so that joints in the top course will be placed directly over them. 3.2 PLACING AND COMPACTION A. Spread topping mixture evenly over prepared base, bring to required level with straightedge and strike -off. After placement, do not work surface further until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power driven floats. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand -floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. B. Check and level surface plane to tolerance not exceeding'/4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high areas and fill low areas. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth finish. C. Where joints are required, construct to match and coincide with joints in base slab. Provide other joints as shown (if any). 3.3 TROWEL FINISH A. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power -driven trowels. Continue troweling until surface is ready to receive final troweling. Begin final hand -troweling when Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Concrete Floor Toppings 033500 - 3 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. B. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand -troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding'/s" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. 3.4 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Cure and protect topping applications and finish as specified in Section 03300, Concrete Work. 3.5 PERFORMANCE A. Failure of concrete topping to bond to substrate (as evidenced by a hollow sound when tapped) or disintegration or other failure of topping to perform as a floor finish, including failure to comply with requirements of Section 03300, will be considered failure ofmaterials and workmanship. Repair or replace toppings in areas of such failures as directed. END OF SECTION 033500 This section prepared by Thoma Engineering, Inc. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Concrete Floor Toppings 033500 - 4 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 033543 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes polished concrete finishing of existing and new concrete and scoring. 1. Concrete for polished concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, initial finishing, and curing is specified in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete not designated as polished concrete. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with polished concrete to attend. 2. Review cold- and hot -weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction joints, concrete repair procedures, concrete finishing, and protection of polished concrete. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Polishing Schedule: Submit plan showing polished concrete surfaces and schedule of polishing operations for each area of polished concrete before start of polishing operations. Include locations of all joints, including construction joints. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer Qualifications. 1. CPAA Certified Technician 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Sample Panels: After approval of verification sample and before casting concrete, produce field sample panels to demonstrate the approved range of selections made under Sample submittals. Produce a minimum of three sets of full-scale panels, approximately 48 by 48 inches (1200 by 1200 mm) minimum, to demonstrate the expected range of finish, color, and appearance variations. 1. Locate panels as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Maintain field sample panels during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 3. Demolish and remove field sample panels when directed. 4. Demonstrate curing, finishing, and protecting of polished concrete. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design 1. HTC Superfloor Gold -- Fine Aggregate (Salt and Pepper) 2. For information contact HTC Representative Zach Webb 972-345-7551 3. HTC Certified Contractor — LVR Carpet Center, Inc. Keith Rogers 806-866-9797 4. Repair Materials. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Polished Concrete Finishing 033543 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas a. a product that is designed to repair cracks and surface imperfections. The specified material must have sufficient boding capabilities to adhere after the polishing to the concrete surface and provide abrasion resistance equal to or greater than the sur- rounding concrete substrate. 6. Penetrating Colors. a. Prosoco Consolideck Gemtone Stain. 7. Liquid Floor Treatments. a. Prosoco Consolideck Grind and Fill. b. Prosoco Consolideck LS Densifier. C. Prosoco Consolideck LS Guard. 8. Joint Filler a. Versaflex SL 75 color to be selected from the full range of manufactures standard colors. 9. Equipment Requirements: a. Planetary Grinder capable of 726 lbs. of down pressure or greater with four counter rotation heads (three head machines are not acceptable). b. Metal and Resin bonded diamond tooling. C. Vacuum capable of 400 cubic feet per minute or greater. d. Single head high speed 1500 rpm walk behind machines equipped with 1500 grit industrial grade diamonds similar to HTC Twister yellow. e. Polyurea Pump. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Protect floor before and after polishing concrete. B. Protect floor from petroleum stains during entire project. 1. Diaper hydraulic powered equipment to avoid staining concrete. 2. Pipe cutting machines shall not be used. C. Steel will not be placed on the concrete to avoid rust stains. 3.2 GRINDING A. Grind or by other mechanical means as required to obtain consistent aggregate exposure. Start initial cut with 40 grit metal bonded diamonds removing approximately Imm of surface to ex- pose fine aggregate. Identify areas of low aggregate and review general conditions of floor with Project Manager. B. Progressive edge grinding will be necessary within'/2 inch of all vertical abutments including walls, columns, drains, and other permanent fixtures. C. Floor profile after grinding steps must be uniform, and produce a refined scratch pattern with no hard edge "wild scratching". D. Apply lithium silicate concrete densifyer in grinding sequence and according to Manufacture's written instructions. E. Remove metal bonded diamond scratches by grinding with progressively finer metal bonded diamonds, each to full refinement, up to metal bond 100 grit or finer, cleaning between each step. During final metal bond stage apply Prosoco Grind and Fill as recommended by Manu- facturer. F.Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding operations. 3.3 POLISHING A. Begin with a clean surface Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Polished Concrete Finishing 033543 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Start polishing stages with resin bonded diamond tooling in same grit as final metal bonded di- amonds above and continue using finer grit resin bonded diamonds to 1500 grit or finer clean- ing between each step. C. Apply dye for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according to Manufacture's written instructions. D. Apply guard as specified for polished concrete at end and according to Manufacture's written instructions, allowing recommended dry time. E. Burnish with high speed machine equipped with 1500 grit diamond polishing pad in two direc- tions and slow enough for concrete surface to reach temperature recommended by Manufacture of guard product. END OF SECTION 033543 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Polished Concrete Finishing 033543 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the Drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required. B. Structural steel is that work defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on the Drawings. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Reinforcing Steel - Section 033000 B. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications - Section 055000 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following except as otherwise indicated: 1. 2011 ANSUAISC 360-10 "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, and including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued. 2. AISC 303-10 "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3. AISC "Specification for Structural Joints using High Strength Bolts," 2009, approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections. 4. AWS D1.1 - " Structural Welding Code - Steel." 5. ASTM A6 - "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use." B. Qualifications for Welding Work: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. 3. If re -certification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's responsibility. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Steel Framing 051200 - 1 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. D. Design of Members and Connections: 1. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at the site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. 2. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings, Structural Steel: 1. Submit Shop Drawings prepared under the supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, and details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. 2. Architect's review of Shop Drawings will be for general considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials fabrication and erection of structural steel is the Contractor's responsibility. 3. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length and type of each weld. 4. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. 5. The fact that no exceptions have been taken or that comments and/or markings may have been made on or attached to Shop Drawings or submittals shall not constitute, either expressly or impliedly, a change to the Contract Documents. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay that work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. D. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A992, Fy = 50 ksi. B. Miscellaneous Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Steel Framing 051200 - 2 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi. D. All galvanizing shall be hot dipped galvanizing, ASTM A123 or ASTM A386. E. Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated. F. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low -carbon steel bolts and nuts. 1. Provide either hexagonal, or square, heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for exposed connections. G. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: 1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A325. H. Concrete Expansion Anchors: Wedge type anchors meeting Federal Specification A -A 1923A, Type 4. Adhesive Anchors: Hilti HVA adhesive anchor system with a heavy duty, two component adhesive anchor consisting of a self-contained adhesive capsule, a chiseled zinc plated all -threaded steel rod meeting the requirements ofACI 355.4, a nut, and a washer. Rods 3/8 inch through 1 1/4 inch shall have a minimum yield stress of 58 ksi and tensile strength of 72.5 ksi. J. Adhesive Anchors for Hollow Masonry Construction: Hilti HIT HY 20 System consisting of a dual cylinder adhesive refill pack, a mixing nozzle, a screen tube, a HIT dispenser with refill pack holder and a chamfered zinc plated all -threaded steel rod meeting the requirements of ACI 355.4, a nut and a washer. Rods 3/8 inch through 3/4 inch shall have a minimum yield stress of 58 ksi and tensile strength of 72.5 ksi. K. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. L. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; equal to Tnemec 10-99 (Red), AFP2018 Fleet Line Red Oxide Metal Primer by Adams Paint Company, Carbocoat 115 SG by Carboline. M. Non -Metallic Non -Shrink Grout: Pre -mixed, non-metallic, non -corrosive, non -staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CE CRD-C 621. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the final Shop Drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Steel Framing 051200 - 3 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 3. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces on members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. B. Connections: 1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. 2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 3. Provide high -strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are shown. C. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only the bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including purlins, girts and other framing members taking only nominal stress) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection. D. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high -strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Install flat hardened washers over slotted holes occurring in the outer ply of connections. E. Welded Construction: 1. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. F. Holes for Other Work: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final Shop Drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. G. Splicing: Splicing of beams shall be as shown on the Drawings. All other splicing shall be made only with the written consent of the Architect and/or Engineer. When approved, copies of weld tests shall be furnished to the Architect and Engineer. 2.3 SHOP PAINTING A. General: 1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on the exposed portions and the initial 2" of embedded areas only. 2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high -strength bolted with friction -type connections. 3. Do not paint surfaces, which are scheduled to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. 4. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Structural Steel Framing 051200 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and splatter, slag or flux deposits. Solvent clean steel to remove all soluble contaminates followed by power tool cleaning to remove all insoluble contaminates in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 1. SSPC-SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning", or 2. SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or 3. SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or 4. SSPC-SP 7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning". C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and all exposed surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. 3.2 ERECTION A. General: Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein specified. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete the work. D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in -place work. 1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. 2. Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor bolt installation requirements in concrete. E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Structural Steel Framing 051200 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. 3. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions, or as otherwise required. F. Field Assembly: 1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 2. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISC tolerances. 3. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean operating temperature of the structure. Make allowances for the difference between temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service. 4. Splice members only where shown or specified. G. Bolting: 1. Connection Type: Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, all bolted connections shall be snug -tightened using high -strength bolts in standard holes (hole diameter nominally 1/16 inch greater than the nominal bolt diameter) with threads included in the shear planes. Notwithstanding, the Contractor shall be responsible to adhere to provisions of AISC Specification Section J1.11, which lists circumstances under which certain connections require fully -tightened high strength bolts. 2. Oversize, Short Slotted and Long Slotted Holes: The dimensions and washer requirements of oversize, short slotted and long slotted holes shall conform to the AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 3. Design Strength of Fasteners: The design strength of bolts used in snug -tightened and/or pretensioned joints shall be as specified in the AISC Specification Table J3.2. The design capacity of bolts used in slip -critical joints shall be as specified in AISC Specification Appendix J3.8 and J3.9. 4. Fastener Tension: a. High strength bolts in snug -tightened joints shall be tightened to a snug tight condition only. Do not pretension bolts in snug -tightened joints the same as if they were in slip - critical joints. The snug -tightened condition is defined as the tightness that exists when all plies in a j oint are in firm contact. This may usually be attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench. 5. Washers: Washers under the bolt head and/or nut shall be used as required by the AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". 6. High strength bolts used in snug -tightened joints shall not be used in combination with welds to share load transmission in the same faying face of any connection, as specified in the AISC Specification. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Steel Framing 051200 - 6 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas H. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. Comply with AISC Specifications: For bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. J. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. K. Gas -Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to the Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. L. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. END OF SECTION 051200 This Section prepared by Thoma Engineering, Inc. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Structural Steel Framing 051200 - 7 7 March 2014 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel pipe and tube railings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 057300 "Decorative Metal Railings" for ornamental railings fabricated from pipes and tubes. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height. a. Show method of connecting and finishing members at intersections. D. Delegated -Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless -steel products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. E. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. F. Evaluation Reports: For post -installed anchors, from ICC-ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: Refer to local steel sources. B. Perforated Metal: McNichols: www.mcnichols.com/products/perforated C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 501bf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lb/ft. applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lb/ft. applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F. 2.3 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. E. Perforated Metal: Cold -rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, 11 Gauge, 3/4-inch holes @ 1 inch o.c. in staggered rows, 51 percent Open Area; 2.5 lbs/ SF. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Provide product with perforations matching McNichols Item No. 1634011141 or approved equal. F. General: Provide the following: 1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. G. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas H. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 3. Provide tamper -resistant flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. I. Post -Installed Anchors: Provide Torque -controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 1. For railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. B. Low -Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. E. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099600 "High -Performance Coatings." F. Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc -rich primer. G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. H. Anchoring Cement: Factory -packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic -controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water -Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings. J. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. K. Form Changes in Direction as Follows: 1. As detailed. 2. By flush bends. 3. By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated. L. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. M. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. N. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. O. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush - resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. P. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. Q. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. R. Perforated -Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from perforated metal made from steel. 1. Edge panels with U-shaped channels made from metal sheet, of same metal as perforated metal and not less than 0.043 inch (1.1 mm) thick. 2. Orient perforated metal with pattern horizontal. S. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open -sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Non -Galvanized Railings: B. For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous -metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves; however, galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Exterior Railings: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Railings Indicated to Receive Zinc -Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Railings Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High -Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Railings: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. E. High -Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime - coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m). C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in -place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Form or core -drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring material. D. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. F. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip -fit metal sockets cast in concrete. 3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing ends. B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends. C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steel -framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 5. For steel -framed partitions, use self -tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements. 6. For steel -framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 055213 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as a part of other sections of these specifications and which generally is not exposed to view unless otherwise detailed or scheduled. Work under this Section includes: 1. Wood Framing 2. Sheathing 3. Decking 4. Wood Grounds, Nailers and Blocking 5. Wood Furring. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Metal Fabrications - Section 055000 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with the applicable rules of the respective grading and inspecting agencies for species and products indicated. B. Wood Structural Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1, PS 2 or PRP 108 and identified with the appropriate trademark of APA. C. Identification: Factory mark each piece of lumber and wood structural panel with type, grade, mill and grading agency, except omit marking on surfaces to receive transparent finish and submit mill certificate that materials have been inspected and graded in accordance with grading standards if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. D. Product Handling: Keep materials dry during delivery, storage and handling. Store lumber and panels in stacks with provision for air circulation. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp surfaces. Protect exposed materials from weather. E. Coordination: Coordinate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports so that attached work will comply with design requirements. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Rough Carpentry 061000 - 1 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber complying with the lumber producer's inspection agency grading rules certified as conforming to the "National Grading Rules for Dimension Lumber" by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSO). Dress dimensional lumber S4S unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 FRAMING A. Roof Joists: No. 2, Kiln Dried, Southern Yellow Pine or No. 2, Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum moisture. B. Studs: Stud Grade, Kiln Dried, Southern Yellow Pine, or Stud Grade, Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum moisture. C. Other Framing Material: No. 2, KD, Southern Yellow Pine, or No. 2, Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum M.C. D. Grounds and Nailers: No. 2, KD, Southern Yellow Pine, or No. 2, Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum M.C. 2.3 SHEATHING (WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS - PLYWOOD, OSB OR COMPOSITE PANELS) A. Wood Structural Panels: APA rated sheathing, exposure 1 with thickness noted on the Drawings. B. Gypsum: Provide 5/8" thick gypsum board sheathing complying with ASTM C79, 4 feet wide x 8 feet long equal to Georgia - Pacific "Firestop". C. Fiberboard: Provide fiberboard sheathing, ASTM C208, 25/32" thick, 2 feet x 8 feet panels with "V" tongued -and -grooved long edges. 2.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Treatment shall be in accordance with the Vacuum Wood Preservers Institute (VWPI) standards and shall conform to Federal Specification TT-W-572B(1). The treatment shall be with a water repellent preservative containing 5% by weight ofpentachlorophenol, with a 2 pound retention per cubic foot using the Dri-Vac process of controlled vacuum. 2.5 CONNECTORS A. Connect all roof joists to exterior walls with 18 gage zinc coated steel connectors. Joist hangers, where required, shall be equal to "Simpson", size as required. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Rough Carpentry 061000 - 2 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.6 FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES Provide size, type, materials and finish for each application, complying with the following: A. Nails and Staples: FS FF-N-105B VALID NOTICE 1. B. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-11ID. C. Bolts and Studs: FS FF-B-575C. D. Nuts: FS FF-N-836D(2). E. Washers: FS FF-W-92B. F. Lag Screws or Lag Bolts: FS FF-B-561C. G. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588C. H. Bar or Strap Anchors: ASTM A575 carbon steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Anchorage: Anchors shall be installed where specified or shown on the Drawings to anchor carpentry to masonry or concrete. Anchors for wall partition sills may be bolts 8" long spaced 8 feet o.c. or power driven nails at 4 feet o.c. B. Moisture Seal: A moisture seal or barrier shall be placed under or around wood members which bear on or are embedded in concrete or masonry. Seal shall be asphalt mastic or other approved type. C. Wood Grounds: Provide wood grounds and blocking of size and shape required for plaster work, for securing toilet accessories, finish hardware, door stops and trim for chalkboards, tackboards, etc. Install true to line, level, plumb and well secured in place. Wood blocking or nailers on drywall metal framing systems shall be bolted in place. 3.2 WOOD STUD FRAMING A. General: Provide stud framing where shown. Unless otherwise shown, use 2" x 4" wood studs spaced 16" o.c. with 4" face perpendicular to direction of wall or partition. Provide single bottom plate and double -top plates 2" thick by width of studs; except single top plate may be used for non-loadbearing partitions. Nail or anchor plates to supporting construction. B. Construct corners and intersections with not less than 3 studs. C. Provide miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required for support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items and trim. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Rough Carpentry 061000 - 3 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas D. Provide continuous horizontal blocking row at mid -height of single -story partitions over 8 feet high and at midpoint of multi -story partitions, using 2" thick members of same width as wall or partitions. E. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. F. For non -bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs and headers not less than 4" deep for openings 3 feet and less in width and not less than 6" deep for wider openings. G. For load -bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs for openings 6 feet and less in width and triple jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth shown, or if not shown, provide as recommended by Table II of N.F.P.A. "Manual for House Framing". 3.3 WOOD JOIST FRAMING A. General: Provide framing of sizes and on spacings shown. Install with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1 V? of bearing on wood or metal or 3" on masonry. Attach to wood bearing members by metal connectors; frame to wood supporting members with wood ledges as shown, or if not shown, with metal connectors. Fire -cut members built into masonry (if any). Frame openings with headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 4 feet. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to 1/6 depth of joist, '/s at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3-depth of joist or locate closer than 2" from top or bottom. Provide solid blocking (2" thick by depth of joist) at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band member. B. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders or partitions not less than 4" or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking (2" thick by depth of joist) over supports. C. Provide bridging between joists where nominal depth -to -thickness ratio exceeds 4, at intervals of 8 feet. Use bevel cut 1" x 4" or 2" x 3" wood bracing, double-crossed and nail both ends to joists, or use solid wood bridging 2" thick by depth of joists, end nailed to joist. 3.4 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL SHEATHING AND DECKING INSTALLATION A. Install as recommended by the APA's "Design/Construction Guide Residential and Commercial" (Form E30) for the spacing of supports or types of substrates involved in the work. Provide thickness shown, or if not shown, provide thickness recommended by APA. 3.5 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Install 4 foot x 8 foot panels horizontally, with end joints staggered over supports. At wood studs, nail as recommended by manufacturer, but with not less than 11 gage galvanized roofing nails or 15 gage galvanized staples; provide 8 per 4 foot width at each support. Tape all joints with foil backed tape. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Rough Carpentry 061000 - 4 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.6 FIBERBOARD SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Install 2 foot x 8 foot panels horizontally with grooved edge down and end joints staggered over supports. Nail as recommended by manufacturer, but with not less than 11 gage galvanized roofing nails, 8d common nails, or 16 gage galvanized staples, 4 per 2 foot width at each intermediate support and 7 per width at each end of panel. END OF SECTION 061000 This Section prepared by Thoma Engineering, Inc. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Rough Carpentry 061000 - 5 7 March 2014 No Text SECTION 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials, both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures when tested according to ASTM D 5516 and ASTM D 5664. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Preservative -treated wood. 2. Fire -retardant -treated wood. 3. Power -driven fasteners. 4. Powder -actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 -1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria": 1. Dimension lumber. 2. Miscellaneous lumber. 3. Interior wood trim. 4. Shelving and clothes rods. 5. Plywood. 6. Oriented strand board. 7. Particleboard underlayment. 8. Hardboard underlayment. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide dry lumber with nineteen percent (19%) maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Provide dry lumber with fifteen percent (15%) maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Plywood 2. Oriented Strand Board 3. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated. 4. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial." 5. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard. 2.02 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 2 A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and [one of] the following: a) Chromated copper arsenate (CCA). b) Ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate (ACZA). c) Ammoniacal, or amine, copper quat (ACQ). d) Copper bis (dimethyldithiocarbamate) (CDDC). e) Ammoniacal copper citrate (CC). f) Copper azole, Type A (CBA-A). g) Oxine copper (copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln -dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of nineteen percent (19%) for lumber and fifteen percent (15%) for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than eighteen inches (18") above grade. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2.03 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem -fir or Hem -fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or Spruce -pine -fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. 5. Northern species; NLGA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. C. Other Framing: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Douglas fir -larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 2. Douglas fir -south; WWPA. 3. Douglas fir -larch (north); NLGA. 4. Hem -fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 3 6. Southern pine; SPIB. 7. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 8. Spruce -pine -fir (south); NELMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 9. Spruce -pine -fir; NLGA. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Blocking. 3. Cants. 4. Nailers. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with fifteen percent (15%) maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem -fir or Hem -fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or Spruce -pine -fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. 5. Northern species; NLGA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with fifteen percent (15%) maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Mixed southern pine, B & B Finish No. 1 grade; SPIB. 3. Hem -fir or Hem -fir (north), Superior or C & Btr Finish grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or Spruce -pine -fir, grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 5. Western red cedar, A grade; NLGA or WWPA. D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with fifteen percent (15%) maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem -fir or Hem -fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or Spruce -pine -fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 5. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 6. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.05 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 4 B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M). G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade Al or A4). 2.06 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS 1. General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber and plywood. D. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards. E. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 5 F. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. 3.02 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 064219 - PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic -laminate -faced wood paneling (decorative laminate surfacing). 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic -laminate -faced wood paneling unless concealed within other construction before paneling installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate adhesives and fire -retardant -treated materials. 1. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical -treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of paneling, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Include dimensioned plans and elevations. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring and blocking, including concealed blocking specified in other Sections. C. Samples for plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom -fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. Shop is a licensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at the Project and has a 5 year record of .successful installation of similar work. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver paneling until painting and similar operations that could damage paneling have been completed in installation areas. If paneling must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Limitations: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where paneling is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING 064219 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support paneling by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where paneling is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that paneling can be installed as indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING A. Grade: Premium. B. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3 and the following requirements: 1. Faces: 0.048 inches thick 2. Backs: 0.020 inches thick. 3. Exposed Edges: Same as face. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on the drawings. D. Panel Core: medium -density fiberboard 1. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 min). E. Exposed Panel Edges: Plastic -laminate matching faces. F. Panel Reveals: Matte black plastic laminate. G. Assemble panels by gluing and concealed fastening. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Materials, General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Moisture Content: 4 to 9 percent. C. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 160, 47 lb density minimum Particleboard is not acceptable. 2. Softwood Plywood (veneer core): DOC VPS 1, Exposure 1 3. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1 D. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. Use adhesives recommended by the manufacturer of the plastic laminate. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber Fire -retardant - treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. Use nonferrous - metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Sand fire -retardant -treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. C. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING 064219 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition paneling to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing paneling, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install paneling to comply with same grade as paneling to be installed. B. Install paneling level, plumb, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch (1.6 mm in 2400-mm) vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) horizontal variation from a true plane. 1. For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal width, alignment of top and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceeding 1/16 inch 1.5 mm. C. Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel -hanger clips or splined connection strips. Do not use face fastening. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective paneling, where possible, to eliminate defects; where not possible to repair, replace paneling. Adjust for uniform appearance. B. Clean paneling on exposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. PAN Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING 064219 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 07321 - CLAY ROOF TILE REPAIR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY B. This Section includes the following: 1. Clay roof tiles. 2. Tile accessories. 3. Self -adhering sheet underlayment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079, glossaries in RTI/WSRCA's "Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Design Criteria Installation Manual for Moderate Climate Regions," and NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of clay tile and clay tile accessory indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of trim involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected: 1. Clay Tile: Full size. 2. Clay Tile Accessories: Full size. 3. Self -Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches (300 mm) square. D. Material Test Reports: For each type of tile. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For clay tile, fasteners, and fastener systems. F. Maintenance Data: For clay tile roofing to include in maintenance manuals. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain clay tiles and clay tile accessories through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide clay tiles and related roofing materials with the fire - test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A; UL 790 or ASTM E 108 for application and roof slopes indicated. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double -stack rolls. 1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members. B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 CLAY ROOF TILES 07321 -1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Install self -adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Roofing Installer's Warranty: Roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by roofing Installer, covering Work of this Section, in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace components of clay tile roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 CLAY TILES A. Available Products: 1. Ludowici Roof Tile, Inc.; B. Clay Tile: ASTM C 1167, molded- or extruded -clay roof tile units of shape and configuration indicated, kiln fired to vitrification, and free of surface imperfections. Provide with fastening holes prepunched at factory before firing. 1. High -Profile Shape: Type I, Spanish. 2. Finish and Texture: Match Existing. 3. Color: Match Existing 4. High Profile -Shape Clay Tile Accessories: Ridge, hip and hip starter, starter, eave closure and top fixture units, color to match roof tile. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. B. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied. C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, polyurethane -based joint sealant; of Type M or S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. D. Cold -Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard asphalt -based, one- or two-part, asbestos -free, cold -applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with underlayments. E. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type M, natural color for concealed -from -view mortar. 1. Mortar Pigment: ASTM C 979. Produce mortar matching the color of tile selected for exposed -to -view mortar. F. Eave Closure: Manufacturer's standard EPDM eave closure formed to shape of tile. G. Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 (1.1-by-1.4-mm) mesh of PVC -coated, glass -fiber thread. H. Tile Underlayment: Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment, ASTM D 1970, minimum of 75 mils thick, flexible, fiberglass reinforced, self -adhering rubberized asphalt sheet membrane with a polymer film on the surface and a removable treated release film on the adhesive side. 1. Available Products: a. Tamko TW Metal and Tile Underlayment Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 CLAY ROOF TILES 07321 -2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.04 FASTENERS A. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667, hot -dip galvanized steel, 0.1055-inch- (2.7-mm-) diameter shank, sharp -pointed, conventional roofing nails with barbed shanks; minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter head; and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into roof -deck sheathing. 1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. B. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless -steel, or hot -dip galvanized steel wire with low - profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch (25-mm) minimum diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through roof. 3. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Install underlayments according to tile manufacturer's written recommendations and recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." 1. Cover ridge and hip wood nailers with underlayment strips. B. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install wrinkle free, complying with low -temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 mm), staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between succeeding courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces to receive self -adhering sheet underlayment. 2. Extend self -adhering sheet underlayment over entire roof deck. 3.03 TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof tiles according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in RTI/WSRCA's "Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Design Criteria Installation Manual for Moderate Climate Regions," and to NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." 1. Maintain uniform exposure and coursing of tiles throughout roof. 2. Extend tiles 2 inches (50 mm) over eave fasciae. 3. Nail Fastening: Drive nails to clear the tile so the tile hangs from the nail and is not drawn up. a. Install wire through nail holes of cut tiles that cannot be nailed directly to roof deck, and fasten to nails driven into deck. 4. Wire Tie Fastening: Install wire -tie systems and fasten tile according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Mortar Setting: Install tile according to FRSA/NTRMA's "Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Installation Manual." 6. Install storm clips to capture edges of longitudinal sides of tiles and securely fasten to roof deck. 7. Install tile locks to support and lock overlying tile butts to underlying tiles. 8. Cut and fit tiles neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other projections through roof. Fill voids with mortar. 9. Install tiles with color blend approved by Architect. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 CLAY ROOF TILES 07321 -3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or broken tiles. B. Remove excess tile and debris from Project site. END OF SECTION 07321 Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 CLAY ROOF TILES 07321 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 074646 - FIBER -CEMENT SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes fiber -cement porch ceiling panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Selection: For fiber -cement porch ceiling panel and vertical siding including related accessories. 1. 12-inch- (300-mm-) long -by -actual -width Sample of porch ceiling and vertical siding. 2. 12-inch- (300-mm-) long -by -actual -width Samples of trim and accessories. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of fiber -cement porch ceiling panels. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fiber -cement siding. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fiber -cement siding required, from ICC-ES. D. Warranty: For warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of product, including related accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. lwMjk11►1W21y_12141aLTA krY919IF.3 .M U]UVIMW1I11Q.y A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish full lengths of fiber -cement porch ceiling panels including related accessories, in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with labels intact until time of use. B. Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. D. Store siding flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing. E. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in ac- cordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. E. Deliver and store per manufacturer's recommendations. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Warranty: 1. Manufacturers' standard 30 year limited warranty on materials. 2. Application Warranty: Application limited warranty for 2 years. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Fiber -Cement Siding 074646 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain products, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 FIBER -CEMENT SIDING A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade 11, fiber -cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. B. Labeling: Provide fiber -cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Basis of Design: James Hardie Building Products, Inc., HZ10 1. Vertical Siding a. Nominal thickness: 5/16 inch b. Sheet size: 4 ft x 8 ft C. Texture: Smooth 2. Beaded Porch Panel. a. Nominal Thickness: '/4 inch b. Sheet size: 4 ft x 8 ft C. Horizontal Pattern: Boards: Bead at 2 inches o.c. d. Texture: Wood grain. D. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, sill stool, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. 1. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated. B. Ventilation: Provide one perforated standard vent with insect screen. Locate at perimeter of porch. C. Fasteners: 1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails meeting manufacturers written installation instructions of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) into substrate. 2. For fastening fiber cement, use hot -dip galvanized fasteners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fiber -cement panels and related accessories. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. 1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Install fasteners no less than 16 inches o.c. or as indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. All edges must be supported by framing. Install framing in addition to existing as needed. B. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weather tight installation. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Fiber -Cement Siding 074646 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 074646 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Fiber -Cement Siding 074646 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 07591- REROOFING PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof tear -off. 1.03 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. B. Existing Membrane Roofing System: clay tile roofing, surfacing, and components and accessories between deck and roofing membrane. C. Substrate Board: Rigid board or panel products placed over the roof deck that serve as thermal barriers, provide a smooth substrate, or serve as a component of a fire -resistance -rated roofing system. D. Roof Re -Cover Preparation: Existing roofing membrane that is to remain and be prepared for reuse. E. Roof Tear -Off. Removal of existing membrane roofing system from deck. F. Partial Roof Tear -Off. Removal of a portion of existing membrane roofing system from deck or removal of selected components and accessories from existing membrane roofing system. G. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site unless indicated to be removed and reinstalled. H. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not indicated to be removed. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Temporary Roofing: Include Product Data and description of temporary roofing system. If temporary roof will remain in place, submit surface preparation requirements needed to receive permanent roof, and submit a letter from roofing membrane manufacturer stating acceptance of the temporary membrane, and that its inclusion will not adversely affect the roofing system's resistance to fire and wind. C. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins. D. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes, such as asbestos -containing material, by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer of new membrane roofing system approved by warrantor of existing roofing system to work on existing roofing. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning membrane roofing removal. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Preliminary Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: Mary Crites, AIA-Architect MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 1 7 March 14 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Meet with Owner; Owner's representative; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency representative; roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; roofing Installer including project manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects reroofing including installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to reroofing preparation, including membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system that is to remain, during and after installation. 4. Review roof drainage during each stage of reroofing and review roof drain plugging and plug removal procedures. 5. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 6. Review existing deck removal procedures and Owner notifications. 7. Review procedures to determine condition and acceptance of existing deck and base flashing substrate for reuse. 8. Review structural loading limitations of deck during reroofing. 9. Review base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect reroofing. 10. Review HVAC shutdown and sealing of air intakes. 11. Review shutdown of fire -suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems. 12. Review procedures for asbestos removal or unexpected discovery of asbestos -containing materials. 13. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 14. Review existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding. D. Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with Owner, Owner's representative, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, roofing Installer including project manager, superintendent, foreman, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects reroofing including installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to reroofing preparation, including membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system that is to remain, during and after installation. 4. Review roof drainage during each stage of reroofing and review roof drain plugging and plug removal procedures. 5. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 6. Review existing deck removal procedures and Owner notifications. 7. Review procedures to determine condition and acceptance of existing deck for reuse. 8. Review structural loading limitations of deck during reroofing. 9. Review base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect reroofing. 10. Review HVAC shutdown and sealing of air intakes. 11. Review shutdown of fire -suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems. 12. Review procedures for asbestos removal or unexpected discovery of asbestos -containing materials. 13. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 -2 7 March 14 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 14. Review existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Conduct reroofing so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than 48 hours notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations. 1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can place protective dust or water leakage covers over sensitive equipment or furnishings, shut down HVAC and fire -alarm or - detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants from below the work area if desired. 2. Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify Owner to evacuate occupants from below the affected area. Verify that occupants below the work area have been evacuated prior to proceeding with work over the impaired deck area. B. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations. C. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. D. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be reroofed. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. E. Limit construction loads on roof for uniformly distributed loads. F. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering into existing roofing system or building. G. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials such as asbestos -containing materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. Existing roof will be left no less watertight than before removal. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INFILL MATERIALS A. Use infill materials matching existing membrane roofing system materials, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Infill materials are specified in Division 7 Section 07321 Clay Roofing Tile 2.02 AUXILIARY REROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary reroofing preparation materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with components of existing and new membrane roofing system. B. Base Sheet Fasteners: Capped head, factory -coated steel fasteners, listed in FMG's "Approval Guide." C. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Cover air intake louvers before proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork. B. During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on -site to facilitate rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain. C. Verify that rooftop utilities and service piping have been shut off before commencing Work. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 3 7 March 14 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.02 ROOF TEAR -OFF A. General: Notify Owner each day of extent of roof tear -off proposed. B. Roof Tear -Off: Where indicated, remove existing roofing membrane and other membrane roofing system components down to the deck. 1. Remove wooden batten boards and existing clay tile. 2. Bitumen and felts that are firmly bonded to decks are permitted to remain if felts are dry. Remove unadhered bitumen and felts and wet felts. 3.03 DECK PREPARATION A. Inspect deck after tear -off of membrane roofing system. 1. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. B. If broken or loose fasteners that secure deck panels to one another or to structure are observed, or if deck appears or feels inadequately attached, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect. C. If deck surface is not suitable for receiving new roofing, or if structural integrity of deck is suspect, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect. D. Provide additional deck securement as indicated on Drawings. E. Replace deck as indicated on Drawings. 3.04 CATEGORY II (NON -FRIABLE) ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS (ACM) REMOVAL NOTE: Asbestos removal procedures are required (if asbestos is present) while removal of ACM roof materials takes place. The following procedures are to be followed as a minimum: A. Roofing contractors who perform asbestos roof tear -off shall use hand tools such as axes, picks, shovels or mechanical equipment such as a "roof warrior" that uses a reciprocating wedge to tear roofing materials. Breaking and/or slicing of material is permitted. Sanding, grinding or abrading during handling is not permitted. B. Wrap all rooftop ducts, vents or exhaust openings with 6 mil poly and tape. C. Provide an Asbestos Hazard Control Supervisor (competent person) to oversee demolition. D. Ensure employees have received OSHA required training in asbestos removal and health hazards associated with exposure to airborne asbestos fibers. E. Roof will be sufficiently wetted down before removal to prevent dust, using pump -up garden sprayer or water hose with spray nozzle. F. Perform personal and area air monitoring for at least the first three (3) days of the project in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1001. Monitoring shall be done by either: 1) in-house certified abatement personnel; or 2) certified asbestos monitoring personnel from a certified outside source. G. Asbestos Warning signs and tape shall be posted in tear -off area. H. Based on air monitoring results, the contractor MUST execute a Written Negative Exposure Assessment Determination and keep on file at the project site along with air monitoring results. I. Use airtight chutes or mechanical means to lower ACM from the roof. The ACM must be wrapped in poly and removed daily. If ACM is NOT wrapped, the disposal container must be enclosed. J. Disposal: Can be disposed of as construction debris at any approved landfill. 3.05 DISPOSAL A. Collect and place demolished materials in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. 1. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on -site will not be permitted. B. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect END OF SECTION 07591 MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 4 7 March 14 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed steep -slope roof flashing and trim. 2. Related accessories. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Copper Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." B. Reference Standards: Applicable portions of ASCE, SMACNA, ASTM and NAAMM publications. 1.03 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard limited product warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in product which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the Owner/Project Consultant may have under the contract documents. Failure is defined to include product failure which leads to interruption of a watertight installation. Correction may include repair or replacement of failed product. B. Contractor's Warranty Period: For roofing flashing and sheet metal, provide a written warranty which shall warrant work to be free of leaks and defects in materials and workmanship for two (2) years, starting from date of substantial completion. C. Defects of the sheet metal occurring during the warranty period shall be promptly corrected by the contractor, and defects of the roofing shall be promptly corrected by the manufacturer at no additional cost to the Owner. Upon notification from the Owner or the Owner's representative that evidence of a defect exists, the responsible party shall immediately inform the Owner's representative of the date on which corrective work will be scheduled, and shall notify the Owner's representative when the corrective work has been completed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL MATERIAL A. Hot -dipped Galvanized Steel for use as continuous clips: Minimum 22-gauge, G-90, hot -dipped galvanized metal, commercial quality, ASTM A 525. B. Prefinished Galvanized Sheet Steel (where visible from the ground): Shall be 24-gauge flat stock, prefinished with Kynar finish meeting ASTM A 446, forty-five and one-half inches to forty-eight inches width by one hundred twenty inches in length (45-1/2" - 48" x 120") for use as new metal edge gravel guard, cover plates, downspouts, gutters, coping and miscellaneous metal. Standard color to be selected by Owner/Project Consultant. C. Sheet Lead: QQ-L-201, Grade B. 2.02 FASTENERS A. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1.Nails for metal sheet: 0.109 inch (2.8 mm) minimum and not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) long, barbed with large head. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 3.Pop Rivets: Full stainless steel Series 42 or 44, as appropriate. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07620 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Continuous Clip: Concealed hold-down clip type; of same materials as coping, gravel guard, sized to suit application. Use a continuous clip, minimum 22-gauge G-90 galvanized. 2.03 RELATED MATERIAL A. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant, black color. B. Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153, cutback asphalt type. C. Sealant (for Sheet Metal): One -component polyurethane, conforming to requirements of FS TT-S-230C, non -staining and non -bleeding. D. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Splash Blocks: Concrete, 3000 psi, 28 days. Provide and install with protection pads at all downspouts. 2. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, non -corrosive, size, and gauge required for performance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. Provide all shop drawings and mock-ups one month prior to installation to the Owner/Project Consultant for approval. 3.03 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Shop -fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown, and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather -resistant performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Fabricate gravel stops/fascia, gutters/downspouts, counterflashings, pitch pans, expansion joints, and copings with new galvanized sheet metal as specified. Fabricate light metal coping, gutters and downspouts as indicated. C. Form sheet metal on bending brake. D. Shape, trim and hand seam metal on bench insofar as practicable. E. Form materials with straight lines, sharp angles and smooth curves. F. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed edge to form hem (1/2" minimum). G. Weld or solder joints on parts that are to be permanently and rigidly assembled. H. Submit sheet metal models for approval by the Owner/Project Consultant. I. Limit single -piece lengths to ten feet (10'). J. Fabricate corner pieces with eighteen inch (18") extensions, metered and sealed by forming as one piece. K. Surface sand flange prior to applying any primers on Kynar metal. L. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous paint. M. All sheet metal shall be sealed and watertight. N. Metal work should be secured so as to prevent damage from buckling or wind. Where clips are shown, these are to be continuous. O. All metal to receive bitumen or adhesive shall be first primed with asphalt primer. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07620 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas P. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges are to be seamed, form seams, and soldered. Q. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non -expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with industry standards. R. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non -compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. S. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General: All sheet metal termination to vertical wall shall have a through -wall with receiver installed on masonry walls. This applies to edge metal, base flashing closures and all vertical surface intersections. Refer to NRCA, SMACNA, and metal manufacturer's guidelines. B. Drip Edge Metal: 1. Secure metal flashings per specifications. 2. Lock seams and end joints. 3. Form sections identical to profiles as shown or approved similar, to match existing building. 4. Fabricate corner pieces with minimum eighteen inch (18"), maximum forty-eight inch (48") extensions, formed and sealed with rivets and sealant, as one piece. 5. Hem exposed edges three -fourths inch (3/4") minimum. 6. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous paint. Surface sand before applying primers. 7. Integrate flashing in a manner consistent with detailing. 8. Provide and install continuous clip around perimeter. 9. Apply sealant at horizontal juncture of gravel guard metal to exterior vertical wall. 10. Shall be fabricated in accordance with all SMACNA provisions. 11. Install bead of sealant at metal edge juncture at exterior wall surface. C. Valley Metal: 1. Remove existing and replace with new metal as required for a permanent watertight installation. 2. Shall be installed in ten foot (10') sections minimum. 3. Secure metal flashings per specifications. 4. Lock seams and end joints. 5. Form sections identical to profiles as shown or approved similar, to match existing building. 6. Fabricate corner pieces with minimum eighteen inch (18"), maximum forty-eight inch (48") extensions, formed and sealed with rivets and sealant, as one piece. 7. Hem exposed edges three -fourths inch (3/4") minimum. 8. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous paint. Surface sand before applying primers. 9. Integrate flashing in a manner consistent with detailing. 10. Shall be fabricated in accordance with all SMACNA provisions. D. Roof Termination at Rise Wall: 1. Shall be as outlined by details, and be in full compliance with all provisions of SMACNA and FM Global requirements for attachment, installation and recommendations. 2. Secure metal flashings per specifications. 3. Lock seams and end joints. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07620 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 4. Form sections identical to profiles as shown or approved similar, to match existing building. 5. Fabricate corner pieces with minimum eighteen inch (18"), maximum forty-eight inch (48") extensions, formed and sealed with rivets and sealant, as one piece. 6. Hem exposed edges three -fourths inch (3/4") minimum. 7. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous paint. Surface sand before applying primers. 8. Integrate flashing in a manner consistent with detailing. 9. Provide and install continuous clip around perimeter. 10. Shall be fabricated in accordance with all SMACNA provisions. E. Counterflashing: 1. Remove existing and replace with new metal counterflashing as required for a permanent watertight installation. 2. Saw cut brick mortar joint to receive friction fit reglet and removable counterflashing as detailed in SMACNA Figure 4-3E. 3.05 FINISH A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07620 Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 14 SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07620 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non -traffic surfaces: a) Joints between plant -precast architectural concrete units. b) Joints between metal panels. c) Joints between different materials listed above. d) Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. e) Joints between glass to metal, metal to metal and metal to stone conditions. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in one-half inch (1/2") wide joints formed between two (2) six inch (6") long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint -sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. G. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint -sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1R E. 1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Submit not fewer than four (4) pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint -sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint -sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the Notice to Proceed the Work. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. 3. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion -in -peel, and indentation hardness. 4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint -sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. a) Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field -Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193. i For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 5. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled -out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field -Adhesion -Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas F. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution: 1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint -sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 4. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 5. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/L. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain -Test -Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Single -Component Neutral- and Basic -Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Available Products: a) GE Silicones; SilPruf. b) Dow Corning Corporation; 795 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 100150. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a) Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, and substrates. 6. Stain -Test -Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248. D. Multi -component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. Available Products: a) Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 2. 2. Type and Grade: M (multi -component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a) Use O Joint Substrates: granite and limestone substrates. 2.04 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A. Preformed Silicone -Sealant System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured low -modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral -curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. 1. Available Products: a) Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. b) GE Silicones; U1traSpan US 1100. 2.05 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, O (open -cell material) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint -sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg Q. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant - substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following require- ments: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, gaskets, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a) Concrete. b) Masonry. c) Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a) Metal. b) Glass. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 1. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193. 1) Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. G. Installation of Preformed Silicone -Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. 2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone -sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than three -eights inch (3/8"). Hold edge of sealant bead one-fourth inch (1/4") inside masking tape. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3. Within ten (10) minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. 4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field -Adhesion Testing: Field test joint -sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows: a) Perform 10 tests for the first 1,000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate. b) Perform 1 test for each 1,000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field -Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab or Field -Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Flap in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint -sealant application indicated. a) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field -adhesion -test log. 4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a) Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled -out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field -adhesion hand -pull test criteria. b) Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c) Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. 5. Record test results in a field -adhesion -test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 7 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.07 JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior joints in glass unit assemblies. 1. Joint Sealant: Single -component neutral -curing silicone sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior vertical and horizontal joints between metal panels. 1. Joint Sealant: Single -component neutral- and basic -curing silicone sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior perimeter joints between masonry surfaces and frames of doors, windows and louvers. 1. Joint Sealant: Single -component neutral- and basic -curing silicone sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. END OF SECTION 07920 Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 8 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow -metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow -metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire -resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type and design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal -edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow -metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory -finished units. C. Store hollow -metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow -metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Construct doors to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Basis of Design: Curries 707, embossed 2 panel face. C. Exterior Doors: 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm.) 2. Face: Metallic -coated, cold -rolled galvanized steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.0538 inch, 16 gauge, embossed 2 panel. 3. Thermal -Rating: Provide doors fabricated with thermal -resistance value (R-value) of not less than 6.7with polystyrene core 4. Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas D. Interior Doors: 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). 2. Face: cold -rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.0428 inch, 18 gauge, embossed, 2 panels. 2.3 HOLLOW -METAL FRAMES A. Exterior Frames: 1. Material and Thickness: a. Materials: Metallic -coated galvanized steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, 14 gauge thick. b. Construction: Continuously welded. Internally weld rabbet and soffits continuously, grind, dress, make smooth. Do not use gussets or splice plates. B. Interior Frames: 1. Material and Thickness: a. Materials: Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, 16 gauge thick. b. Construction: Continuously welded. Internally weld rabbet and soffits continuously, grind, dress, make smooth. Do not use gussets or splice plates. 2.4 BORROWED LITES A. Hollow -metal frames of metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, 14 gauge thick. B. Construction: Continuously welded. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow -metal frames of type indicated. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame -spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow -metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow -Metal Doors: 1. Steel -Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch (0.66 mm), steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full -door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral -fiber insulation. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire -protection ratings indicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single -Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51 mm). Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion. C. Hollow -Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high. b. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. C. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) O.C. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow -metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow -metal work for hardware. F. Grout Guards: Framed from same material as frame, not less than 0.016 inch thick. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 2. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow -metal work. 3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Starting work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow -metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow -Metal Frames: Install hollow -metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM- HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. C. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 5. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. In -Place Metal or Wood -Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow -metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus l/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow -Metal Doors: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). C. Between Bottom of Door and Threshold: [3/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow -metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow -metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. D. Metallic -Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081113 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 5 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Service doors. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. B. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. C. ASTM A 924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic - Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. D. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 1.4 DESIGN AND PREFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Overhead coiling service doors: 1. Wind Loads: Design door assembly to withstand wind/suction load of 20 psf (958 Pa) without damage to door or assembly components. 2. Operation: Design door assembly, including operator, to operate for not less than 20,000 cycles. B. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure. 4. For exterior components, include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for excluding and draining moisture to the exterior. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Proj ect. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Overhead Coiling Doors 083323 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete and dry. C. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weathertight location. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent materials to avoid damage to installed materials. 1.12 Warranty A. Warranty: Manufacturer's limited door warranty for 2 years for all parts and components. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single manufacturer. B. Basis of Design: 1. Overhead Door Corporation, 2501 S. State Hwy. 121, Suite 200, Lewisville, TX 75067. 2. Rolling Service Door 610 2.2 OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOORS A. DOOR ASSEMBLY a. Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. b. Door Curtain: Galvanized steel. Interlocking roll -formed slats as specified following. Endlocks shall be attached to each end of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement. 1. Door Curtain Slats: 22-gauge Curved profile slats. B. Bottom Bar: Weatherstripped extruded aluminum. C. Curtain Jamb Guides: roll -formed, Galvanized steel shapes with exposed finish matching curtain slats. D. Hood: 24 gauge galvanized steel. The hood shall be supplied with an internal hood baffle weatherseal. Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Form closed ends for surface -mounted hoods. E. Mounting: Face of wall. F. Finish: 1. Galvanized steel: Slats and hood galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 and receive rust inhibitive, roll coating process, including .2 mils thick baked -on prime paint and .6 mils thick baked -on polyester top coat. a. Polyester Top Coat: Tan polyester. G. Locking Devices: Equip door with cylindrical lock keyed to master key system. H. Mounting Operation: 1. Manual push-up operation I. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals. 1. Weatherseals: a. Vinyl bottom seal. b. Guide weatherseal. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Overhead Coiling Doors 083323 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.3 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling -door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated. 2.4 Counterbalancing mechanism 1. Countebalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with adjustable - tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. 2.5 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer. 1. Chain -hoist Operator: Consists of endless steel hand chain, chain -pocket wheel and guard and gear reduction unit with a maximum of 301bf for door operation. Provide alloy -steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide. B. Push-up Door Operation: Lift handles and pull rope for raising and lowering doors, with counterbalance mechanism designed so that required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf (I I I N). Provide lift handles on each side of door, finish to match door. Provide pull -down strap. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 STEEL AND GALVANIZED -STEEL FINISHES A. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with field -applied finish. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. B. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door. C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Overhead Coiling Doors 083323 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. 1. Adjust exterior doors and components to be weather -resistant. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. END OF SECTION 083323 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Overhead Coiling Doors 083323 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas __ZWO 101[II: ► III�IZI IZ1�i�/�LIZI��i�fy PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes aluminum -clad wood casement (non -operable) and double hung simulated (non -operable) windows. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07920 (07 92 00) - Joint Sealants: Sealants and caulking. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of wood windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchoring, flashing, weeping, sealing perimeters, and protecting finishes. 3. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope. 4. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for wood windows. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, indicating dimensions, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation. C. Samples: Submit full-size or partial full-size sample of window illustrating glazing system, quality of construction, and color of finish. D. Product Schedule: For wood windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to wood window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Mockups: Build mockup to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Approved mockup shall be allowed to remain in place within the Work. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, and air infiltration. C. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. d. Failure of insulating glass. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Warranty Period: a. Non -Glass components of the Window: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Aluminum -Cladding Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Aluminum -Clad Wood Windows: 1. Basis of Design: Contract Documents are based on products specified to establish a standard of quality. 2. Pella Corporation, 102 Main St, Pella, Iowa, 50219 - Architect Series, EnduraClad-Plus 3. Other acceptable manufacturer with products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor. B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum clad wood windows from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Windows shall be Hallmark certified to a rating of LC30 specifications in accordance with ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 B. Window Unit Air Leakage, ASTM E 283, 1.57 psf (25 mph): 0.05 cfm per square foot of frame or less. C. Exterior cladding shall meet the performance requirements for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and panel Cladding of AAMA 2605. C. Window Unit Water Penetration: No water penetration through window unit when tested in accordance with ASTM E 547, under static pressure of 4.5 psf after 4 cycles of 5 minutes each, with water being applied at a rate of 5 gallons per hour per square foot. 2.3 WOOD WINDOWS A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings: 1. Casement- Simulated, non -operable. 2. Double hung- Simulated, non -operable B. Frame: 1. Select woods, water-repellent, preservative -treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.-4. in- cluding water -repellency, three active fungicides and an insecticide applied to the frame. 2. Interior Exposed Surfaces: Pine3. Exterior Surfaces: Clad with aluminum. 4. Overall Frame Depth: 5 inches (127 mm). C. Sash: 1. Select woods, water water-repellent, preservative -treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.-4. including water -repellency, three active fungicides and an insecticide applied to the sash. 2. Interior Exposed Surfaces: Pine. 3. Exterior Surfaces: Clad with aluminum, lap jointed at corners. 4. Corners: Mortised and tenoned, glued and secured with metal fasteners 5. Sash Thickness: [1-13/16 inches (46 mm)] D. Weather Stripping: 1. Dual weather stripping. 2. Continuous, flexible, Santoprene material in dual-durometer design. 3. Units shall have welded, mitered.corners, compressed between frame and sash for positive seal on all 4 sides. 4. Secondary PVC leaf -type weather strip between sash and frame for positive seals on all 4 sides. B. Insulating -Glass Units: ASTM E 2190]. 1. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas a. Tint: [Clear >. b. Kind: Fully tempered, ASTM C 1048 C. Type: Silicone -glazed 11/16 dual -seal, insulating glass, 2. Lites: As indicated on drawings. 3. Filling: Fill space with advanced argon gas. 4. Low-E Coating 5. Glass thickness: 6mm at casements and 4mm at double hung C. False Muntins: Pella Integral Light Technology 1. Provide divider grilles in design indicated on drawings for each sash 2. Three per sash, two permanently located at exterior and interior lites and one permanently located between insulating -glass lites which will be a non -glare grid. 3. Non glare grid is adhered to glass 4. Profile as selected from Manufacturer's full range 5. Color: interior and exterior color to match sash on each side D. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion -resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions. 1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Flashing/Sealant Tape: Pella SmartFlash. 1. Aluminum -foil -backed butyl window and door flashing tape. 2. Maximum Total Thickness: 0.013 inch. 3. UV resistant. 4. Verify sealant compatibility with sealant manufacturer B. Interior Insulating -Foam Sealant: Low -expansion, low-pressure polyurethane insulating window and door foam sealant. C. Exterior Perimeter Sealant: "Pella Window and Door Installation Sealant" or equivalent high quality, multi -purpose sealant as specified in the joints sealant section. 2.6 FINISH E. Exterior Finish System: Pella EnduraClad. 1. Exterior aluminum surfaces shall be finished with the following multi -stage system: a. Clean and etch aluminum surface of oxides. b. Pre -treat with chrome phosphate conversion coating. c. Pre -treat with chromic acid sealer/rinse. d. Top coat with baked -on polyester enamel. 2. Color: Portobello. 3. Performance Requirements: Exterior aluminum finishes shall meet or exceed the following performance requirements of AAMA 2605 if EnduraClad Plus or 2603 if only EnduraClad: a. Dry Film Hardness: Eagle Turquoise Pencil, F minimum. b. Film Adhesion: 1/16-inch crosshatch, dry, wet, boiling water. c. Impact Resistance: 1/10-inch distortion, no film removal. d. Abrasion Resistance: Falling sand coefficient value of 20 minimum. e. Chemical Resistance: 10 percent Muriatic acid, 15 minutes. Mortar pat test, 24 hours. f. Detergent Resistance: 3 percent at 100 degrees F, 72 hours. g. Corrosion Resistance: Humidity, 3,000 hours. Salt spray exceeds 3,000 hours. 2.7 TOLARANCES A. Windows shall accommodate the following opening tolerances: 1. Vertical Dimensions Between High and Low Points: Plus 1/4 inch, minus 0 inch. 2. Width Dimensions: Plus 1/4 inch, minus 0 inch. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3. Building Columns or Masonry Openings: Plus or minus 1/4 inch from plumb. 2.8 FABRICATION F. Fabricate aluminum clad wood windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for installing and anchoring windows. G. Glaze wood windows in the factory. H. Weather strip each sash to provide weathertight installation. I. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. 1. Support brackets. J. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. E. Starting work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction. C. Integrate window system installation with exterior water-resistant barrier using flashing/sealant tape. Apply and integrate flashing/sealant tape with water-resistant barrier using watershed principles in accordance with window manufacturer's instructions. D. Place interior seal around window perimeter to maintain continuity of building thermal and air barrier using insulating -foam sealant. E. Seal window to exterior wall cladding with sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of assembly. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Services: Contractor shall field-test windows in accordance with AAMA 502, Test Method A. Manufacturer's representative shall be present. 1. Testing Extent: one window of each type on each side of the building. Windows shall be tested after perimeter sealants have cured. 2. Remove and replace noncomplying windows and retest. 3. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 4. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust windows for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for and weathertight closure. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning. 2. Remove labels and visible markings. C. Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 085200 Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 5 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes door hardware for swinging doors: B. Related Sections: 1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: 1. Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and date each page. b. Use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. C. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 6) Mounting locations for door hardware. 7) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer. C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in TDLR for door hardware on doors in an accessible route. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N). 2. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Door Hardware 087100 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas a. Interior, Non -Fire -Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. C. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 4. Closers: Adjust door and gate closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the time required to move the door to a position of 12 degrees from the latch is 5 seconds minimum. 5. Spring Hinges: Adjust door and gate spring hinges so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the time required to move the door to the closed position is 1.5 seconds minimum. E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for access control. 4. Address for delivery of keys. 5. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 6. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 7. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Door Hardware 087100 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Warranty Period: One years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Exit Devices: five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Cylindrical (bored) lockes and latches: Seven years. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products or equivalent. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. 2. Items specified are to establish design, grade quality and function standards. All cylinders are keyed to the existing Sargent Removable Core Restricted Master Key System. The following are acceptable limited options: a. Hinges: Equal products manufactured by Hager or McKinney. b. Lockset; No Substitutions. C. Closer: Equal products manufactured by Norton or LCN. d. Exit Device: Equal products manufactured by VD or Corbin. e. OH Holders: Equal products manufactured by Corbin/Russwin, Glynn Johnson, Norton, Rixson and Yale. f. Misc. Trim: Equal products manufactured by Hager, Quality, Rockwood and Trego are acceptable. g. Weather Seals: Equal products manufactured by A.J. May, Zero, and National Guard Products. h. Auxiliary Items: Equal products manufactured by Corbin/Russwin. 2.2 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key operate cylinders. 2. Existing System- If Owner requests: a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. 3. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key. 4. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Door Hardware 087100 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas b. Master Keys: Five. C. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great -Grand Master Keys: Five. 5. No permanent keys shall be permitted on the jobsite until after Owner acceptance of the project 2.3 FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire -rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Starting work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Locks, latches: Finish floor to C/L of knobs, 40-5/16". 2. Deadlocks: Finish to C/L of cylinder, 48". 3. Push/Pull Plates: Finish floor to C/L of plate, 42" pull, 45" push. 4. Flushbolts: C/L of bolt face to top (and bottom) edge of floor, 12". 5. Exit Devices: Per template and installation instructions; Rails shall not conflict with door lites, mounting heights shall be adjusted to center exit rail on appropriate door rail. 6. Closer, O/H Holders: Per template and installation instructions. 7. Stops: To protect doors and hardware from contact with parts of the building or other conflicting doors. 8. Butt Hinges: a. Top anchor butt - per template instructions. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Door Hardware 087100 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas b. Top butt hinge - top edge of butt leaf to rabbet, 5" C. Bottom butt hinge - bottom edge of butt leaf to finish floor, 10". d. Intermediate butt hinge - equal distant between top and bottom butts. B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height greater than 90 inches (2286 mm). E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. Replace construction cores with permanent cores. F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." G. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. I. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. J. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Supplier will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Door Hardware 087100 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Hardware Set 1.1 Doors: 1, 2, 3, 4 Each to Receive: 3 EA HINGES TA2714 NRP 4.5 X 4.5 652 Mc KINNEY 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 8813 ETL 630 SARGENT 1 EA CYLINDER 1E-7-4-C4-RP3 626 STANLEYBEST 1 EA CLOSER 351-CPSH X TB 689 SARGENT 1 EA KICKPLATE 8" X 2" LDW 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA THRESHOLD 2727A 719 PEMKO 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 315CN 628 PEMKO 1 SET GASKETING 303AS 719 PEMKO B. Hardware Set 2.1 Doors: 5 Each to Receive: 3 EA HINGES TA2714 NRP 4.5 X 4.5 652 Mc KINNEY 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 8810 630 SARGENT 1 EA CLOSER 351-CPSH X TB 689 SARGENT 1 EA KICKPLATE 8" X 2" LDW 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA THRESHOLD 2727A 719 PEMKO 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 315CN 628 PEMKO 1 SET GASKETING 303AS 719 PEMKO C. Hardware Set 3.1 Doors: 6 Each to Receive: 3 EA HINGES TA2714 NRP 4.5 X 4.5 652 Mc KINNEY 1 EA LOCKSET 9K3-7-R-15C-S3 626 STANLEY/BEST 1 EA CLOSER 351-CPSH X TB 689 SARGENT 1 EA KICKPLATE 8" X 2" LDW 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA THRESHOLD 2727A 719 PEMKO 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 315CN 628 PEMKO 1 SET GASKETING 303AS 719 PEMKO D. Hardware Set 4.1 Doors: 7, 8, 11 Each to Receive: 3 EA HINGES TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 652 Mc KINNEY 1 EA LOCKSET 9K3-7-R-15C-S3 626 STANLEYBEST 1 EA STOPS 409 630 ROCKWOOD 3 EA SILENCERS 608 ROCKWOOD E. Hardware Set 5.1 Doors: 9, 10 Each to Receive: 3 EA HINGES TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 652 Mc KINNEY 1 EA PUSH PLATE 70C 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA PULL PLATE 102 X 70C 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA CLOSER 351 X TB 689 SARGENT 1 EA KICKPLATE 8" X 2" LDW 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA STOPS 409 630 ROCKWOOD 3 EA SILENCERS 608 ROCKWOOD Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Door Hardware 087100 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas F. Hardware Set 6.1 Doors: 12 Each to Receive: 6 EA HINGES I EA LOCKSET 1 EA DEADLOCK DOORS TO BE WELDED SHUT TA2714 NRP 4.5 X 4.5 652 9K3-7-R-15C-S3 626 8T2-7-K-S 1 626 END OF SECTION 087100 Mc KINNEY STANLEYBEST STANLEYBEST Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Door Hardware 087100 - 7 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 092400 - CEMENT PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal Lath 2. Portland Cement Plastering (stucco). 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Provide product specifications and installation instructions and data showing compliance with the requirements. B. Samples: For each type of finish coat, pattern, color and texture indicated. Provide samples in at least 12 inch by 12 inch size prepared on rigid backing. C. Material Certificates: Submit producer's certificate for each kind of plaster aggregate indicated evidencing that materials comply with requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer. B. Store materials inside under cover, and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Handle gypsum lath to prevent damage to edges, ends, or surfaces. Protect corner beads and trim from being bent or damaged. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during and after application of plaster Weather Protection: Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and less than 80 degrees (26 deg Q. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred. If heat is used during or after the application process, distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat from contacting plaster near heat source. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following: 1. Metal Supports: a. Allied Structural Industries, Inc. b. American Studco, Inc. C. Chapman Industries, Inc. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas d. Chicago Metallic Corp. e. Dale Industries, Inc. f. Dietrich Industries, Inc. g. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. h. Marino Industries. i. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Expanded Metal Lath: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO) b. Gold Bold Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. C. United States Gypsum Co. d. Western Metal Lath Co 3. Accessories: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gold Bold Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. C. Keene Corp. d. MM Systems Corp. e. Plastic Components, Inc. f. United States Gypsum Co. g. Western Metal Lath Co 4. Gypsum Lath and Plasters: a. Gold Bold Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. b. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 METAL LATH A. Expanded -Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, cold -rolled carbon -steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip galvanized -zinc coating. 1. Flat -Rib Lath: Rib depth of not more than 1 /8 inch (3 mm), 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m). B. Lath Attachment Devices: Devices of material and type required by referenced standards and recommended by lath manufacturer for secure attachment of lath to framing members and of lath to lath. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Accessories: 1. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot -dip galvanized -steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2. Comerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip galvanized -zinc coating. 3. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded large mesh diamond mesh lath 4. fabricated from 0.0475 inch diameter metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip galvanized -zinc coating specially formed to reinforce external corners of Portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. 5. Comerbeads: Fabricated from zinc alloy. a. Small nose comerbead with expanded flanges of large mesh diamond lath to allow full encasement by plaster; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Smallnose comerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners. C. Smallnose comerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use on columns and for finishing unit masonry corners. d. Bullnose comerbead, radius 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum, with expanded flanges; use at locations indicated on Drawings. 6. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc alloy; square -edged style; with expanded flanges and removable protective tape. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 7. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc alloy; one -piece -type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 8. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc alloy, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M- shaped configuration; with expanded flanges. 9. Two -Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc alloy; formed to produce slip joint and square -edged reveal that is adjustable from 1/4 to 5/8 inch (6 to 16 mm) wide; with perforated flanges. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: ASTM C 1063. C. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch (1.21- mm) diameter unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for portland cement base and finish coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases, materials and other requirements indicated. B. Portland Cement Plaster Base Coat Mixes and Compositions: Proportion materials for respective base coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and in parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with the following requirements for each method of application and plaster base indicated. Adjust mix proportions below within limits specified to attain workability. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to following mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 2 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. C. Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three -coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement and 1 to 2 parts masonry cement, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand. b. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement 1 to 2 parts masonry cement, 3 to 5 parts sand. D. Factory -Prepared Portland Cement Finish Coat with Integral Color: Add water only; comply with finish coat manufacturer's directions. Texture of final coat to match existing textures and as indicated on the drawings. 2.6 MIXING A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Prepare smooth, solid substrates for plaster according to ASTM C 926. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Install supplementary framing. blocking and bracing at terminations in the work, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum plaster manufacturer or if not available of "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co. C. Install expanded metal lath for the following application where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with referenced lathing installation standards. 1. Suspended and furred ceiling using 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd. minimum weight diamond mesh lath. 3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with referenced lathing installation standards, including ASTM C 1603, for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corner; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and alignment during plastering. B. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally and where partition/wall work abuts overhead structure, isolate the work from structural movement sufficiently to prevent transfer of loading into the work from the building structure. Install slip or cushion -type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. Frame both sides of control and expansion joints independently and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing accessories. C. Provide the following types to comply with requirements indicated for location: 1. Install lath -type, external -corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install comerbead at interior and external locations. 3. Casing Bead: Install at terminations of plaster work unless otherwise indicated D. Control Joints: Locate as approved by Architect for visual effect and as follows: 1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m). b. Horizontal and Other Non -vertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m). 2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length -to -width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1. 4. Where expansion or control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular -shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change. 3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 18 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces when measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface. 2. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by the installation of the other. 3. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where plaster does not terminate at metal by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal before plaster sets and groove finish coat at the junctures with metal. 4. Apply thicknesses and number of coats of plaster as indicated or as required by references standards. 5. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field -applied finishes indicated. B. Application 1. Portland Cement Plaster Application Standard: Apply Portland cement plaster materials, compositions and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Number of coats: Apply Portland cement plaster, of composition indicated, to comply with the following requirements: a. Use three -coat work over the following plaster bases: 1) Metal lath b. Finish Coat: Floated finish unless otherwise indicated; match Architect's sample for texture and color. 3. Moist -cure Portland cement plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including recommendations for time between coats and curing. 3.6 CUTTING, PATCHING AND PLASTER REPAIRS A. Cut, patch, point -up and repair existing plaster as necessary to restore cracks, dents and imperfections and as indicated on drawings. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs and similar defects where bond to substrate has failed. Match existing finish textures. B. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. C. Cut, patch and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. D. Sand smooth -troweled finishes lightly to remove trowel marks and arises. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work after plastering is complete. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. When plastering work is completed remove unused materials, containers and equipment. Clean plaster debris from the surrounding area. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner suitable to installer that ensures that the plaster work will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 092400 Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 5 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: interior gypsum board walls and ceiling assemblies and accessories indicated, specified or required for installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. B. Paper -Faced Gypsum Wallboard 1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 2. Description: Noncombustible gypsum core with paper surfacing on face, back and long edges. 3. Thickness: a. Wall locations: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) Type X. b. Ceiling Locations: '/2 inch. 4. Long Edges: Tapered. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Type X Gypsum board. b. G-P Gypsum Corp.; toughRock Fireguard Gypsum Board. C. National Gypsum co.; gold bond fire -Shield Wallboard. d. Temple-Inland Inc.; gypsum Fire -Resistant Panels. e. USG Corp.; Sheetrock firecode Core. C. Moisture -Resistant Paperless Glass -Mat Gypsum Board: 1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1177. 2. Description: Enhanced moisture -resistant, noncombustible gypsum core, with inorganic, embedded fiberglass mat on both faces; square edges. 3. Thickness: a. Wall locations: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) Type X. b. Ceiling Locations: '/2 inch. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Gypsum Board 092900 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 5. Basis of Design: a. G-P Gypsum Corp.; Dens Armor Plus Fireguard Interior Goard. 2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: 1. Material Quality Standard: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 2. Description: Cementitious panels capable of remaining unaffected by prolonged exposure to water. 3. Thickness: a. Wall locations: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) Type X. b. Ceiling Locations: '/2 inch. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 5. Location: at all tile. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. Custom Building Products: WonderBoard. b. FinPan, Inc.: Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. C. USG Corp.: Durock Interior Cement Board. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Drywall Accessories 1. Material Quality Standard: Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 2. Material: G40 hot dip galvanized steel sheet with recessed perforated flanges formed to receive joint compound. 3. Shapes and Products: a. Cornerbead: Protects outside corners. 1) Basis of Design: USG Corp., Dura-A-Bead Corner Bead, 103. b. LC -Bead: Protects exposed edge of wallboard where back flanged is used. J- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 1) Basis of Design: USG Corp.,J-Trim, 200-A. C. L-Bead: Protects exposed edge of wallboard when back flange cannot be used. L- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 1) Basis of Design: USG Corp.,L-Trim, 200-B. d. Expansion (control) joint: to relieve expansion and contraction stresses in wallboard. Single piece with V-shaped slot with removable strip covering opening. 1) Basis of Design: USG Corp., Control Joint, 093. e. Other Trim or shapes: Product as required by condition. 4. Available Manufacturers: a. Dietrich Indutries, Inc.: Unimast. b. Fry Reglet Architectural Metals. C. Marino Ware: Division of Ware Industries. d. Niles Building Products Co. e. Superior Metal Trim; Division of Delta Star, Inc. f. USG Corp. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. Nominal 2 inch wide cross-fibered tape with finish suitable for bonding, creased in center for easy folding, compatible with joint compound. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. Nominal 2 inch wide self - adhering. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Gypsum Board 092900 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. D. Joint Compound: 1. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 3. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting - type, sandable topping compound. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: 1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 665. 2. Description: Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 3. Location: All interior dry walls. 4. Thickness: no less than full thickness of wall. 5. Available Manufacturers and Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.: CertaPro Accousta Therm Batts. b. Johns Manville Building Insulation: Sound Control Batts. C. Knauf Fiber Glass: Quiet Therm. d. Owens Corning: Sound Attenuation Batts. C. Acoustical Sealant: 1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 834 and ASTM E 90. 2. Description: Latex sealant reducing airborn sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings. Nonsag and paintable. 3. Available Manufacturers and Products: a. Pecora Corp.: AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. Quiet Solutions: QuietSeal. C. USG Corp.: Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant. 2.6 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B. Aggregate Finish: Water -based, job -mixed, aggregated, drying -type texture finish for spray application. 1. Basis of Design: USG.: Sheetrock Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture Paint. 2. Texture: Light Orange Peel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Starting work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Gypsum Board 092900 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than l/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 inch (6.4- to 9.5-mm) wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load -bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 inch (6.4- to 12.7-mm) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide -dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Type: At restrooms, janitor rooms and mechanical rooms. 4. Cementitious Backer Board: at all tile locations. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Gypsum Board 092900 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints not more than 24 feet in either direction to eliminate cracking. According to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead: Use [at exposed panel edges >. 3. L-Bead: Use at exposed edges where trim can only be installed after wallboard installation. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Mechanical, electrical rooms. 4. Level4: Surfaces receiving paints that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 5. Level 5: surface that will be receiving semi -gloss and gloss paints. E. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. F. Glass -Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture, free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture -finish manufacturer's written recommendations. Wv�I 9:Z8710Clio 116121 A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Gypsum Board 092900 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Gypsum Board 092900 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Porcelain tile, setting and grouting materials and accessories indicated, specified or required for installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples For tile, grout, and accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches (300 mm) square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 3. Tile and Trim accessories: Full size units of each type and each color. 4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Company has a minimum of 10 years specialized experience installing work similar to scope of this project and having a record of successful projects. 2. There shall be at least one installer on site at all times during the installation that has a minimum of 10 year experience of similar experience. B. Accessibility Requirements for Floor Tile: 1. Standards: Products and installation shall comply with Americans with Disability Act (ADA), ANSI A117.1 and Texas Accessibility Standards. 2. Floor Tile Slip Resistance: Minimum static coefficient of friction as follows according to ASTM C 1028 without use of abrasive grain: a. Level Floor Surface: 0.6 b. Steps: Minimum 0.6 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Ceramic Tiling 093013 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Contract Documents are based on products to establish a standard of quality. Other acceptable manufacturers with products having equivalent characteristics including color, texture, pattern, finish, and appearance may be considered, provided deviations are minor as judged by the Architect. B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Ceramic Tile Type CT: Unglazed porcelain floor tile. 1. Basis of Design: DalTile Corporation, Continental Slate 2. Face Size [11-13/16 by 11-13/16 inches (300 by 300 mm). 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 5. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 6. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated on drawings. 7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Ceramic Tile Type CT: Glazed Semi -Gloss and Matte wall tile- Restrooms. 1. Basis of Design: Daltile Corporation: 2. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm). 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 4. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings. 5. Face: Manufacturer's standard edges for tile type indicated. 6. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Coved , module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm). b. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm). C. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile. d. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adj oining flat tile. e. Internal Corners: Field -butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes. 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A. Medium and Thin -Set Mortar: ANSI A118.1. 1. Material Quality Standard: ANSI Al 18.4 with the following physical properties. 2. Manufacturer's premium polymer modified thin -set product; gray color. 3. Integral antimicrobial product added during manufacturing to resist mold and mildew growth. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Ceramic Tiling 093013 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 4. Non -sag capability. 5. Suitable for use in mortar beds up to 3/4 inch thick. 6. Available Manufacturers and Products: a. Custom Building Products: MagaLite Crack Prevention Mortar. b. LaticreteInternational, Inc.; Laticrete 255 MultiMax Multipurpose Thin -set mortar. C. Mapei Corp.; Ultralite Mortar. B. Latex -Portland Cement Grout for Wall Tile: 1. Material Quality Standard: ANSI Al 18.7, with the following physical properties a. Manufacturer's premium polymer modified grout product. b. Internal antimicrobial product added during manufacturing to resist mold and mildew growth. 2. Available Manufacturers and Products: a. Custom Building Products: Prism Surecolor Grout. b. LaticreteInternational, Inc.; Tri-Poly Fortified Sanded Grout, 1500 Series or Tri- Poly Fortified Unsanded Grout, 1600 Series as required with 1776 Grout Admix Plus. C. Mapei Corp.; Ultracolor. C. Epoxy Grout for Floor Tile: 1. Material Quality Standard: ANSI Al 18.3, with the following physical properties a. 100 percent solids. b. Chemical -resistant to intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 212 deg. F C. Mold and mildew resistant. 2. Available Manufacturers and Products: a. LaticreteInternational, Inc.;SpectralOK PRO Grout Part AB liquids and Part C Powders. 3. Mapei Corp.; Kerpoxy IEC. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bonsal American. 2. Bostik, Inc. 3. Custom Building Products, Inc. 4. Laticrete International, Inc. 5. Mapei Corp. 6. TEC Specialty Products Inc. E. Elastormeric Sealants 1. Sealant Colors: Match color of adjacent grout unless otherwise indicate. 2. Wall Joint Sealant: a. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, with following physical properties b. Integral antimicrobial product added during manufacturing to resist mold and mildew growth. C. Intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates. d. Resistant to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes. 3. Generic Description: One -part mildew -resistant, silicone sealant. 4. Available Manufacturers and Products: a. Degussa Construction Chemicals, Sonneborn; Omniplus. b. Dow Corning.; 786. C. Pecora Corp.; 898. d. Tremco Inc.; Tremsil 200. F. Chemical Resistant Floor Joint Sealant 1. Generic Description: Two-part, self -leveling, epoxy sealant 2. Available Manufacturers and Products: Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Ceramic Tiling 093013 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas a. Euclid Chemical Co.; Eucco 800 b. L&M Construction Chemical Inc.; Epoflex SL G. Backer Rods: 1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1330, Type B. 2. Description: Non -gassing (when punctured), bi-cellular polyethylene or polyolefin foam rod with a surface skin of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 3. Available Manufacturers and Products: a. Degussa Building Systems, Sonneborn; Soft Backer Rod. b. Nomacco Inc.; sof Rod. H. Backer Tape: Bond -breaking polyethylene or other plastic tape, self-adhesive where applicable, recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile -setting materials for installations indicated. B. Vapor -Retarder Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils (0.1 mm) thick. C. Metal Edge Strips: 1. Description: Profile and dimension suitable to thin -set application. 2. Basis of Design: a. Flooring Transitions: Schluter Systems LP; Reno-Ramp/-K, clear anodized aluminum. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Ceramic Tool Co. b. Schluter Systems Co. D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. E. Grout Sealer: Tile and grout manufacturer's silicone product for sealing unglazed tile and grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout specifically approved for this use. 2.6 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile -setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI Al08.01 for installations indicated. 2. Prepare concrete floor substrates to comply with flatness tolerances of/4 inch in 10 foot.. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Ceramic Tiling 093013 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas b. Fill cracks holes and depressions with trowable underlayments and patching compounds. C. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Starting work will be construed as acceptance of the substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or inset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile -setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION A. Installation Quality Standard: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform tile work according to following, unless otherwise specified: 1. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation. 2. Follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards 3. Manufacturer's written installation instructions B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. If accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting -bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) 2. Floor Tile: 1/8 inch. H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. I. Metal Edge Strips: Install at all transition locations. 3.4 TILE INSTALLATION A. Material Installation Quality Standards: Install tile according to the following standards: 1. Medium -set Mortar: ANSI A108.5 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Ceramic Tiling 093013 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Thin -set Mortar: ANSI A108.5 3. Latex -Portland Grout for Walls: ANSI A108.10 4. Epoxy Grout for Floors: ANSI A108.9 B. Tile Installation Quality Standard: install tile according to following standards: 1. Floors: TCNA F 122 2. Walls at Toilet Areas: TCNA W244C 3. Walls at non -toilet areas: TCNA W243 C. Back Buttering: For following installations, obtain minimum 95 percent mortar coverage as in referenced ANSI A108 series of installation standards: 1. Tile floors in wet and limited water exposures. 2. Tile floors composed of 12 in x 12 in or larger. 3. Tile floors composed of reb-backed tiles. D. Metal Trim: Install at locations indicated and where exposed edge of tile flooring meets concrete floor. E. Tile and grout sealer: after grout has cured, apply to unglazed tile and grout joints. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 093013 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Ceramic Tiling 093013 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Resilient base and Resilient molding accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m), of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg Q. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products 48 hours before, during and 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg Q. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 2.2 Basis of Design: Contract Documents are based on products specified on Drawings to establish a standard of quality. Other available manufacturers with products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor as judged by the Architect. 1. Roppe Co. 2.3 RESILIENT BASE A. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or TP (rubber, thermoplastic), Group I (solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered). 1. 1. Style: Cove base with toe. Provide in areas with polished or sealed concrete flooring. a. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). b. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). C. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. B. Outside Corners: Job formed. C. Inside Corners: Job formed. D. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. E. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. F. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated. G. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Resilient Base And Accessories 096513 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. C. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Job -Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length. 3.4 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 096513 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Resilient Base And Accessories 096513 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 099100 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems of exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a low sheen finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at a 85- degrees. 2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at 60 degrees. 3. Semi -glass refers to a medium sheen finish with a gloss range between 35and 70 when measured 60 degrees. 4. Hi -Gloss refers to a high sheen finish with a gloss of more than 70 when measured at 60 degrees. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Identify each material by manufacture's catalog number and general classification. 1. Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing and applying each coating material. 2. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square with appropriate texture to simulate actual conditions. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: Furnish a list indicating type of surface, type of paint material and number of coats required as provided elsewhere. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual with at least five (5) years experience in applying similar paints and coatings with a record of successful performance. B. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Mockup will be used to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature in the project. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. Apply mockups after permanent lighting has been installed and is operational. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Interior Painting 099123 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers bearing manufacturer's names and label. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg Q. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C) or temperatures as recommended by manufacturer. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Painting may occur during inclement weather if the area to be painted is enclosed and heated within the allowed temperature and humidity limits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Contract Documents are based on products manufactured by Sherwin- Williams Co. (S-W) to establish quality standard. Other acceptable manufacturers of equivalent quality may be considered, provided deviations are minor as judged by the Architect. B. Other acceptable manufacturers in alphabetical order: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Glidden. 3. Kelly -Moore Paints. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's best quality for each product. B. Proprietary Names: Use of one manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials does not exclude the use of another equivalent manufacturer's products. C. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system such as block fillers, primers and finish -coat materials shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. D. Products: As Indicated in Schedule at end of this specification. Colors as indicated on drawings. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Interior Painting 099123 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. C. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. D. Spray -Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry. E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. Clean substrates to substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. A. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. C. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Steel Substrates: For steel that is not shop primed, remove rust and loose mill scale if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces. F. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. G. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. H. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Interior Painting 099123 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Unfinished louvers, grilles, covers and access panels C. Uninsulated metal piping. d. Uninsulated plastic piping. e. Pipe hangers and supports. f. Metal conduit. g. Plastic conduit. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. i. Other items as directed by Architect. 2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Dry Locations, those not designated as potentially wet: 1. Concrete Masonry Walls: Semi -Gloss Epoxy Finish: a. lst Coat: S-w PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 b. 2nd Cost: S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy B70W21 l/B60V25 C. 3rd Coat: S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy B70W21 l/B60V25 2. Gypsum Board Walls- Eggshell Latex Finish a. 1st Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Primer, B 11 W500 b. 2nd Cost: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Eggshell, B9 Series C. 3rd Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Eggshell, B9 Series 3. Gypsum Board Ceilings, Furr-downs and Soffits- Flat Latex Finish a. I" Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Primer, B 11 W500 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Interior Painting 099123 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas b. 2nd Cost: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series C. 3rd Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series 4. Primed Ferrous Metal and Hollow Metal Doors and Frames— Semi -Gloss Acrylic Finish a. 1 st Coat: S-W ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series b. 2nd Cost: S-W ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic Semi -Gloss, B31 Series a. 3rd Coat: S- W ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic Semi -Gloss, B31 Series B. Potentially Wet or Humid Locations- Restrooms and Janitor Rooms: 1. Concrete Masonry Walls: Semi -Gloss Epoxy Finish: a. 1st Coat: S-w PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 b. 2nd Cost: S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy B70W21 l/B60V25 C. 3rd Coat: S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy B70W21 l/B60V25 2. Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings- Semi -Gloss Epoxy Finish a. 1st Coat: S-W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Primer, B 11 W500 b. 2nd Cost: S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy B70W211/B60V25 b. 3rd Coat: S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy B70W21 l/B60V25 3. Primed Ferrous Metal and Hollow Metal Doors and Frames— Semi -Gloss Epoxy Finish a. 1st Coat: S-W ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series b. 2nd Cost: S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy B70W211/B60V25 C. 3rd Coat: S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy B70W211B60V25 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete Masonry- Semi -Gloss Acrylic Finish a. 1st Coat: S-w PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 b. 2nd Coat: S-W Exterior Satin Acrylic Latex, A100 Series C. 3rd Coat: S-W Exterior Satin Acrylic Latex, A100 Series B. Galvanized Ferrous Metal- Semi -Gloss Acrylic Finish: a. 1st Coat: S-W ProCryl Universal Primer b. 2nd Coat: S-W DTM Acrylic B66W00111 C. 3rd Coat: S-W DTM Acrylic B66W001 I I C. Primed Ferrous Metal and Hollow Metal Doors and Frames— Satin Acrylic Finish a. 1st Coat: S-W ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series b. 2nd Cost: S-W Exterior Satin Acrylic Latex A100 Series C. 3rd Coat: S-W Exterior Satin Acrylic Latex A100 Series END OF SECTION 099100 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Interior Painting 099123 - 5 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 09963 - ELASTOMERIC WALL COATING SPECIFICATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Wall coating system shall be a complete assembly from a single source manufacturer of compatible products to achieve a seamless waterproof membrane. B. The wall coating system shall be designed for the application as outlined on project documents and manufacturer's specifications to the specified project conditions. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator shall be approved by material manufacturer as a participating applicator prior to product application. B. The manufacturer shall have the opportunity to inspect all work prior to final validation of the manufacturer's warranty. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit one full set of data sheets for each product intended for use on the project. B. Include a current letter showing the applicator is an Approved Applicator by the manufacturer. C. Submit sample of Manufacturer's 10-Year Product and Contractor's 2-Year Labor warrantees as required by project documents. D. Successful bidding contractor shall submit a physical sample of the completed system that shows all products in their representative dry mil thickness to accurately show the system being installed. E. Applicator is required to furnish lien releases from all appropriate venders and suppliers with each draw request. 1.04 PROJECT/ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Ensure the methods or process intend for use are proper for the project condition. B. Do not install products when surface or ambient temperatures are 40 ° F or less or if inclement weather is imminent within 24 hours. Protect from freezing. C. Store materials at temperatures not less than 65 ° F. Do not store in direct sunlight for long periods. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PRIMARY PRODUCTS A. Reinforcing Fabric (Thermopolyester SB-075): A reinforcing fabric as needed for repairs and reinforcement of areas of suspected excessive cyclic movement that shall meet or exceed the following. 1. Weight 2.75 oz./sq.yd. ASTM D 1910 2. Tensile Strength MD/XD 29/6 lbs. ASTM D 5035 (90) 3. Elongation MD/XD 24/62 % ASTM D 5035 (90) 4. Tear Strength 2500 grams ASTM D 5035 (90) B. Acrylic Patching Compound (Thermolastic T-60): A concentrated, acrylic resinous plastic emulsion for repairs and patching compound that shall meet or exceed the following. 1. Weight per Gallon 11 lbs. 2. Solid Content 80% 3. Tensile Strength 180 psi 4. Elongation 750% avg. 5. Low Temperature Flex -100C Pass Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 ELASTOMERIC WALL COATING SPECIFICATION 09963 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Acrylic Wall Coating (Thermolastic Super Prep): A 100% acrylic elastomer based coating that shall meet or exceed the following. Base coat shall be gray, surface coat shall be white. 1. Weight per Gallon 11-12 lbs. 2. Solids Content 68% 3. Tensile Strength @ 73°F / 0°F 478 / 205 psi 4. Elongation @ 73°F / 0°F 282 / 104 % 5. Low Temperature Flex -26°C Pass 6. Reflectivity 90% 2.02 RELATED PRODUCTS A. Surface Cleaner: A highly effective surface cleaner for non -porous surfaces as approved by the Primary Materials Manufacturer. B. Urethane Sealant: As approved by Primary Materials Manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE INSPECTION AND EVALUATION A. Masonry Block, Concrete or Stucco 1. Ensure mortar joints are without voids or cracks. 2. Defective mortar and stucco to be repaired using a cementitious based patching compound or the herein listed Acrylic Patching Compound or a urethane sealant. 3. Newly constructed block and concrete walls shall cure for a minimum of 28 calendar days. 3.02 SURFACE/PRODUCT PREPARATION A. All existing surface contaminates shall be removed to expose the underlying surface to which new materials are to be applied. B. All surfaces to receive coating shall be thoroughly cleaned using a high-pressure sprayer/washer, with a minimum 3,000 psi, with clean water using an admixture of surface cleaner metered through the washer's pick-up tube, to remove all oils, grease, foreign or loose materials, or surface contaminates that could adversely effect adhesion of new products. Mildew, mold or algae should be treated with bleach during the pressure washing process. Allow surface to completely dry. C. In areas where pressure washing would be prohibited due to existing substrate conditions, prepare these areas by hand using the surface cleaner. Entire surface should then be rinsed with clean water and allowed to dry. D. Upon the completion of the initial surface preparations, repair all cracks and defective joints in the wall by tuckpointing. E. All wall protrusions, pipes and fixtures shall be 3-coursed, defined as a layer of reinforcement fabric sandwiched between two layers of flashing mastic at a rate of 20 linear feet per gallon having a minimum width equal to or greater than that of the reinforcement fabric. Apply the reinforcement fabric without tenting, fishmouths, or wrinkles. F. Wall and/or expansion joints shall have existing failed sealant removed, surface cleaned and resealed with approved urethane sealant. G. Porous block or surface voids shall be filled flush with approved block filler. H. Cracks or control joints shall be routed to receive new sealant. Cracks shall be sealed with an approved urethane sealant. 3.03 COATING SYSTEM APPLICATION A. Ensure surface is free of all surface contaminates and all surface preparation is completed. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 ELASTOMERIC WALL COATING SPECIFICATION 09963 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. After full cure of preparations, apply gray acrylic wall coating base coat by brush, roller or spray technique depending on surface texture using an average coverage rate of approximately 1-gallon per 80-100 square feet per coat, depending on surface texture. Allow application to fully cure. C. After full cure of base coat, apply white acrylic wall coating surface coat, using a crosshatch pattern, by brush, roller or spray technique depending on surface texture using an average coverage rate of approximately 1-gallon per 80-100 square feet per coat, depending on surface texture. Allow application to fully cure. D. The finished base coat and surface coat applications shall equate to approximately 20 dry mils. All finished surfaces shall be inspected for proper millage and deficiencies in the application. If millage is deficient, an additional application of surface coat shall be applied at the rate of one gallon per 80-100 square feet. END OF SECTION 09963 Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 ELASTOMERIC WALL COATING SPECIFICATION 09963 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 102113.17 - PHENOLIC -CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Phenolic -core toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry for blocking in walls to secure panels, wall posts and Stiles. 2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment -mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show locations of floor drains. 5. Plans, elevations, details of construction and attachment to adjacent construction. 6. Show anchorage locations and accessory items. 7. Verify dimensions with field measurements prior to final production of toilet compartments. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Door Hinges: One hinge(s) with associated fasteners. 2. Latch and Keeper: One latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners. 3. Door Bumper: One door bumper(s) with associated fasteners. 4. Door Pull: One door pull(s) with associated fasteners. 5. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty: 15 year limited warranty for panels, doors, and stiles against breakage, corrosion, delamination, and defects in factory workmanship. Manufacturer's standard 1 year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for stainless steel door hardware and mounting brackets. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Phenolic -Core Toilet Compartments 102113.17 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 25 or less. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in Texas Accessibility Standards latest edition for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 2.2 PHENOLIC -CORE TOILET COMPARMENTS A. Basis of Design Products: Contract Documents are based on products specified below to establish a standard of quality. Other available manufacturers with products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor as judged by the Architect. 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., DuraLine Series B. Toilet Partition 1. Configuration: Floor anchored Partitions 2. Basis of Design: Bobrick 1081.67 vandal resistant DuraLine Series with non -ghosting graffiti removal 3. Color: as selected from Manufacturer's standard range of colors. 4. Design: Standard Manufacturers design 5. Hardware: vandal resistant full height stainless steel with standard stile base leveling device and factory installed inserts C. Urinal -Screen 1. Configuration: Wall hung 2. Basis of Design: Bobrick 1085.67 vandal resistant DuraLine Series with non -ghosting graffiti removal 3. Color: as selected from Manufacturer's standard range of colors. 4. Design: Standard Manufacturers design 5. Brackets: 11 gauge (3mm), double thickness D. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic -core panel material with melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not separately laminated), and with eased and polished edges. Provide minimum 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick panels. E. Pilaster Shoes: Formed from stainless -steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch (0.79-mm) nominal thickness and 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to match hardware. F. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets stainless steel. G. Phenolic Panel Finish: 1. Facing Sheet Finish: One color and pattern in each room. 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Edge Color: Manufacturer standard. 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty vandal resistant operating hardware and accessories. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick stainless -steel continuous, that swings to a closed or partially open position allowing emergency access by lifting door. Mount with through -bolts. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty surface -mounted cast -stainless -steel latch unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through -bolts. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Phenolic -Core Toilet Compartments 102113.17 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast -stainless -steel hook and rubber - tipped bumper, sized to prevent in -swinging door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories. Mount with through -bolts. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty rubber -tipped cast -stainless -steel bumper at out -swinging doors. Mount with through -bolts. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast -stainless -steel pull out -swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through -bolts. B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless -steel, hot -dip galvanized -steel, or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel compatible with related materials. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/13 26M. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). C. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584. D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455. E. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. F. Stainless -Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M. G. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc -alloy die castings. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through -partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories. B. Floor -Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in - swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out -swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Phenolic -Core Toilet Compartments 102113.17 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Floor -Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches (51 mm) into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 102113.17 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Phenolic -Core Toilet Compartments 102113.17 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall protection panels. 2. Feature rails. 3. Abrasion -resistant wall coverings. B. Related Requirements: 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall protection showing locations and extent. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. C. Samples: For each type of wall -protection unit indicated, in each color and texture specified. 1. Include Samples of accent strips and accessories to verify color selection. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall protection product to include in maintenance manuals. 1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining best condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Wall Protection Panels and Abrasion Resistant Wall Covering panels: Panels of each kind equal to 2 percent of each type, kind, color and texture, but no fewer than 2 full panels of each. 2. Feature Rail Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of cover installed, but no fewer than one, 96-inch- (2400- mm-) long units. 3. Corner -Guards: Full-size covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of cover installed, but no fewer than one, 48-inch- (1200-mm-) long units. 4. Mounting and Accessory Components: Amounts proportional to the quantities of extra materials. Package mounting and accessory components with each extra material. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well - ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic wall -protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C). 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- and door - protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Wall And Door Protection 102600 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including detachment of components from each other or from the substrates, delamination, and permanent deformation beyond normal use. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, plastics, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall Protection Panels: 1. Basis of Design - Wall Protection Panel — Acrovyn 4000 PETG rigid sheet with nominal .040 inch thickness and supplied in 43 inch by 114 inch sheets. Acrovyn "Linen" texture. Panels shall be butt jointed with color -matched seam caulk. Color shall be selected from standard range of manufacturer's colors. Provide color matched accessories for a complete system including but not limited to inside plastic corner molding pieces. Install at locations indicated on the drawings. B. Outside Corner Guards: 1. Basis of Design — Outside Corner Guards-Acrovyn VA-200N, 1-1/4 inch by 1-1/4 inch thermoplastic corner guard in matching color with Wall Protection Panel. Extend from base to underside of feature rail at all Wall Protection Panels and Abrasion Resistant Panels. C. Feature Rail: 1. Basis of Design — Acrovyn Model FR-225 2-1/4 inch height by 12 ft long engineered PETG rail. Color shall be selected from standard range of manufacturer's colors. Provide required accessories for a complete system including but not limited to retainer clips, end caps and corner pieces. Install at all locations where Wall Protection Panels and Abrasion Resistant Wallcovering is located. C. Abrasion Resistant Wallcovering: 1. Basis of Design - Korogard "Traffic Pattern" semi -rigid Wallcovering, .030 inches thick in 48 inch by 96 inch sheets. Panels shall be butt jointed. Provide color matched accessories for a complete system including but not limited to seam caulk, and inside plastic corner molding pieces. Color and Pattern as indicated on the drawings. Install at locations on the drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Plastic Materials: Chemical- and stain -resistant, high -impact -resistant plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material as required, thickness as indicated. B. Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S-PCO1, Class 1 or Class 2, abrasion resistant; with a minimum impact -resistance rating of 15 ft.-lbf/in. (800 J/m) of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A. C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless -steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security -type fasteners where exposed to view. D. Adhesive: As recommended by protection -product manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. E. Adhesive: As recommended by protection -product manufacturer and that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wall according to requirements indicated for design, performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Wall And Door Protection 102600 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling. C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. 2.4 FINISHES A. Protect fmishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls to which wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 1. For wall protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation Quality: Install wall protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. B. Mounting Height: Install wall protection and rails in locations and at mounting heights indicated on drawings. C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other accessories required for a complete installation. 1. Provide anchoring devices and suitable locations to withstand imposed loads. 2. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.1 m), splice aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches (305 mm) apart. 3. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams. 3.4 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard ammonia -based household cleaning agent. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 102600 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Wall And Door Protection 102600 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public -use washroom and custodial accessories. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's technical literature for each product indicated, specified, or required. 2. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 3. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED MATERIALS A. Owner -Furnished Materials, Contractor to Install: 1. Soap Dispensers. 2. Paper Towel Dispensers. 3. Toilet Paper Dispensers. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Basis of Design: Contract Documents are based on products specified under each item below to establish a standard of quality. Other acceptable manufacturer with products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor. B. Source Limitations: Obtain public -use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer. C. Grab Bar: 1. Basis of Design Product: Bobrick, B6806 x 36 and 42 inch lengths 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip -resistant texture in grip area. 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). D. Mirror Unit: 1. Basis of Design Product: Bobrick, B-1556 2436 2. Mounting: Four mounting screws. 3. Material: Bright -polished 22 gauge stainless steel with 1/4 inch (6mm) return concealing'/4 inch (6mm) tempered masonite backing. 4. Size: 24 inches x 36 inches. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas E. Mop. Broom Holder and Shelf 1. Basis of Design Product: Bobrick, B-224. 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 3. Length: 36 inches (914 mm). 4. Hooks: Three 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Four spring -loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Shelf. Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel. 8. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter stainless steel. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036- inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness. C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper -and - theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion -resistant backing plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates to receive toilet accessories and associated Work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a matter complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. B. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. C. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lb (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 102800 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cooking appliances. 2. Kitchen exhaust ventilation. 3. Refrigeration appliances. Note- Owner furnished Contractor installed. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, and finishes for each appliance. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Accessibility: Each a residential appliances will comply with accessibility requirements, comply with applicable provisions of most recent Texas Accessibility Standards. 2.2 RANGES A. Electric Range: Freestanding range with one oven and complying with AHAM ER-1. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Whirlpool WFC 340 SOAS (stainless steel), ADA compliant 2. Width: 30 inches 762 mm 3. Electric Burner Elements: Four a. Coil Type: Two 1250 W and two 2100 W. b. Controls: panel controls, located on front C. Cooktop Surface material: Porcelain coated steel d. Storage: Lower storage drawer 4. Oven Features: a. Capacity: 4.8 cu. ft. 0.09 cu. in b. Operation: Baking and self-cleaning. C. Broiler: Located in top of oven. 1) Oven(s): Manufacturer's standard 2) Broiler: Top of Oven location, Manufacturer's standard. d. Controls: Digital panel controls and timer display, located on front 5. Anti -Tip Device: Manufacturer's standard. 6. Electric Power Supply: 240 V, 1 phase, 40 A 2.3 KITCHEN EXHAUST VENTILATION A. Overhead Exhaust Hood 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Broan QS1 30SS 2. Type: undercabinet-mounted exhaust -hood system. 3. Dimensions: Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Residential Appliances 113100- 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas a. Width: 30 inches 914 mm. b. Depth: 19 3/4. 4. Exhaust Fan: Three -speed fan built into hood and 500-cfm(236-L/s capacity. a. Venting: Vented to outside through roof with weatherproof roof cap, backdraft damper, and rodent -proof screening. b. Fan and light Control: Remotely wire controls to wall switches. Render hood unit rocker toggles in -operable. 5. Duct Type: 7-inch- diameter round. 6. Finish: Stainless steel. 7. Features: a. Permanent, washable aluminum -mesh filter(s). b. Built-in twin halogen lighting. 2.4 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS A. Refrigerator/Freezer: Owner shall provide, Contractor to install. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of residential appliances. B. Examine walls, ceilings, and roofs for suitable conditions where each appliance will be installed. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install appliances according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Range Anti -Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance -performance parameters. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and components. B. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 113100 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Residential Appliances 113100- 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SPECIAL NOTE A. The Architectural and Structural Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical and electrical plans, and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Architect's office, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of drawings. Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern. 1.2 CHECKING DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.3 GENERAL A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. O. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" & "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.4 DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.5 INSPECTION OF SITE A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING A. All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. The contractor shall coordinate the voltage of all motors and any associated variable frequency drives with the Division 16 contractor prior to ordering the devices. C. Where no temperature control scope is shown in the documents, it shall be the responsibility of the Division 16 contractor to provide wiring, conduit and switches for the manual control of all mechanical and plumbing equipment, unless specifically noted to the contrary on the drawings and specifications. 1.7 MOTORS AND CONTROLS A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 15 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. 1.8 PROGRESS OF WORK A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1.11 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. Within 30 days of being awarded the Contract for any section or sections of the work under this heading, the Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. If the material is not submitted within 30 days of the contract signing, the Contractor shall furnish the specified materials. C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 1.13 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. 1.14 PERMITS, FEES, ETC A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1.15 TESTING A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. 1.16 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.17 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install", and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.18 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 7 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas the Architect, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. 1.19 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details B. Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc. C. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. D. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. E. All items specified under Divisions 15 and 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 8 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas D. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. E. In all spaces where new work under Division 15 and 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. 1.21 PAINTING A. Painting for Divisions 15 and 16 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal. 3. Paint all exposed sheet metal. 4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. B. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible. 1.22 SEALING A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors by packing fire resistant rope and fire resistant cement. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.23 ACCESS PANELS A. Wherever mechanical and/or electrical equipment is installed and where future access is required through either walls or ceilings and such cannot be obtained through the removable ceiling or through other means, the Contractor shall provide Milcor Style "M" access doors at least 12 inches by 12 inches in size or larger if required for access. Provide access doors for all fire dampers, smoke dampers, valves, etc. Access doors shall be custom sizes as shown on the drawings, and as detailed in the architectural drawings. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 9 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1.24 USE OF SYSTEMS A. It is considered that it will be necessary to operate the mechanical systems to provide heating and ventilation in portions of the building that are enclosed. As systems or portions of systems become operable, they shall be operated as required to maintain habitable conditions in enclosed portions of the building that are still under construction and portions that are fully complete as may be required to properly protect installed piping, equipment and finishes. B. In order to provide protection to ducts, plenums, etc. install temporary filters over or in return air openings until all finished painting is completed. Protect supply outlets, coils, etc. as necessary in each case. C. Except for operation of cooling equipment to prove its performance and to adjust and balance the systems, that equipment will not be operated for comfort of construction workers. D. During warm weather the Contractor shall arrange for the operation of systems to supply 100 percent outside air. The systems controls shall be reset to their normal cycle of operation in each case during the times that heating is required and when the cooling equipment is operated. E. Immediately prior to the time that the systems are to be accepted by the Owner, each system shall be carefully examined and if ductwork is dirty, it shall be carefully cleaned by men skilled in that type of work. All filters shall be put in first class condition by replacement of filters and/or other procedures as directed. F. The use of the equipment for maintaining environmental and/or protective temperature conditions shall in no way constitute acceptance of that equipment and the connected piping, ducts, insulation, finishes, etc. by the Owner. Furthermore, it shall in no way shorten the guarantee period hereinafter specified. The Contractor shall either secure extended warranties from the vendors of equipment or shall purchase insurance to provide proper coverage on the equipment through the guarantee period and shall file with the Architect substantiating affidavits from equipment manufacturers or a copy of the insurance policy covering the equipment through the guarantee period. The personal underwriting of the Contractor for equipment manufacturers' warranties is not acceptable, but his personal underwriting of piping, ductwork, insulation and associated materials is acceptable subject to the provisions of the contract. G. The Contractor shall provide such labor as may be required in the operation of the systems and shall pay all costs. 1.25 OWNERS OCCUPANCY A. It shall be understood that the building in which the work is to be done is a necessary part of the Owner's operation, and shall continue in use throughout the construction period without interruption. Take all precautions required by the Owner for the protection of his equipment and property. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the owner in scheduling areas in which work is permitted. Owners schedule will govern. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 10 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1.26 SCHEDULE OF WORK A. The work under the various sections must be expedited and close coordination will be required in executing the work. The various trades shall perform their portion of the work at such times as directed so as to insure meeting scheduled completion dates, and to avoid delaying any other trade. The Architect will set up completion dates, schedule the times of work in the various areas involved, etc. Each Contractor shall cooperate in establishing these times and locations and shall process his work so as to insure the proper execution of it. 1.27 WORKING TIME A. All work required by these installations shall be done during normal working hours, except in such cases as are specifically excepted hereinbefore. The Owner reserves the right to direct, at his own discretion, that any other parts of the work be done at other than normal working hours; in which case the Contractor involved shall be reimbursed by an amount equal to the excess cost of such overtime labor above the value of the same at regular rates. 1.28 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATION A. There are portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air conditioning system and electrical System which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as directed by the Architect. For example: 1. Existing Plumbing piping, etc. shall be relocated under Division 15 where it interferes with the installation of new work. 2. Where existing piping, ductwork, etc. interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 15. 3. Where existing conduit and electrical equipment interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 16. B. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. 1.29 EXISTING WASTE AND DRAIN LINE A. Special care and precaution shall be used where existing waste or drain lines are to be opened. The following procedure shall be adhered to at all times when opening existing waste or drain lines: Before opening, prepare a solution of one part household bleach to nine parts water. At every inlet to the affected piping run, add 2 gallons of the solution to flush out the piping. Any worker who has cuts or open skin breaks shall be prevented from working with the waste or drain piping. Workers shall wear approved face shields, gloves, aprons, boots, etc. for protection. In addition, existing piping shall be thoroughly washed inside and out with bleach Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 11 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas solution prior to handling by unprotected persons. The safety director or Owner's representative shall be notified prior to commencing work on any existing waste or drain lines. 1.30 SALVAGE MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, piping, duct, grilles, conduit, wire, junction boxes, light fixtures and other items associated with the mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems where shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general construction and has no continuing function (as determined by the Architect), they shall be removed by the contractor under the section in which the item normally falls. B. Existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. C. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated by the Owner. All item not claimed become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. 1.31 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.32 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 12 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. 1.33 MARKING OF PIPE A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers. C. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 fist 1IQ WNIIaW1,11I1610F:11►17r.11.11 aIetc] A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF-1, EF-2, etc.; AC Units will be AC-1, AC-2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 13 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 4. AC Units 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items 1.35 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 1.36 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. 1.37 GUARANTEE A. Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. 1.38 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 14 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. 1.39 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION A. Before calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 15000 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15000 - 15 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 015150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SPECIALTIES (Vent Pipe Extensions) PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plumbing vent pipe extension fittings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 07 Section "Preparation for Reroofing" for general requirements for preparation for building reroofing including coordination of related plumbing and mechanical work. B. Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for general requirements for waste and vent piping. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 2. ASTM D 2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 3. ASTM D 2665 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 4. ASTM F 656 Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings B. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO): 1. Universal Plumbing Code (cUPC US and Canada) approvals. C. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): 1. NRCA Roofing Manual, Latest Edition. D. NSF International (NSF): 1. NSF/ANSI 14 — Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For plumbing vent pipe extensions, indicating mounting and securing requirements and extended heights required. B. Shop Drawings: Submit annotated copy of roof plan indicating locations of plumbing vents requiring pipe extensions, based upon Contractor's field verification of existing conditions and requirements of applicable of plumbing code. 1. Indicate details of completed roofing flashing configuration for all locations. Include reference to applicable NRCA plate number. 1.05 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: On roofing membrane manufacturer's letterhead, accepting use of proposed sealant in contact with roofing membrane. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. B. Comply with flashing requirements shown in NRCA Roofing Manual. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide sanitary vent pipe extensions manufactured by Tubos, Inc., Clearwater, FL; Phone (727) 504-0633, infoAtubos.biz. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste and vent. B. Sealant: Single -Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT, and acceptable to roofing membrane manufacturer. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 18 February 14 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SPECIALTIES 015150 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.03 PLUMBING VENT PIPE EXTENSION A. Roof Vent Pipe Extension: Solid -wall PVC fitting consisting of pipe and splice sleeve inserts, configured for insertion and sealing to existing plumbing vent piping, sized to fit inside diameter of plumbing vent piping, enabling extension of piping to field -determined height. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine each pluming vent piping location to determine required plumbing vent pipe extensions based upon minimum finished height requirements and measured existing conditions. Indicate plumbing vent pipe extensions on shop drawings. 1. Examine existing plumbing vent piping conditions and determine whether flashing reuse is acceptable or whether replacement of flashing is required. Indicate flashing replacement locations on shop drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove existing flashing from plumbing vent piping to extent required to enable installation of new plumbing vent pipe extensions and completion of flashings. B. Clean plumbing vent piping to ensure that joint surfaces are clean, dry and free from contamination including dirt, oils, grease, tar, wax, rust and other substances that my inhibit adhesive or sealant performance. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING VENT PIPE EXTENSIONS A. Insert end of plumbing vent pipe extension into existing plumbing vent piping. 1. Verify circumference of existing plumbing vent piping and plumbing vent pipe extension are appropriate to achieve secure, rigid installation. 2. Mark plumbing vent pipe extension at required height above finished roof surface level, and cut to required length. 3. Apply adhesive or sealant to plumbing vent piping as appropriate to existing pipe material and plumbing vent pipe extension, and mate plumbing vent pipe extension to existing piping. Apply adequate adhesive or sealant to achieve secure, rigid installation. B. Flashing: Comply with primary roofing material manufacturer's published recommendations for installation of approved pipe flashings. Match existing flashing material unless otherwise directed. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair or replace defective work, include loose plumbing vent extensions, or unsecured flashings or flashings that are not weathertight. END OF SECTION 15150 Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 18 February 14 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SPECIALTIES 015150 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15200 - SITE UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. Perform all layout, trenching, excavation, backfill, shoring and similar work and provide and install all materials and appurtenances necessary for the installation and final connection of all utilities. 1.4 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Prior to beginning work, manually locate and stake all utility lines existing at the site. B. The Contractor shall not rely solely on the scale drawings in determining the scope of the work. C. The drawings are not certified surveys and are not guaranteed for accuracy of location or elevation of existing lines or completeness. Before bidding, each bidder shall by personal examination of the project satisfy himself as to the existing conditions which prevail. D. Reasonable differences in actual jobsite dimensions and the drawings shall not be considered justification for a change in the contract sum. E. Interruptions: Conduct operations to minimize service outages. When interruption is unavoidable, schedule the interruption in consultation with the Architect and Owner to occur at a time of least demand for the utility. Notify the Owner of requested interruption time at least 24 hours in advance of outage. F. Disconnections: Provide where indicated on the drawings. Where not so indicated provide disconnections at appropriate locations as selected by the Contractor to facilitate his work. Cap terminal ends of active utility branches. G. Utilities to Remain: Protect from damage due to construction operations. Repair or replace portions so damaged as directed by the Architect. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Site Utilities 15200 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All piping materials for every purpose shall be furnished and installed as hereinafter specified. B. All pipe and fittings shall be new and unused unless specifically indicated otherwise. C. Underground steel piping shall be cleaned and primed with Humble "Rust -Ban" and wrapped with a double thickness of 3M Scotch "51" vinyl tape over pipe and fittings. D. Factory coated pipe "X-Tru-Coat" or epoxy coated pipe with wrapped fittings will be considered equal. 2.2 SANITARY SEWER A. PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3034 type PSM with a maximum SDR of 35 with elastomeric joints complying with ASTM D3212. PVC may be used on all exterior sanitary sewer lines except under vehicular areas. 2.3 WATER LINES A. Copper Tubing: ASTM Standard B88, type K, annealed with solder joint fittings. 2.4 GAS LINES A. Plastic Gas Piping: Polyethylene, Type III, Grade 3, (PE 3406-3408), resin conforming to ASTM D1248-7A, pipe construction conforming to ASTM D2513 (SDR 11). B. Mechanical Joints: Where steel lines connect to plastic lines 2" and smaller in size, use Continental Style 5 extra heavy duty malleable iron couplings with stiffeners. C. Flanges: Where steel lines valves or accessories connect to plastic lines 2-1/2" and larger, use polyethylene and steel flat face flanges with full face gaskets. D. Casing: Encase plastic lines under streets in schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe extending 36" beyond paving with a vented riser on both ends. E. Service Risers: General Plastic "Corrosion Guard" type CGR-2. F. Plastic marking tape shall be acid and alkali -resistant polyethylene film, 6 inches wide with minimum thickness of 0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1750 psi lengthwise and 1500 psi crosswire. The tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil backing or other means to enable detection by a metal detector when the tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. The tape shall be of the type specifically manufactured for marking and locating underground utilities. The metallic core of the tape shall be encased in a protective jacket or provided with Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Site Utilities 15200 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas other means to protect it from corrosion. Tape shall bear a continuous printed inscription describing the specific utility. 2.5 EXTERIOR CLEANOUTS A. Provide and install cleanouts in exterior sewer lines where shown or as required by ordinance but not greater than 100 ft. apart. Cleanouts shall consist of a concrete encased special fitting with sewer pipes extending therefrom upward, terminating in a concrete slab. A brass countersunk cleanout ferrule shall be set on this slab in such manner as to be flush with finished grade and to provide access, through its cover, to the cleanout. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the sewer, up to 6" in size, and 4" on 6" and larger sizes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LAYOUT OF UTILITY LINES A. Before starting excavation Contractor shall: 1. Uncover and determine the elevation at beginning and end terminals of each line. 2. Compute and verify depth of all lines and grade of sewer lines and submit figures in writing. 3. Stake route of each line. 4. Arrange utility connections with authorities. 5. Locate and identify any conflicting underground structures and adjust grade or routing to accommodate installation of the lines. B. Laying Pipe: 1. Lay pipe to the lines and profiles required by conditions at the site and the drawings. Keep pipe trenches free of water and dry during the bedding, laying and jointing operations. Install fittings and valves at the required locations, with joints centered and with valve stems vertical. Handle pipe carefully to avoid damage to dimensioned ends. Remove pipe with damaged ends which cannot be suitably repaired. Keep interior of piping and accessories clean. 2. Proximity of Water and Sewer Lines: Unless otherwise required by drawings, lay parallel water lines and sewer lines in separate trenches at least 10 feet apart. Insofar as possible place water line at a higher elevation than the sewer. Where water lines and sewer lines cross each other, the water line shall be at least 3 feet above the sewer, or if this is not possible, amount of clearance between the lines may be reduced to 12" out to out clearance provided the sewer line is cast iron for at least 10 feet on each side of the water line. 3.2 EXCAVATION FOR OUTSIDE UTILITIES: Refer to Division 2. 3.3 BACKFILLING: Refer to Division 2. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Site Utilities 15200 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.4 UTILITY SERVICES A. Water Service: Connect to the existing water service line at the site. Refer to the drawings for details. Provide a valve and valve box at the connection point. B. Sanitary Sewer: Extend the sanitary sewer to the septic tank and sewage disposal field. Refer to the drawings. C. Gas: Refer to the drawings for details of gas service. 3.5 TESTING A. Sewer: Prior to testing for leakage the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected regardless of leakage test results. B. Test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 2 feet is provided above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipe line to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand until the pipe has reached its maximum absorption, but not less than 4 hours. After absorption, the head shall be re-established. The hour test period shall be measured. C. Leakage shall not exceed 0.4 gallons per inch diameter per 100 feet of pipe line per hour. When leakage exceeds the maximum amount specified, satisfactory correction shall be made and retesting accomplished. Correction and retesting shall be made at no additional cost. D. Water Lines Soldered or Flanged: Test under hydrostatic pressure of 125 PSIG for 2 hours with no leaks and no pressure drop. E. Gas: Before backfilling, test under air pressure at 50 PSIG for 24 hours. There shall be no pressure drop, except for correction for temperature variation. If any pressure drop occurs, soap test every joint, correct the leaks and retest. ION1XII&IONIMeEMOOZ1Z11 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Site Utilities 15200 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15300 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.4 INSPECTION A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. ft&�9Moll IOfJ Irol►@Bill ti1►=11111616NIXt921 A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Piping and Accessories 15300 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe No Hub Joints Clay Tile Pipe and Fittings Clay Tile Joints Rubber Rings for A.C. Pipe ABS Soil Pipe and Fittings ABS Soil Joints — Elastomeric PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings PVC Soil Fittings — Elastomeric Copper Tubing Wrought Copper Solder Fittings Cast Bronze Solder Fittings Steel Pipe Butt Weld Fittings Socket Weld Fittings Steel Flanges Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Cast Iron Water Pipe Cement Lining for C.I. Water Pipe Cast Iron Water Pipe Fittings, Lined Push -On Joints for C.I. Water Pipe Mechanical Joints for Water Pipe PVC Water Pipe Push On Joints for PVC Water Pipe Fed. Spec. HH-P-117, Type II ASTM D3183 ASTM C700 ASTM C425 ASTM D 1869 ASTM D2751 ASTM D2751 ASTM D3034, Type PSM Max. SDR = 35 ASTM D3212 ASTM B88 ANSI B16.22 ANSI B16.18 ASTM A120, A53, A106 ANSI B16.9 /_= : G B11 ANSI B16.5 ANSI B16.3 Fed. Spec. WW-P-501 E ANSI A21.6 ANSI A21.4 ANSI A21.10 and A21.10a ANSI A21.11 ANSI A21.11 ASTM D1584 Type 1120 ASTM D1585, AWWA C900 C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Maloney. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. 2.2 VALVES A. General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 3-1/2" and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Above 125 PSIG Gate 2" and smaller 428 424 Gate 2-1/2" and larger 465-1/2 7-1/2 E Globe 2" and smaller 1 14-1/2 P Globe 2-1/2" and larger 351 21E Angle 2" and smaller 2 16-1/2 P Angle 2-1/2" and larger 353 23E Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Piping and Accessories 15300 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in insulated lines, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket. C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. D. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to Crane No. 37 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 36 for pressures to 200 psi SWP or 400 PSI WOG. E. Swing Check Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged, bronze trimmed; equal to Crane No. 373 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 39E for pressures from 125 psi to 250 psi. F. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and 0-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Memory stops may be deleted for domestic water service. Valve shall be three piece break away for in -line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable, except for drain line service. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket. G. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to Nordstrom Fig. 143 in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Valves 2" and smaller equal to Crane No. 270 or Lee 10685 iron body flat -head threaded gas stop. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Piping and Accessories 15300 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated weldingfgs of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.2 FLASHING A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 4 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall be 36" square. 3.3 MASTIC PANS A. Small lines thru the roof shall be installed thru mastic pans. Pans shall be 18 gage galvanized, welded, 3" deep, 8" X 8" or larger, packed with mastic. 3.4 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. 3.5 INTERIOR TRENCHING A. Trenches for underfloor lines inside the building shall be properly excavated, following in general the procedures set out for exterior lines. Where floors are to be poured over these lines, they shall be backfllled, tamped, and settled with water. B. Where necessary to cut floors for installation of underfloor lines, the floor shall be saw cut and patched back to a flush and level condition. C. All surplus materials removed in these trenching operations shall be disposed of as directed by the Architect. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Piping and Accessories 15300 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.6 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder (95% tin, 5% antimony) or Silvabrite 100 solder (95.5% tin, 4% copper, .5% silver composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content be permitted on the jobsite. Where flanges are shown or are required for connection to equipment, they shall be 150 psi flanges. B. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. C. Solvent Weld Plastic Joints: Solvent welded according to manufacturers instructions. 3.7 REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking of the joint; but if that fails, remake the joint. 4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 4" in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 3.8 HANDLING OF MATERIAL A. Hauling: All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be delivered and distributed at the site by the Contractor. B. Loading and Unloading: Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be loaded or unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Piping and Accessories 15300 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas to be installed. No material shall be unloaded where it will block any road, drive, building entrance, or walkway or where it will be a hazard to safe vehicular or pedestrian traffic. C. Care of Pipe Coating and Lining: Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining shall not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. If satisfactory repair cannot be made, the Contractor shall replace the damaged pipe. 3.9 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. B. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. END OF SECTION 15300 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Piping and Accessories 15300 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15350 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67. B. Sanitary Fixture Waste Arms: Fixtures served by sanitary soil waste and drain lines shall be connected using cast iron pipe and fittings, red brass pipe, Type L hard copper tubing with cast brass drainage fittings or lead. Use brass soldering nipples or ferrules as required. C. Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and standard weight galvanized steel, Type L or heavier weight copper, red brass, or lead for lines smaller than 2" except that the same class of material shall be used throughout, insofar as practicable. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. D. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Where connections are made between copper tubing and cast iron pipe, use adapters. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder joint fittings. No lead solder will be permitted. All flanges shall be 150 psig rated. E. Gas Lines: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 lbs. banded malleable iron fittings. F. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Plumbing Systems 15350 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas G. Miscellaneous Lines: Such as pilot lines, bleed lines, control and sampling lines, equalizer lines, drains from air vents and relief vents, etc. shall be fabricated of the materials used in the systems to which they are connected. H. Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change in direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be concealed behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W-8480-R or provided with other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors shall be Wade W-6000-TS with square tile top; in carpeted areas Wade W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to 4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines. Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with PDI recommendations. Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device which has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, or which has a threaded or tubing spout, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible backflow through them. Where these are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to match. K. Automatic Air Vents: This Contractor shall furnish and install Crane No. 976 or 977 air vent valves at all high points for the hot water system, as shown and/or as required. Run a 3/4 inch type L hard copper drain line from the discharge of each air vent valve to a floor drain or as directed. 2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures of Crane, American Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be acceptable. B. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. C. All threaded supply fittings or outlets with tubing nozzles shall have back flow preventers. D. All fixtures shall have (1/4) turn ball stop valves. E. Generally all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers so that no weight is supported from the wall. F. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Plumbing Systems 15350 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas G. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in. H. Where fixtures mate with irregular walls, the joint shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as directed by the Architect. The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall secure a current ruling on heights of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that they meet the requirements of the parties having jurisdiction. 2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE: Refer to drawings. 2.4 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. The Contractor shall disconnect all existing kitchen equipment plumbing connections and reconnect all equipment in the new location. Furnish and install new unions, gas cocks, valves and fittings and all other materials and labor required to provide a complete functional systems. B. In addition, rough -in and make final connections to all new equipment furnished by others. Furnish and install all stops, waste, escutcheons, etc., required to provide a complete functional system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ISOLATION VALVES A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the riser. These isolation valves shall be installed at an accessible location. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. 1. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. 2. Vents: a. Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof. b. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Plumbing Systems 15350 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. 3. Gas Lines: a. All gas piping shall run exposed unless specifically detailed otherwise on the drawings, with special venting provisions. b. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item of equipment and at each low point of the gas distribution system. Grade all lines to drip pockets. Drip pockets shall consist of a nipple and cap screwed to the bottom of the drop. C. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at each connection to a gas consuming appliance. d. All gas piping on the roof shall be supported on Miro Pillow Block pipe stands, Model 02 for 2" and below, Model 24-R for piping 2" to 4" and Model 48-R for 5" and above. Pans shall be mopped to roof. Pipes shall be strapped to supports with galvanized strap. 4. Identification: For other than black steel pipe, exposed gas piping shall be identified by a yellow label marked "Gas" in black letters. The marking shall be spaced at intervals not exceeding 5 feet (1524 mm). The marking shall not be required on pipe located in the same room as the appliances served. All tubing carrying medium -pressure gas shall be marked with a label at the beginning and end of each tubing section. 3.3 EXISTING WASTE AND DRAIN LINE A. Special care and precaution shall be used where existing waste or drain lines are to be opened. The following procedure shall be adhered to at all times when opening existing waste or drain lines: Before opening, prepare a solution of one part household bleach to nine parts water. At every inlet to the affected piping run, add 2 gallons of the solution to flush out the piping. Any worker who has cuts or open skin breaks shall be prevented from working with the waste or drain piping. Workers shall wear approved face shields, gloves, aprons, boots, etc. for protection. In addition, existing piping shall be thoroughly washed inside and out with bleach solution prior to handling by unprotected persons. The safety director or Owner's representative shall be notified prior to commencing work on any existing waste or drain lines. fJEA UU f.`VNQIC A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in f u-rings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Plumbing Systems 15350 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1" in 8 hours. D. Gas Lines: Test with 50 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest. 3.5 DISINFECTING A. After cleaning, flushing and testing, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the disinfection of all domestic pipe lines which shall be disinfected by the application of a chlorinating agent. The chlorinating agent may be a liquid chlorine, liquid chlorine gas water mixture, or a calcium hypochlorite solution, which shall be fed into the lines through a suitable solution feed device. B. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at or near the point from which the line is being filled and through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. The water being used to fill the line shall be controlled to flow into the section to be disinfected very slowly. C. The chlorine dose applied to the water entering the lines shall be at least 40 to 60 parts per million. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe lines for a period of not less than 24 hours. At the end of the 24 hour retention period the chlorine residual shall be at least 20 ppm. All treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the lines until the replacement water in the lines has a chlorine residual of not more than 0.2 parts per million. END OF SECTION 15350 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Plumbing Systems 15350 - 5 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15400 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of apparatus casing, ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, relief air vents, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various items of equipment and materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low-pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. B. Duct construction details shall conform to "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", 1st Edition, (1985) published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Refer to the fan schedules (TSP) for system pressures. Construction shall be suitable for actual duct system pressures. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with double thickness factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Air Distribution 15400 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of airflow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate. E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. 2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION TEST A. A trial leak test, as specified herein, shall be made after installation of the first section of each type of ductwork to demonstrate adequacy of the construction details. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Architect. B. Each test section shall incorporate at least five transverse joints and all typical fittings. C. Drawings showing all construction details of test sections, test procedures and instrumentation, and test results shall be submitted for record purposes. No additional ductwork shall be installed until the trial test installation described above has been approved. D. Low pressure duct shall be tested at 3" w.c. Construction of low-pressure systems shall be inherently airtight and leakage shall be of a sufficiently low magnitude as to be inaudible in quiet ambient and not detectable by sense of feel. 2.3 DUCT SEALER A. All supply air ductwork from the air unit to the terminal units shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. 2.4 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the airflow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a splitter damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off and additional volume dampers shall be installed where shown or required to achieve the final air balance. B. Splitter dampers and volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. The length of any splitter damper blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the smaller split in the duct, but shall be not less than 12". Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Air Distribution 15400 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 18". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24", volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall be fitted with felts to insure tight closure. Felts shall be both glued and riveted to the damper blades. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. D. Each splitter or volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible ducts shall be used for connecting air terminal devices. Generally flex duct shall not exceed 3'0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. Flexible duct shall be a factory - fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiberglass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KC for high pressure and Thermaflex M-KE for low-pressure application. 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3" between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least 1" slack in the flexible material itself. B. The material shall be of a vinyl coated woven nylon/polyester blend base fabric, 22 oz. per square yard, meeting NFPA 90A and B for flame spread and smoke developed. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant. The material shall be equal to Excelon Fabric as manufactured by Duro-Dyne. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Air Distribution 15400 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.7 ROUND DUCT TAPS A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. B. All round takeoffs from rectangular ducts shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. Spin in fitting shall be equal to Dace Model FCDG-0O3 with 2" stand-off, lock quadrant, 3/8" sq. steel rod, nylon bearings and scoop. Furnish flange collar, 24-gauge galvanized steel, with adhesive coated 1/8" thick rubber gasket. 2.8 ACCESS PANEL A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in ducts to permit servicing of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall panels with material to match the lining and of the same thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All access panels shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390 gaskets. B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the general construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used 1:101 Z63&1ZENIrole@&Z[oil] Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Air Distribution 15400 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15500 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and Larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Steel lines 4" and larger 239 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Hanger Cast Iron Lines 239 Hanger Plastic Pipe 108 + 109 Hanger Refrigerant Pipe 102 Hanger Glass Pipe 375 Wall Bracket All 150, 151, or 155 Saddles Steel Lines On Rollers 71, 1710, 1712, 172, 173 Conc. Inserts New Construction 185 Rollers Steel Piping 161,272 Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Exp Shield Concrete 374 Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 Adjuster All 2381 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Hangers and Supports 15500 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.2 HANGER RODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter Size of Steel Pipe or Size of Cast Iron Copper Tube Supported Pipe Supported 3/8" 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and smaller 1/2" 3" and 4" 4" through 6" 5/8" 5" through 8" 8" through 10" 3/4" 10" and larger 12" and larger 2.3 HANGER SPACING A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or required by code. Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet 3/4" and smaller 5 1" through 1-1/2" 7 2" and larger 10 All cast iron lines 5 (Minimum two per joint) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Hangers and Supports 15500 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. F. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed for sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. G. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances shall be acceptable as hanger material. 3.2 COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES A. Where pipes specified under different sections may possibly be racked on the same supporting structure, each trade shall cooperate with the others involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish a proportionate share of the labor and materials involved in the installation. B. Any other special hangers and supports shall be provided and installed as indicated on the drawings, specified elsewhere herein or required by conditions at the site. END OF SECTION 15500 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Hangers and Supports 15500 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15600 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically accepted. 2.1 MATERIALS A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Insulation 15600 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams. C. Where metal jackets are specified, they shall be 0.016" thick No. 5005 tempered aluminum secured with machine drawn 0.020" stainless steel bands. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. B. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams and seal with vapor barrier lap adhesive equal to Benjamin Foster 82-07 or use self sealing lap. Tightly butt the ends and cover butt joints with a 4" wide band of vapor barrier jacket secured with the same adhesive. 3.3 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. In the following, the word "exposed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in any room above the lowest floor in any building unit, exterior to the building and above ground, and/or in equipment rooms; the word "concealed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in other underfloor areas, ceiling spaces furrings and chases. Domestic Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with 1" thick Manville "Micro-Lok APT 650" molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with all purpose jacket. Insulate Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Insulation 15600 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. 2. Domestic Cold Water Lines: All cold water lines throughout with those exceptions noted hereinbefore, shall be insulated with 1/2" thick Manville "Micro-lok APT 650" molded glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied vapor barrier jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. 3. Refrigeration Suction Piping: 1" Manville Type II "Aerotube" threaded onto piping during fabrication and sealed with adhesive. 4. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Armaflex. Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during fabrication. 5. Duct Insulation: Refer to Section'AIR DISTRIBUTION' for duct liner specification. 6. Ducts: a. Insulate the supply, return and fresh air ducts with 0.75 lb. density, 2" thick Manville "Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. b. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Except on ducts handling warm air only, seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with 3" wide pressure sensitive foil type applied with moving pressure using an appropriate sealing tool. Staples shall be outward clinch, maximum 6" on center. Install with not more than 25% compression in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three-inch wide facing strip. d. Ducts handling warm air only need not be vapor sealed. END OF SECTION 15600 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Insulation 15600 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15700 - EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - no. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Equipment 15700 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 2. Fractional larger than 1/6 HP: Capacitor start, 40-degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 3. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40-degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. 4. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Power factor shall be 85% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E-Plus. 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS A. Except where starters are shown integral to motor control centers (see electrical drawings), the Division 15 Contractor shall furnish all motor starters (controllers) and control equipment for equipment specified under Division 15. The Contractor under this section of the specifications shall be responsible for coordinating starter sizes, characteristics, heater element sizes and all other details. All starters shall be combination starter/disconnect devices, and shall include control transformers, hand -off -auto switches, and pilot lights. B. All individual starters shall be the product of a single manufacturer and submitted for review at the same time. C. Where starters are specified with items of equipment, the starters shall be factory mounted and wired. D. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units unless otherwise indicated. E. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Federal or Gould manufacture with the proper enclosures. F. Provide pilot lights and either pushbutton stations or hand -off -automatic switches as required for the control of each item of equipment. Generally, pushbutton stations shall be used only where no interlock or remote functions are specified. Control devices shall be in the starter cover unless otherwise indicated. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Equipment 15700 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas G. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. H. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. Overloads shall be solid state type. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. Manual Starters: Where manual starters are indicated, they shall consist of a horsepower rated on -off switch, or hand -off -auto switch with a pilot light and overload element(s) in the same enclosure. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box with a stainless steel coverplate. 2.3 BELT GUARDS A. Belt guards shall be provided for all belt driven equipment installed under this contract. Guards shall be rigidly constructed of 18-gauge sheet metal on angle iron frame, with fronts of expanded metal or 1/2 inch mesh hardware cloth. Guards shall be sized to permit belt tightening to the full extent of the motor slide rails. They shall be securely installed in such fashion as to permit ready removal for servicing of the protected drive. Guards shall have tach holes. 2.4 FLUE VENTS A. Provide and install flue vents on all gas burning devices including water heaters, unit heaters and furnaces. B. All such flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos double wall metal conduit and shall be of the sizes recommended by the manufacturers of the devices vented. They shall be complete with all couplings and other required fittings and shall terminate 24" above the roof in a ventilator type weatherproof rainhead similar and equal to a Breidert Air-X-Hauster. Where any vent passes through combustible construction it shall be provided with a separation in accordance with the standards of the NFPA. All vents shall be flashed and counterflashed into the roofing construction to the satisfaction of the Architect and shall be watertight. 2.5 WATER HEATER A. Provide the water heater shown and scheduled on the drawings. It shall be a glass lined, jacketed, insulated package water heater. B. The gas fired unit shall be complete with draft diverter, adjustable thermostatic control, gas pressure regulator and all standard accessories including a thermomagnetic safety pilot designed to shut off gas flow completely to both main burner and pilot burner, if pilot flame is extinguished. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Equipment 15700 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Provide in the outlet of each heater a Watts temperature and pressure relief valve, with a drain line therefrom full size to the floor drain. Size valve according to the applicable codes. D. Gas fired water heaters shall bear the ASME Stamp and shall be installed in accordance with the Boiler Code if the capacity is 120 gallons or more, or the input is 200,000 BTUH or more. Specifically, 2' of clearance is required on all sides, and 4' of clearance is required above the heater. E. Refer to drawings for capacities. 2.6 FANS A. The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. B. All v-belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract. C. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v-belt drive shall be selected for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified rpm. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be flexible. D. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise and vibration. E. Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled. F. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect. G. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. H. Fans shall have factory -applied finish. Fan motors 1/8 HP and larger shall be permanent capacitor start type. f►.>�I�yslIa12to*:4:RAN I8aI:Vf A. Unitary exhaust fans shall be as scheduled on the drawings. They shall be centrifugal, direct driven fans in a sound insulated sheet metal housing for installation above the ceiling. There shall be a finished integral grille for each unit. Provide a backdraft damper, duct thru the roof and suitable rain cap for each. Fans shall be Penn, Greenheck, or equal. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Equipment 15700 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.8 FILTERS A. Provide all filters specified herein and/or scheduled or shown on the drawings. All filters shall be erected in holding frames, tight fitting, with no bypass path. B. All filters of every type shall be UL listed Class I or II. C. Every air -handling device which supplies air to any space shall have a filter bank. No., size, and type of filters, shall be as scheduled on the drawings. D. All frames shall be fitted with new media at final acceptance. In addition provide 100% spare filters. E. Filter Racks: Flat filters shall be installed in factory fabricated slide rails with access door. Provide closures as required. 2.9 DISPOSABLE MEDIUM EFFICIENCY FILTERS A. Filters shall be medium efficiency (30-35% based on ASHRAE 52-68) at a velocity of 500 FPM. Media shall be pleated, non woven reinforced cotton fabric supported by a welded wire grid with 95% open area. Frame shall be heavy-duty waterproof chipboard. Filter shall have not less than 4.5 square feet of media per foot of face area. Filters shall be equal to Farr 30/30 series. A. Furnace shall have the heating and fan capacities scheduled. It shall be a Lennox steel forced warm air, gas fired winter air conditioner complete with heavy furniture steel casing, heat transfer element, burner, draft diverter, gas pressure regulator, automatic pilot and safety controls, squirrel cage fans with motors and v-belt drives, filter and all other standard accessories. B. Automatic controls at each unit shall include magnetic gas valves, remote room thermostats, limit controls, and thermostatic fan switch. Fan motors shall be provided with thermal overload protection. C. Temperature controls shall be furnished by the unit manufacturer. D. Similar and equal furnaces as manufactured by Carrier, Trane and Westinghouse are acceptable. 2.11 PACKAGED DX COOLING COIL FOR FURNACE A. Cooling coil shall fit the furnace. It shall be of the configuration indicated on the drawings. Provide complete with coil, casing, drain pan, expansion device and other accessories required. When performing with the furnace and condensing unit it shall deliver the scheduled capacity. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Equipment 15700 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Provide the refrigerant piping to completely connect the coils with the condensing units. The piping shall consist of precharged lines with quick couplings. Suction piping shall be insulated with foam plastic insulation threaded on and sealed. Support the piping with Unistrut hangers. C. Provide a liquid line filter dryer and a sight glass at each coil. D. Provide a drain line from each coil to the floor drain. 2.12 PACKAGED AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS A. The air-cooled condensing units shall be of the self contained packaged type suitable for outdoor mounting. Each shall be factory assembled complete with refrigeration system, condensing coils, fans, controls, etc. all in a rigidly constructed and finished housing. The condensing unit shall be connected to the remote cooling coil. The units shall be mounted as shown on the drawings. B. The refrigeration system shall be of the hermetically sealed type utilizing Freon as a refrigerant. It shall be of the air cooled type with the refrigerant condensed in copper coils with aluminum fins. C. The fan in each unit shall be direct driven with motor of the permanently sealed lubrication type. D. Each unit shall have minimum performance characteristics as tabulated on the drawings. It shall be furnished with the manufacturer's standard thermostatic, manual, and safety controls, and shall be completely internally wired. Each shall be as manufactured by Lennox, Trane or Carrier. E. Each compressor shall be guaranteed for 5 years. F. Hail Guard Screen: Entire condenser coil shall be covered with 18 gauge, 1/2" mesh galvanized wire screen. 2.13 TOUCHSCREEN PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT A. Programmable thermostats shall be equal to Honeywell VisionPRO 8000 series TB8220 commercial thermostat with touchscreen LCD screen. Features shall include large backlit digital display and touchscreen interaction. Unit shall be equipped with real time clock with battery backup during power failures and automatic compensation for daylight savings time. Unit shall be capable of seven-day program with intuitive, menu -driven, on -screen programming. Unit shall include Heat - Cool - Auto feature for compliance with International Energy Conservation Code. Unit shall include multiple HOLD options to temporarily override programming. Unit shall control within one degree Fahrenheit. Unit shall be equipped with up to three heat and two cool stages and shall be heat -pump compatible. Coordinate stages and heat -pump compatibility with equipment served by each thermostat. Unit shall carry a 5-year warranty. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Equipment 15700 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 15700 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Equipment 15700 - 7 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15800 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems 15800 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Flow rate and temperature at each coil and heating device. 5. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. 6. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.3 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. In addition, provide schematic wiring diagrams of each piece of equipment framed under glass and mounted on the wall as directed. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. M7:\INWAS 701Bills] V Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 15800 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems 15800 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 16010 — BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SCOPE A. The work included in Division 16 of the Specifications includes all electrical work, interior and exterior to the project. Provide all materials, labor, equipment, transportation, tools, permits, fees, and supervision to install, test and make operational the complete electrical systems. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide and install products in accordance with referenced standards. Comply with the standards listed in each section. B. Codes: The electrical work shall be in accordance with latest edition of the following codes: 1. National Electrical Code 2. National Electrical Safety Code 3. Life Safety Code 4. International Building Code 5. City of Lubbock Electrical Ordinance 6. State of Texas codes as applicable 7. National Fire Protection Association 8. Other codes as referenced in individual sections C. Material Standards: Materials and equipment shall be listed or labeled as defined in Article 100 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), by a testing agency acceptable to the Owner. Materials shall be marked for their intended use. D. Permits and Inspections: Obtain all permits and inspections for the installation of the work and pay all charges incident thereto. Deliver to the Owner all certificates of inspections issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for equipment as listed in each Section. B. Submittals shall include descriptive material, catalog sheets, diagrams, performance curves, and charts published by the manufacturer to show conformance with drawings and specifications. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Basic Electrical Requirements 16010 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Provide complete electrical characteristics for all equipment. Lighting submittals shall include photometric data. D. Submittals shall be clearly marked showing the individual item offered. E. All electrical submittals shall be bound in a book, indexed by specification section, and certified that they have been checked by the contractor. F. Omissions from the submittal of any material which has been shown on the drawings or specified, does not relieve the contractor from furnishing and installing the item. 1.5 WARRANTY A. The contractor warrants the material and equipment installed to be free from defects for a period of one year after acceptance by the owner. All defects in labor or materials occurring during this period shall be repaired or replaced. 2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical equipment specified and shown on the drawings is based on information available at the time of design. If the equipment furnished has different electrical requirements, the contractor shall make the required changes to the wire, conduit, controls, overcurrent protection, switchgear, and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the owner. The cost for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this Specification under which the equipment is furnished. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be UL labeled where a Standard exists for the product. If the product does not bear the UL label, the manufacturer shall submit documentation from an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, showing evidence that the product is suitable for the installation. B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products in current production of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. C. All materials shall be new and free from defects. Materials of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer. D. All material and equipment shall be installed, applied, and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and standards. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Basic Electrical Requirements 16010 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas E. Where no specific material is mentioned, provide the required material from a reputable manufacturer. The material shall conform to the project requirements, and shall be suitable to the engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fabricate, erect, and install the complete electrical systems in accordance with accepted good practice by qualified personnel who are licensed and experienced in such work. Proceed in an orderly manner so as not to impede the progress of the project. 3.2 DRAWINGS A. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Carefully coordinate the work with structural, architectural, and mechanical conditions. Make adjustments to avoid conflicts. B. The locations shown for electrical equipment is approximate and not intended to convey the exact details of installation. Exact locations are to be determined in the field by actual measurements. C. The contractor is responsible for fitting the equipment and material into the space. If the equipment furnished requires different space conditions than shown on the drawings, the contractor shall arrange for such space and shall submit a drawing indicating the exact details of installation prior to construction. D. Do not scale drawings. Layout electrical equipment using dimensions obtained from the manufacturer of the equipment and from field measurements. 3.3 SITE INVESTIGATION A. Prior to submitting bids, visit the site and become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project. Include in the bid the work required to remove, extend, relocate, reconnect or modify existing equipment or systems, and to restore them to their original condition. 3.4 MATERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Handle materials in accordance with the manufacturer's standards and recommendations. B. All materials, except those specifically designed to be installed outdoors, shall be stored in an enclosed, dry building or trailer. Protect all stored equipment from damage. Remove damaged materials from the premises. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Basic Electrical Requirements 16010 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment and materials. They shall be protected from water, direct sunlight, cold and heat unless designed for such conditions. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Sleeve or cut all openings in walls, floors, ceilings and roof required to install the electrical work. B. Do not cut structural members unless specific permission is granted by the structural engineer. C. Patch all openings after installation of the work, and repair any damage caused by this activity. Restore the surface to its original condition. 3.6 PAINTING A. Refer to PAINTING Section of these Specifications. B. Touchup scratched or marred surfaces of all electrical equipment with paint obtained from the equipment manufacturers specifically for that purpose. Remove all oil, dirt, grease and foreign material before painting and prepare the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where plywood backboards are used to mount equipment, paint backboards with two coats of light gray semi -gloss paint. 3.7 TESTING A. Provide all field-testing specified in the individual specification sections. 3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide record documents as required in Division 1 of the specifications. 3.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance manuals as required in Division 1 of the specifications. B. Before final inspection, instruct the owner's personnel in operation of the systems under this Division. Use the Operation and Maintenance Manual as basis for the instruction. Review the contents of the manual in detail and explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Prepare and insert additional data in the manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. END OF SECTION 16010 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Basic Electrical Requirements 16010 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 16110 —RACEWAYS PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all conduits and fittings. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install all conduits, wireways, raceways, and fittings for all systems interior and exterior to the building. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C-80.1 Rigid Galvanized Conduit C-80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 1 Flexible Metal Conduit UL 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings UL 6 Rigid Metal Conduit UL 651 Rigid PVC Conduit UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing UL 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit UL 360 Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) RN1 Externally PVC Coated GRS and IMC Conduit Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Raceways 16110 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Metal Conduit and Fittings: a. Allied b. Wheatland C. Appleton d. Raco e. Killark f. O-Z / Gedney 2. PVC Conduit and Fittings: a. Carlon b. Certainteed 3. PVC Coated Metal Conduit: a. Robroy Industries b. Levy 2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS): 1. Rigid, threaded, galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 1. Rigid, threaded, thin wall steel, galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Steel tubing, galvanized outside with slick corrosion resistant interior coating. 2. Steel set -screw couplings and connectors in dry locations. Steel compression couplings and box connectors in wet locations. D. Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips. Aluminum is not permitted. 2. Flexible conduit shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Raceways 16110 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas Connectors shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips with PVC cover extruded over the exterior to make the conduit liquidtight. 2. Shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity, liquidtight. 2.3 PVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. PVC conduit shall be Schedule 40 unless noted otherwise. B. Conduit fittings shall be the same material as the conduit supplied by the same manufacturer. 2.4 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. PVC coating shall be bonded to the galvanized outer surface of the conduit, minimum 20 mil thick. B. Couplings shall have PVC coating with PVC sleeve extending from both ends such that joining the coupling and conduit will cover all metal surfaces. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Perform all excavation work required in connection with the installation of the work under this Section. After the electrical work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all excavations with suitable material under the direction of the Architect. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets, and other pavement and repairing the openings in them to return the surface to approximately its original condition. B. Perform all excavations of every description of whatever substances encountered and to the depths required for installation of the work under this Division. C. During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all excavated material not required or suitable for backfill. Control grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations, and remove any water accumulating therein by pumping. D. Make trenches the necessary width for proper installation of the lines. E. Grade the bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for conduit or duct on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Raceways 16110 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas F. Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives or other existing pavement, cut the pavement as required. Hold the size of the cut to a minimum consistent with the work to be accomplished. After the installation of the new work is completed, and the excavation has been backfilled, patch the paving using materials to match those cut out. Take care that the patches are level with the original surfaces and thoroughly bond with them. 3.2 BACKFILLING A. Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, soft shale or other approved material free from large clods of earth deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6-inck layers. B. Do not use broken concrete or pavement as backfill material. C. Settling the backfill with water is permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. D. Re -open any trenches improperly filled or where settlement occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill, mound over and smooth off. E. Install continuous identification tape as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION. F. Backfill open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved as specified above except that the entire depth of trench shall be backfilled in 6-inch layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density of not less that 95% Standard Proctor in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value and permit paving the area immediately after backfilling as completed. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT A. Install at least 30 inches below finished grade unless noted to the contrary. Assemble and install raceways in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make joints with couplings and solvent cement. Fabricate bends of 30 degrees or more with factory -made elbows, or make field bends with proper heating equipment. Bends showing signs of overheating or flattening are unacceptable. Ream ends of all conduit before joining. B. "Snake" plastic conduit in trench, from side to side, with a complete cycle every 40 feet to allow for expansion and contraction. Maintain this configuration during backfilling. C. Where conduit turns up out of earth, or floor slabs, change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade and outside of such structures. Do not extend any plastic conduit above grade. Make similar change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit at connections to underground pull or junction boxes. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT A. All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Wrap such conduit with 3M Company 0.020-inch thick No. 51 "scotchrap" vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent, and clean Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Raceways 16110 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre -wrapped in the shop and then cut and joined on the job, wrap all joints on the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3" on both sides of joints. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PVC COATED CONDUITS A. During installation, visually examine the conduit for cuts. Patch these areas with a paste containing a PVC solvent obtained from the conduit manufacturer. The patch shall be built up to the original thickness of the coating and feathered out on all sides of the damaged area a minimum of 1/2 inch to provide a complete bonded seal over the damaged area. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits or electrical metallic tubing. Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried in earth shall be PVC or PVC coated rigid galvanized steel or wrapped rigid galvanized steel. C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all motors, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1" from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. F. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. G. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Raceways 16110 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas H. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire -resistive and installed to meet requirements of the UL Fire Resistance Directory. 3.7 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. C. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. 19101 061W1ZENIM25FolIto] Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Raceways 16110 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 16120 — WIRES AND CABLES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data sheets on all conductors and cables and wire. 1.3 SCOPE A. Under this Section, furnish and install all building wires and cables (600 volts and below) complete with connectors and terminations. Exterior branch circuits and feeders are also included in this section. Wiring for communication and alarm systems are included in their respective sections unless they reference this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products which comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) UL 44 Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 83 Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 486 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs UL 510 Insulating Tape PART 2 - PRODUCTS PA :TK4J91911I:11.110 NOT /:\ ell] Kxej1181:711:iy A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable. 1. Insulated Cable: a. Southwire Co. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Wires and Cables 16120 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas b. Senator Wire & Cable Co. C. Okonite d. Anaconda e. Pirelli Cable Co. 2. Electrical Spring Connectors: a. Scotch b. Ideal C. Buchanan 3. Compression Connectors: a. Burndy b. Scotch C. Ilsco 4. Mechanical Connectors: a. Burndy b. Scotch C. Ideal 5. Insulating Kits: a. Raychem b. Scotch 6. Insulating Tape: Scotch i►v416121 bills] 1161WI A. Type: Soft drawn copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, free from flaws and imperfections. Conductors no. 10 and smaller shall be solid. Conductors larger than no. 10 shall be stranded. B. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, otherwise specified in other Sections, or otherwise required by the National Electrical Code, conductors shall have type THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. C. High Temperatures: Use type RHH or RHW-2 for wiring in proximity to boilers and other devices subject to high temperatures. D. Markings: Conductors shall be marked on the surface with rated voltage, size, type, and manufacturer. The size shall be repeated at intervals not exceeding 24 inches, with the remaining data repeated at intervals not exceeding 40 inches. E. Performance: Conductors shall be electrically continuous and free from shorts or grounds. All open or shorted conductors shall be replaced. All conductors with damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced with new conductors free from defects. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Wires and Cables 16120 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas F. Conductors and cables installed open in ceiling plenums shall be plenum -rated. 2.3 JOINTS AND SPLICES A. Solid Conductors (No. 10 AWG and smaller): U.L. approved, screw -on, electrical spring connectors, 600 volt, 105C, insulated. B. Stranded Conductors (No. 8 and Larger): Crimp type compression connectors properly selected for the conductor size and material. All connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools as recommended by the manufacturer. Insulate the splice with an insulating kit providing 600 volt, 90C rating. 2.4 COLOR CODING A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. Grounding conductors from isolated grounding system shall be green with yellow stripes. 2. Equipment grounding conductors, no. 6 awg and smaller shall have continuous color - coding the entire length of the conductor. Sizes larger than no. 6 awg shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of green tape, or green adhesive labels. B. Neutral Conductors: 1. Neutral conductors shall be white or natural gray. 2. Where systems of different voltages are installed, the neutral of the lower voltage shall be white or natural gray, and the neutral of the higher voltage shall have three continuous white stripes on other than green insulation. 3. Sizes no. 6 awg, or smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of white tape or stripped tape or white adhesive labels. C. Phase Conductors: 1. Conductors no. 10 awg and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of colored tape, or colored adhesive labels. 2. The color -coding system employed shall be permanently posted on the inside door of each branch -circuit panelboard. The posting shall identify the color -coding of each phase conductor and shall be applied to the inside of the door with adhesive. 3. 120/240 volt, single phase system: Phase A — Black Phase B - Red Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Wires and Cables 16120 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING A. Install all wiring in raceways unless specified otherwise. B. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Use U.L. listed cable pulling compound where necessary. C. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. D. Wire Sizing: 1. No wire shall be smaller than no. 12, except for signal and control circuits, or lighting fixture taps. 2. Receptacle and motor branch circuits — Use no. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. 3. 120 volt, 20 amp lighting branch circuits — Where the length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use no. 10 conductors; otherwise use no. 12. 4. Where more than three current -carrying conductors are installed in the same conduit or raceway, the conductors shall be increased in size as required to maintain the required ampacity after application of the adjustment factors of NEC Table 310-15(b)(2)(a). E. Joints and Splices: 1. Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes, wiring troughs and other enclosures permitted by the NEC. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. 2. Do not splice conductors in panelboards, safety switches, switchboards, motor control centers or motor control enclosures. 3. Conductors for use with insulated spring connectors shall be twisted together prior to application of the connector. F. Terminations: Tighten electrical connections and terminations in accordance with the manufacturer's published values. A calibrated tool shall be used to insure proper torque values. G. Bundling: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets, pullboxes and the like using nylon straps made for this purpose. Bundle conductors larger than no. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. H. Identification: Refer to ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION. 1. Mark conductors to clearly identify each circuit by number. Securely attach to each conductor in each junction box, pull box, panelboard, etc. 2. The cover of each junction box and pullbox shall be marked with the designations of each circuit contained therein. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Wires and Cables 16120 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas Where colored plastic tape is applied to conductors for identification, use half -lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from the terminal points and in boxes where taps and splices are made. Apply the last two turns with no tension to prevent unwinding. Use f- inch wide tape applied to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Tests and procedures shall be in accordance with the applicable IPCEA standards. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing. Submit test data to the engineer on data sheets in a format that can be compared with future testing. All test data shall be included in the project operating manual. B. Test wires and cables for electrical continuity and short circuits. C. Prior to terminating, check each service and feeder conductor with megohmmeter to determine the insulation resistance with respect to ground and other phases. D. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturer's recommended values using calibrated torque wrench. E. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. END OF SECTION 16120 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Wires and Cables 16120 - 5 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 16130 —BOXES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data sheets for all boxes. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install electrical boxes in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) No. 514 Outlet boxes and fittings No. 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) No. OS 1 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports No. FB 1 Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies PART 2 — PRODUCTS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable. 1. Sheet Steel Outlet and Device Boxes: a. Raco b. Steel City Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Boxes 16130 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Appleton 2. Cast Metal Device Boxes: a. Crouse Hinds b. Appleton C. Pyle National 2.2 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. All boxes shall be UL listed. B. Sheet steel boxes shall be not lighter than 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication. C. Cast metal boxes shall be cast iron or cast alloy. D. Outlet boxes for switches, receptacles and communications use shall be 4" square with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. Box depth shall be as required by NEC for device and wiring volume requirements, but not smaller than 1-1/2 inches. E. Boxes for devices mounted flush in concrete block walls shall be single gang masonry boxes, 3- 1/2" deep. F. Boxes installed in poured concrete shall be concrete -tight type. G. Boxes for surface mounted or pendant fixtures shall be 4"octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth. H. Boxes for flush mounted fixtures shall be 4" by 4" size with cover installed above the ceiling and accessible by removing ceiling panel or fixture. Connection to fixture shall be with flexible conduit. I. Boxes for interior exposed work shall be cast metal boxes (Cast iron or cast alloy). J. Boxes for outdoors shall be cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. 2.3 PULLBOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet steel galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. B. Dimensions shall be as required by NEC for the number, size and locations of conduits entering the box. C. Boxes installed above ceilings shall be accessible by removing ceiling panels, installing access door in hard ceiling, or flush mounting the cover on the ceiling. D. Boxes installed flush in walls in finished areas shall have overlapping trim with hinged door and lock to match the appearance of electrical panelboard. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Boxes 16130 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas E. All boxes shall have covers. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. B. All pull and junction boxes shall be accessible after construction is complete. Install access panels in the construction as required to make the box accessible. C. Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. D. Where outlet box on grid ceiling supports surface or suspended fixture, provide box with fixture stud and secure the box to ceiling members with steel channel. E. Outlet boxes for devices shown back to back shall be offset a minimum of 6 inches. F. All boxes shall have covers and unused conduit openings shall be covered. END OF SECTION 16130 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Boxes 16130 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 16140 — WIRING DEVICES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all wiring devices. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated complete with coverplates. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices WD 6 Wiring Devices — Dimensional requirements 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 20 General -Use Snap Switches PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton 3. Pass & Seymour 4. General Electric 5. Bryant Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS Wiring Devices 16140 - 1 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.2 CLASSIFICATION A. All wiring devices shall be UL listed. B. All wiring devices shall be specification grade. 2.3 COLORS A. All devices shall have ivory finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors, and brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. 2.4 SWITCHES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish switches in colors specified above even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. 1. Single pole wall switch — 1221. 2. Three-way wall switch — 1223. 3. Four-way wall switch — 1224. 4. Pilot -lighted switch— 1221-PLC. 2.5 RECEPTACLES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish receptacles in colors specified even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. 1. Duplex receptacle: 20 amp, 125 volt, grounding (NEMA 5-20R) — No. 5362. 2. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacle (GFI) — No. GF-5362. 3. Special Receptacles: Furnish devices in the NEMA configuration listed on the drawings. 2.6 WEATHERPROOF DEVICES A. Provide the specified device in weatherproof cast box with gasketed coverplate. A. Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, including telephone, signal outlets and other devices. Coverplates shall be one piece single or multi -gang type as required. B. Indoor Flush Devices: 1. Type 302 stainless steel. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS Wiring Devices 16140 - 2 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Where installed in masonry walls, use jumbo plates. C. Indoor Surface Devices: For indoor devices use zinc -coated metal with rounded or beveled edges, same size as the box. D. Outdoor devices: TayMac PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring devices plumb and level. B. Install SPST wall switches with OFF position down. C. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. Install devices within outlet boxes to allow coverplates to be in full contact with the wall on all sides. F. Replace broken devices and plates with new. G. Clean all paint, plaster and dirt from wiring devices and plates. 3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. B. Devices noted to be installed above counters or millwork shall be installed above the backsplash. C. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by architect, install devices at the following heights above finished floor: DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHT Wall switch 46" Receptacle 18" Telephone outlet 18" Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Wiring Devices 16140 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. At each wiring device mark the inside of the coverplate with the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. Use black indelible marker. 3.4 FIELD TESTING A. Energize lighting circuits and operate each wall switch to verify proper operation. B. Energize receptacle circuits and test each receptacle with circuit tester to verify the device is energized and has correct polarity. C. Test TRIP and RESET buttons on GFI receptacles. In addition, test GFI receptacles with a GFI tester to verify it trips at 4ma of ground current. END OF SECTION 16140 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Wiring Devices 16140 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 16170 — GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all grounding equipment. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install grounding equipment and systems as specified herein. Also refer to, and comply with specific grounding requirements contained in other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Grounding Products: a. Chance / Hubbell b. Copperweld Corp C. Erico Inc. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS Grounding and Bonding 16170 - 1 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas d. Ideal Industries, Inc. e. ILSCO f. Kearney / Cooper Power Systems g. Lyncoln XIT Grounding h. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. i. Thomas and Betts j. Raco, Inc. k. Burndy 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Use insulated conductors that comply with WIRES AND CABLES Section. 2. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. 3. No. 6 AWG and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of conductor. Larger sizes shall be identified with color -coded plastic tape at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. For equipment grounding conductors use green tape. For isolated ground conductors use alternating bands of green and yellow tape with a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow. B. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Insulated stranded cable complying with WIRES AND CABLES Section. C. Underground Ground Conductors: Bare conductors installed underground shall be tinned, stranded complying with ASTM B8. D. Bonding Conductors: 1. Bonding cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of no. 17 AWG, copper. 2. Bonding Conductor: Bare stranded copper. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors terminated with copper ferrules. 2.3 GROUND RODS A. Ground rods shall be one-piece or sectional type, copper -clad steel, 3/4" in diameter by 10 feet long. 04E, �01:Z6111►104101►1►10" 1191:i.`! A. Compression Connectors: 1. Suitable for direct burial, embedded in concrete, or above grade applications, equal to Burndy Hyground. 2. Connectors shall be equivalent in current -carrying capacity to the maximum size copper conductors being joined. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Grounding and Bonding 16170 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas Equipment shall be in accordance with the connector manufacturers recommendation. This shall include cable preparation, installation tools and dies, and the required number of crimps. B. Bolted Connectors: 1. UL listed for grounding. 2. Above grade applications. 3. Provide equipment in accordance with connector manufacturers' recommendations for the application. C. Welded Connectors: 1. Exothermic -welded type, UL listed for grounding connections. 2. Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, conductors and other items to be connected. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICE GROUNDING A. Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in accordance with the NEC. B. Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a common point within the metallic enclosure containing the main service disconnecting means. From the common point of connection of the service ground and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined service and equipment grounding conductor (grounding electrode conductor) without joint or splice to the grounding electrode system. At each end point of connection, attach the metal conduit containing the grounding electrode conductor to the grounding electrode, or bond the grounding electrode conductor to its conduit as it exits the conduit with a fitting selected for this purpose. Separate bonding jumpers are not permitted for bonding the conduit to the electrode. 3.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Ground rods B. Water service line 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NEC are indicated. B. Install a separate, green -insulated, equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and each branch conduit. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with related phase and Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Grounding and Bonding 16170 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas neutral conductors, and connect to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect the grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and ground busses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. C. Install equipment grounding conductors in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. D. Install equipment grounding conductors in all flexible metal conduit and liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Ground Rods: 1. Install at least 3 rods spaced at least one rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from the other grounding electrodes. 2. Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Interconnect ground rods with no 2/0 bare, tinned, stranded copper 24" below grade. Attach with exothermic welds except at test wells. B. Metallic Water Service Pipe: 1. Clean contact surfaces thoroughly to assure good metal to metal contact. 2. Where a dielectric fitting occurs on the water main, connect the grounding conductor on the street side of the fitting. 3. Connect to the pipe with a grounding fitting designed to attach the grounding conductor and its conduit to the pipe. 3.5 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspection: 1. Visually verify proper grounding connections at the service entrance equipment. 2. Visually verify proper connections to the grounding electrode system. 3. Visually verify proper grounding connections at distribution panels and branch circuit panels. END OF SECTION 16170 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Grounding and Bonding 16170 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 16195 — ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide and install electrical identification for electrical conductors and equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Comply with UL Standard 969. C. Comply with ANSI C2. D. Comply with NEMA WC-1 and WC-2. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable. 1. W. H. Brady 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. Seton Nameplate Co. 4. Panduit Corp. 2.2 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates: 1. Melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16" thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches, and 1/8" thick for larger sizes. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Electrical Identification 16195 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. White letters on black face for equipment connected to normal power system. 3. Attach with self -tapping stainless -steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive can be used where screws can not or should not penetrate the surface. 2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color -Coded Plastic Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1-1 /2" wide. B. Identification Bands: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters to show circuit identification. 2.4 UNDERGROUND LINE WARNING TAPE A. Permanent, bright colored, continuous printed, vinyl tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend indication type of underground line. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical identification products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC and OSHA. B. For items attached with adhesive, degrease and clean the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where items attach to surfaces that require painting, attach after completion of painting. D. Install signs at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. E. Identification on Boxes: 1. Boxes for fire alarm circuits shall be painted red. 2. Every box containing circuit wiring shall have the circuit numbers marked on the outside cover of the junction box. Use indelible marker with wide tip. Markings for normal circuits shall be black, and shall be red for emergency circuits. 3.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. Apply conductor identification on each conductor in each box, enclosure, cabinet and panel. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Electrical Identification 16195 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Refer to Section 16120 for color -coding of conductors. 3.3 MARKING EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND LINES A. During trench backfilling for power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above the line at 12 to 16 inches below finished grade. 3.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install engraved, plastic laminate sign on each unit of electrical equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems unless the units contain their own self-explanatory identification. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with '/2" high lettering on 1-1 /2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required). C. Text shall match the notations used on the drawings for identification. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION OF PANELBOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS, AND SWITCHGEAR A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign containing 3 lines of text. The top line shall be the panel name. The centerline shall indicate the panel voltage, and the bottom line shall indicate the source of supply. B. Signs for equipment fed from the normal system shall have white letters on black background, and equipment fed from the emergency system shall have white letters on red background. C. An example of the required identifications is: Panel 4HA 277/480 Fed From Panel 4DP END OF SECTION 16195 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Electrical Identification 16195 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 16441 — SAFETY SWITCHES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short-circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal size. 5. Fuse rating and type. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all safety switches shown on the drawings or required by codes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Enclosures for electrical Equipment UL 98 Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Safety Switches 16441 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 2.2 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES A. Requirements: Provide and install safety switches as shown on the drawings or as required by NEC. Where code requires the installation of safety switches that are not shown on the drawings, provide and install the required switches. B. All switches shall be heavy-duty type. C. Switches shall be fusible or non -fusible as noted on the drawings or as required by codes. D. Provide switches with the voltage and current ratings as shown on the drawings. E. Where safety switches serve as motor or motor starter disconnects, provide horsepower rated switches with auxiliary contacts to disconnect all power and control circuits. F. Construction: 1. Switch blades and jaws shall be plated copper. 2. Switches shall have a handle that is easily padlockable in the OFF position. 3. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base. 5. Switches rated 100A to 600A shall have reinforced fuse clips. 6. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. 7. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick -make / quick -break type. 8. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. 9. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 10. Switches shall have CU/AL mechanical lugs. G. Enclosures: 1. Where installed indoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA I, general purpose type unless otherwise noted. 2. Where installed outdoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA 3R, raintight type unless otherwise noted. 3. Where noted on the drawings, provide the following enclosures: a. NEMA 4 — watertight (304 stainless steel). b. NEMA 12 — dust tight/oil tight. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Safety Switches 16441 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install safety switches in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and NEC requirements. B. Install adjacent disconnects at the same height. C. Install disconnects to maintain the required NEC clearances and working space. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install engraved plastic sign on each safety switch as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. The sign shall contain 3 lines of text. The top line shall identify the load served. The center line shall indicate the voltage. The third line shall indicate the source of supply. D. An example of the required identification is: AHU #2 480 V Fed From Panel PP 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each switch for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. 2. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 3. Verify fusible switches contain proper type and size of fuses. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each switch ON and OFF four times to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuit and verify proper operation. END OF SECTION 16441 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Safety Switches 16441 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short-circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal sizes. 5. Catalog product sheets. 6. Nameplate Identification. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all electrical panelboards shown on the drawings and specified herein. Panels shall be complete assemblies including enclosures, bussing, overcurrent protective devices, and trim. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes UL 67 Panelboards UL 489 Molded Case Breakers / Enclosures 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) PB-1 Panelboards No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment AB-1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Panelboards 16470 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 2.2 PANELBOARD REQUIREMENTS A. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. The building main panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment". C. Panels shall be arranged for flush mounting, surface mounting, or free-standing as indicated on the drawings. D. Panels shall have the voltage ratings, continuous current ratings, and interrupting ratings as scheduled on the drawings. E. All panelboard accessories and features scheduled or specified on the drawings shall be provided. F. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where the device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where the device is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. G. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip -free, thermal magnetic indicating type unless otherwise noted. H. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. I. Connect all overcurrent protective devices with sequence phasing. J. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a plastic covered cardholder on the inside of the panelboard door. K. Install laminated plastic nameplate for each panel as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Panelboards 16470 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Cabinets: 1. Rigidly constructed of galvanized sheet steel per UL 50 Standards. Corners shall be overlapped or welded with the edges turned over to receive trim. 2. Where two -section panels are required, both sections shall be same height, and have fully rated bussing in separate cabinets connected by conduit nipples. B. Trim: 1. Fabricated from sheet steel meeting the requirements of UL 50 Standards. Trim shall have medium gray enamel finish suitable to serve as the final finish, or suitable to receive field painting. 2. Trim door shall have rounded corners and edges free from burrs. 3. Surface trims shall be the same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box 3/4" on all sides. 4. Furnish each door with substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. Doors more than 48" high shall have auxiliary fasteners. Provide each lock with 2 keys. All locks shall be keyed alike. 5. Unless noted otherwise, interior mounted panels shall have type 1 fronts (one piece with hinged door). Where door -in -door construction is specified, it shall consist of a hinged door within a piano -hinged cover secured with trim clamps. 6. Exterior mounted panels shall be type 3R in accordance with UL 50 requirements. All doors shall be gasketed and be equipped with a tumbler type vault lock and two additional trunk type latches. C. Bussing: 1. All bussing shall be plated copper sized in accordance with UL Standards to limit temperature rise on any current -carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. 2. Main lugs and main breakers shall be UL approved for copper or aluminum conductors sized to accommodate the conductors to be terminated. Provide oversized lugs to terminate conductors that are increased in size due to voltage drop or temperature requirements. 3. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels. Where scheduled, an isolated ground bus shall also be included. 4. A full size (100%) neutral bar shall be furnished for panels shown with neutral. Neutrals shall have suitable lugs for each outgoing feeder requiring neutral connection. Where scheduled, provide 200% rated neutrals with lugs for oversized neutral conductors. P Adato]:IIl►[ef:V1D7:\99aGV[e1a7:112111 A. Bolt -in type, heavy duty, quick -make, quick -break, single- and multi -pole molded case circuit breakers with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped. B. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with common handle for all multiple pole breakers. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Panelboards 16470 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Breakers shall be UL listed as type SWD for lighting circuits. D. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights and fire alarm panels. E. Breakers shall be fully rated to interrupt the fault current values scheduled on the drawings. F. Provide breaker accessories as scheduled on the drawings. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, NEMA PB1.1 and NEC standards. B. Panelboard enclosures shall be securely fastened to the structure with a minimum of four bolts or screws. C. Clean dirt and foreign paint from exterior and interior of all panels. D. Do not splice conductors in panels. E. Conductors not terminating in panelboard shall not extend through or enter panel enclosure. F. A single conductor shall terminate in each lug on a circuit breaker. Do not terminate multiple conductors under a single lug. G. During installation carefully balance the electrical loads between the various phases. This may require connecting loads to circuits different from the circuit numbers indicated on the drawings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in panelboards as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install panelboard nameplate identification as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. Provide individual circuit identification for each circuit with a type -written directory of circuits mounted in a holder on the inside of the panel door. The directory shall identify the type or name of the load served along with the room names and numbers. The room names and numbers shall be the final names and numbers assigned to the space and not those used on the drawings. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Panelboards 16470 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each panel for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. 2. Visually inspect breakers and switches for broken parts and loose terminals. 3. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 4. Visually verify panelboard trim fits properly with no gaps between the trim and panel enclosure. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each breaker ON and OFF to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. 4. When the facility is under normal use, amperage measurements shall be taken on each phase conductor in each panel feeder, and any unbalances shall be corrected to a point that no conductor load shall be more than 5% high or low (maximum unbalance of 10%). END OF SECTION 16470 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Panelboards 16470 - 5 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 16510 —LIGHTING PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all lighting products. B. Submit complete photometric data for each fixture. 1.3 SCOPE A. This Section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete interior and exterior lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) No. 101 Life Safety Code 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C82.1 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts C82.4 HID Lamp Ballasts 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LE 4 Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 542 Lampholders, Starters for Fluorescent Lamps UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment UL 1029 HID Lamp Ballasts UL 1570 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures UL 1571 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures UL 1572 HID Lighting Fixtures Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Lighting 16510 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Ballasts: a. Advance b. Lutron C. General Electric d. Valmont 2. Lamps: a. Osram/Sylvania b. General Electric C. Philips 2.2 LUMINAIRES A. Provide and install a lighting fixture on each lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations scheduled on the drawings. Should any designation be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes of suffixes corresponding to the feature called for. 2.3 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Fixtures shall bear UL label. B. Lenses shall be 100% virgin acrylic with nominal thickness of 0.125 inches. 2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Use ballasts from manufacturers listed above. Generic ballasts from other manufacturers are not acceptable. B. General Requirements: 1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated for full light output. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10%. 3. Sound Rating: A 4. Power Factor: 95% minimum 5. Ballasts Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Lighting 16510 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: 1. CBM labeled 2. Encapsulated 3. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. D. Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Type: Electronic or electromagnet, fully encapsulated in potting compound. 2. Power Factor: 90% minimum. 3. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher 4. Flicker: Less than 5% 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7 E. Low -Temperature Ballasts: 1. Where installed in temperatures 0 Deg F and above, ballasts shall be electronic -type with 0 deg F starting temperature. 2. Where installed in temperatures minus 20 deg F to 0 deg F, ballasts shall be electromagnetic type designed for use with high output lamps. 2.5 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Color Temperature: 3500 K 2. CRI: 78 or higher 3. Lamp types as scheduled on the drawings. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached. B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's layout for exact location. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. C. Fixtures in Plaster Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster ceiling. D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Lighting 16510 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. E. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. END OF SECTION 16510 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECTS 7 March 2014 Lighting 16510 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 312000 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of earthwork is shown on Drawings. B. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs and walks is included as part of this work. C. Backfilling of trenches within building lines is included as part of this work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service 1. Employ, at Contractor's expense, testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations. The testing laboratory shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil or Rock Used In Engineering Design and Construction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Submit following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copies to Contractor and Engineer. 1. Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of soil encountered. a. Atterberg Limits b. Linear Shrinkage C. Optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve 2. Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills. Reports shall indicate soil type or change of soil if any other is used. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Site Information 1. A subsurface soils investigation at the site has not been performed. Test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Earthwork 312000 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. C. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted. D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. 1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, SM, SW and SP. B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and PT. C. Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of clay lumps, stones and debris. D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil on -site materials or imported select fill materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. Fill materials shall have a liquid limit less than 35 and the plasticity index shall be from 4 to 15. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing required finish grade elevations. B. Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock excavation or unauthorized excavation. C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Earthwork 312000 - 2 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas D. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Architect. E. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. F. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect who will make an inspection of conditions. 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. G. Stability of Excavations 1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. H. Shoring and Bracing 1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross -braces, in good serviceable condition. 2. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. K. Excavation for Structures Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Earthwork 312000 - 3 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction and for inspection. 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. L. Excavation for Trenches 1. Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups. 3. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. 4. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe. 5. Backfill trenches with lean concrete where trench excavations pass within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footings. 6. Concrete is specified in Division 3. 7. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. M. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F. (1 degree C.) 3.2 COMPACTION A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification. B. Percentage of Minimum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor) at 2% above to 1% below optimum moisture content; and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship. 1. Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 2. Building Slabs and Steps: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 3. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum dry density. 4. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density for cohesive soil material. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Earthwork 312000 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. 2. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 3.3 BACKFILL AND FILL A. General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area classification listed below. 1. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 2. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 3. Under walks and steps use satisfactory excavated or borrow material or combination of both. 4. Under building slabs, use satisfactory borrow material. B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing and perimeter insulation. 2. Inspection, testing, approval and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of trash and debris. C. Ground Surface Preparation 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip or break-up so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture content and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. D. Placement and Compaction 1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. 2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen or contain frost or ice. 3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Earthwork 312000 - 5 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.4 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. C. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes and as follows: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. D. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of !/2" when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. E. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control Testing During Construction 1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. 2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (Sand Cone Method) or ASTM D2167 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D2922, (Nuclear Gage Method) as applicable. B. Building Slab Subgrade 1. Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested and approved by the testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer. C. If, in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense to the Owner. 3.6 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified tolerances. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Earthwork 312000 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re -shape and compact to required density prior to further construction. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Removal from Owner's Property 1. Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash and debris and dispose of it off Owner's property. 2. END OF SECTION 312000 This Section prepared by Thoma Engineering, Inc. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Earthwork 312000 - 7 7 March 2014 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 312324 - CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH BACKFILL MATERIAL (CLSM) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CLSM MIX SUBMITTAL: A. A minimum of 2 days prior to starting CLSM work, CLSM mix designs shall be submitted for approval. No changes shall be made in the amounts or sources of the approved mix ingredients without written approval. Production inspection and field testing ofthe approved mix may be made by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS: A. Cement - All cement used shall be Type I or II portland cement which shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 150. B. Fly Ash - The fly ash, if used, shall conform to ASTM C 618. Fly ash may be either Class C or Class F. 2.2 AGGREGATES: A. Fine Aggregates - All fine aggregate shall conform to the grading and quality requirements of ASTM C 33. B. Coarse Aggregates - Coarse aggregate shall conform to the grading and quality requirements of ASTM C 33 for Size No. 467, No. 57, or No. 67. 2.3 WATER: A. The batch mixing water and mixer washout water shall conform to the requirements ASTM C 94. 2.4 ADMIXTURES: A. Chemical admixtures which do not contain calcium chloride and which conform to ASTM C 494 for concrete may be used in the CLSM mix. All chemical admixtures shall be compatible with the cement and all other admixtures in the batch. PART 3 - CLSM PROPORTIONS 3.1 CLSM shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 100 psi and a maximum 28 day compressive strength of 200 psi when molded and cured as in compliance with ASTM D 4832. 3.2 All CLSM shall be air entrained to a total air content of approximately 5%. The minimum slump shall be 6 inches and the maximum slump shall be 8 inches as when tested in accordance with ASTM C 143. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Controlled Low Strength Backfill Material 312324 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.3 Fine aggregates shall be between 50% and 60% by volume of the total aggregates in the CLSM mix. END OF SECTION This Section prepared by Thoma Engineering, Inc. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Controlled Low Strength Backfill Material 312324 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Soil treatment and accessories for complete application 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of termite control product. C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's records and include the following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located to install manufacturer's products and who is accredited by manufacturer. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites for 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re- treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: EPA -Registered termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare work areas according to the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and according to manufacturer's written instructions before beginning application and installation of termite control treatment(s). Remove extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials, such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Termite Control 313116 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 3.3 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Distribute treatment uniformly. Apply treatment at the product's EPA -Registered Label volume and rate for maximum specified concentration of termiticide to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. 1. Slabs -on -Grade and Basement Slabs: Underground -supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Soil adjacent to and along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. 3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas, including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. 4. Masonry: Treat voids. 5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs and below -grade walls will be penetrated. B. Post warning signs in areas of application. C. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. B. Protect termiticide solution dispersed in treated soils and fills from being diluted by exposure to water spillage or weather until ground -supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. END OF SECTION 313116 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Termite Control 313116 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of asphalt concrete paving is shown on the Drawings. General work for fill and sub -grade is specified under Section 312000, Earthwork. Final shaping, filling and compaction of paving sub -grade is specified under this heading. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor will provide material and compaction testing services. Tests shall be as directed by Architect. B. Submit 2 copies of a listing identifying the types and sources of materials proposed for the work. No paving shall be started until all materials and methods have been approved by Architect. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials and methods shall be according to Texas Department of Transportation, 1993 Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges. B. Flexible Base (Caliche) - Grading Item 247, Type A, Grade 2. 1. The material shall be obtained from approved sources. It shall consist of crushed caliche (argillaceous limestone, calcareous clay particles with or without stone, conglomerate, gravel, sand or other granular materials). Where the local material for the base course contains some hard limestone, such material must be crushed and graded to comply with gradation requirements as outlined below. The processed material, when properly slaked and tested by standard laboratory methods, shall meet the following requirements: a. Retained on 2'/z" sieve .............................................. 0% b. Retained on 11/4" sieve .......................................... 0 - 10% C. Retained on No. 4 sieve ......................................... 45 - 75% d. Retained on No. 40 sieve ....................................... 60 - 85% e. Maximum increase in passing No. 40.................................. 20% 2. The material passing the 40-mesh sieve shall be known as "soil binder" and shall meet the following requirements: a. The liquid limit shall not exceed 40 b. The plasticity index shall not exceed 12 C. Wet Ball Mill - Maximum 45 Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Asphalt Paving 321216 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Prime Coat: Asphalt shall be MC asphalt meeting Texas Department of Transportation specifications. Apply 0.25 gallons per square yard. D. Hot -Mix Asphaltic Concrete - Grading Item 340, Type D (For fine surface) 1. A surface course composed of a mixture of mineral aggregates and asphaltic material shall be placed on the primed base. The mixture when designed and tested in accordance with these specifications and methods outlined in the TxDOT Bulletin C-14, shall have an optimum laboratory density of 97% and a stability of not less than 30%. 2. The coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, tough, durable fragments of stone, crushed gravel, gravel or combinations thereof and be retained on a No. 10 sieve. It shall contain not more than 1 percent, by weight, of organic matter, clays, loam or pebbles coated therewith and shall have an abrasion of not more than 40 percent loss by weight. 3. The fine aggregate shall consist of sand, screenings, or a combination of both, and will pass the No. 10 sieve. Sand shall be composed of durable stone particles free from injurious foreign matter. Screening shall be of the same or similar material as specified for coarse aggregate. The plasticity index of that part of the fine aggregate passing the No. 40 sieve shall be no more than six (6). 4. Asphalt for the paving mixture shall be of the type and grade of oil asphalt as determined by design tests. The asphaltic material for the tack coat shall be cut -back asphalt, RC-2. 5. The paving mixtures shall consist of a uniform mixture of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate and asphaltic material. The grading of each constituent of the mineral aggregate shall be such as to produce, when properly proportioned, a mixture which will conform to the grading specified hereafter. 6. Fine Graded Surface Course (TxDOT - Type D): a. Passing''/z" sieve ................................................. 100% b. Passing 3/8" sieve ............................................. 85 to 100% C. Passing No. 4 sieve ............................................ 50 to 70% d. Passing No. 10 sieve ........................................... 32 to 42% e. Passing No. 40 sieve ........................................... 11 to 26% f. Passing No. 80 sieve ............................................ 4 to 14% g. Passing No. 200 sieve .......................................... **1 to 6% h. VMA% Minimum ................................................. 14% ** 2-8% when Test Method Tex-200-17, Part II (washed sieve analysis) is used. E. Traffic Markings: Paint shall be a chlorinated rubber base traffic paint, factory mixed, quick drying with FS-TT-P-115, Type III or approved equal. The color shall be yellow or white, as directed by the Architect. F. Concrete Wheel Stops: Wheel stops shall be equal to Heavy Duty Parking Blocks as manufactured by Vaughn Concrete Products. Concrete to be hardrock of 4,000 psi minimum 28 day strength and a 6% entrained air content. Furnish complete with two 5/8" diameter x 18" long steel stakes for each wheel stop. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Asphalt Paving 321216 - 2 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUB -GRADE PREPARATION A. Subgrade preparation will consist of all grading work necessary to bring the subgrade to the lines, grades and typical cross-section shown on the Plans. It will also consist of removing all obstructions encountered in the subgrade area. B. All areas to be paved shall be excavated or filled and shaped in conformity with the typical sections shown on the Plans and to the lines and grades established in the field. Special care shall be exercised in grading street intersections where valley gutters occur so that the profiles will present a smooth surface. All unstable or otherwise objectionable material shall be removed from the subgrade and replaced with approved material. After all excavation and fill is completed and before placement of flexible base, the subgrade shall be shaped to conform to the established lines and grades and typical cross sections, wetted and rolled to secure a smooth, firm foundation for the pavement. 3.2 FLEXIBLE BASE A. Description: This item shall consist of a foundation course for surface or other base courses; shall be composed of caliche and gravel materials; and shall be constructed as herein specified in one or more courses in conformity with the typical sections and to the lines and grades established on the job. B. Before placing the first course of base material, the subgrade shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches for the full width of the base. After scarifying this layer, it shall be compacted by means of wetting, rolling and blading until a density of 95% of the maximum is obtained as prescribed under DENSITIES of these specifications. Subgrade shall then be shaped to conform to the typical section, lines and grades as shown on the Plans and as established in the field. Compacted base course shall be a minimum of 6" thick. C. All unstable or otherwise objectionable material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable material. Any deviation from established line, grade or typical section in excess of'h" as shown by straightedge or template when placed as directed, shall be corrected by removing material, reshaping and compacting by sprinkling and rolling. The subgrade preparation operation may be done at the time the grading operation is completed. D. Material deposited on subgrade shall be spread and shaped the same day. In the event inclement weather prevents spreading of the material during the first 24 hours, it shall be scarified and spread as directed by the Architect. E. All areas and "nests" of segregated course or fine material shall be corrected or removed and replaced with well graded material. If additional "Binder" is considered necessary or desirable after the material is spread and shaped, it shall be furnished and applied in the amount directed. Such binder materials shall be carefully and evenly incorporated with the material in place by scarifying, harrowing, brooming or by other approved methods. The course shall then be sprinkled as required Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Asphalt Paving 321216 - 3 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas and rolled, as directed until a uniform compaction is secured. Throughout this entire operation, the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading and the surface upon completion shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical sections shown on the Plans and spots which develop shall be corrected immediately by scarifying the areas affected adding suitable material as required, re- shaping and re -compacting by sprinkling and rolling. F. Rolling of base course shall be carried on by the operation of approved pneumatic tire rollers or ten ton rollers or a combination of the two. 3.3 ROLLING EQUIPMENT A. Pneumatic tire rollers shall consist ofnot less than nine pneumatic -tired wheels running on two axles in such manner that the rear group of tires will not follow in the tracks of the forward group and shall be mounted in rigid frame and provided with a loading platform or body suitable for ballast loading. The front axle shall rotate around a king pin so located that the roller may be turned in a minimum circle. Under working conditions, it shall have an effective rolling width of 60 inches and shall give a minimum compression of three hundred and twenty-five (325) pounds per inch of tire tread. The pneumatic tire roller shall be driven by either a crawler type tractor or a pneumatic tire tractor and the roller, when drawn by either type, shall be considered a pneumatic tire roller unit. A self-propelled pneumatic tire roller is acceptable. B. Ten (10) ton roller shall be the three -wheel, self-propelled type, weighing not less than ten (10) tons and shall provide a compression of the rear inch of tire width. The rear wheels shall be flat and shall have a diameter of not less than forty-eight (48) inches, and each shall have a tire width of not less than twenty (20) inches. 3.4 ROLLING METHODS A. Pneumatic tire roller work shall be done as required to compact the base. The embankment layer of the base course shall be sprinkled if directed and rolling with a pneumatic tire roller shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed towards the center and overlapped successive trips by at least one-half (%2) the width of the rear wheels of the power roller. On super -elevated curves, rolling shall begin at the low sides and progress toward the high sides. Alternate trips of the roller shall continue until the base is finished off. The rollers, unless otherwise directed, shall be operated at a speed between two (2) and three (3) miles per hour. B. Ten (10) ton roller work shall be done as required to compact and finish the base. The embankment layer or the base course shall be sprinkled if directed and rolling with a power roller shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed towards the center. Overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half (1/2) of the width of the rear wheels of the power roller. On super elevated curves, rolling shall begin at the low sides and progress toward the high sides. Alternate trips of the roller shall continue until the base is finished off. The rollers, unless otherwise directed, shall be operated at a speed between two (2) and three (3) miles per hour. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Asphalt Paving 321216 - 4 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.5 DENSITIES A. It is the purpose of these specifications for the compacted subgrade and flexible base to be compacted to a minimum of 95% of AASHTO T 180 density near optimum moisture content. This density is to be obtained in the top six inches of the subgrade and in the entire thickness of the base course. 3.6 PRIME COAT A. This item shall include furnishing all material, equipment, labor and whatever else maybe necessary for applying a prime coat to the flexible base. B. When the base is finished and thoroughly dry and is satisfactory to receive the prime coat, the surface shall be cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods until all loose material is removed. If necessary, the base shall be lightly sprinkled just prior to the application of the asphalt. The asphaltic material shall then be applied to the cleaned base at the approximate rate of 0.25 gallons per square yard of surface area. The application shall be made with an approved type of self propelled pressure distributor so constructed and operated as to distribute the material evenly and smoothly in the quantity specified or directed. Cut -back asphalt shall be applied at a temperature between 125 degrees F. and 175 degrees F. C. Prime coat shall not be applied when the wind velocity is likely to cause vaporized asphalt to drift onto buildings, adjacent concrete work or other objects subject to damage by such overspray. D. Prior to placement of prime and tack coats, cover curbs and gutters with kraft paper and weight with sand to prevent displacement until such coats are completed. In the event that penetration type paving is called for, paper shall remain in place until the finish course has been applied and rolled. E. No traffic or hauling on the prime coat shall be permitted until the asphalt is dry enough so as not to track or pick up. 3.7 HOT -MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE A. This item shall include furnishing all material, equipment, labor and whatever else maybe necessary for placing a hot -mix asphaltic concrete pavement on an approved primed base. The wearing surface shall be completed in accordance with these specifications. B. The surface upon which the asphaltic mixture is to be placed, shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, soil and foreign matter. A tack coat of 0.08 gallons per square yard of RC-2 shall be placed uniformly on the cleaned surface. No tack coat or asphaltic mixture shall be placed when the air temperature is below 50 degrees F. and falling. C. All the asphaltic mixture shall be hauled to the site in tight vehicles which have been previously cleaned and oiled. The dispatching of the vehicles shall be so that all material delivered can be placed and rolled during daylight. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Asphalt Paving 321216 - 5 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas D. All contact surfaces of curbs, gutters and valley gutters and all joints shall be painted with a thin, uniform coating of the tack coat material prior to placing the asphaltic mixture. Generally, the asphaltic mixture shall be placed with a finishing machine on the prepared base at the rate of 150 pounds per square yard. Spreading by hand maybe necessary in areas not accessible to the finishing machine. In either case, the mixture shall be placed in such manner that when properly compacted, the finished surface shall be smooth, of uniform density, and will drain. The asphalt paving shall be compacted to a density, 96% of the lab density of molded sample. One field density test shall be taken for each area of 5,000 square feet or less. The finished thickness shall not be less than two (2 ) inches thick. E. Care shall be taken to prevent splattering of adjacent construction during the application of the asphaltic material. F. The material shall be compressed thoroughly and uniformly by rolling with three -wheel and tandem rollers. Rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the section, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width of the rear wheels. Rolling shall be continued until no further compression can be obtained and all roller marks are eliminated from the surface. All small places not accessible to the roller shall be thoroughly compacted with lightly oiled hand tamps. 3.8 TRAFFIC MARKINGS A. Apply markings according to a layout approved by Architect. Lines shall be applied in 2 coats by means of mechanical marking equipment. Lines shall be straight, at proper angle and of uniform width. 3.9 PRECAUTIONS A. Do not lay paving in inclement weather or when the ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. All paving shall be free from defects such as cracks, spalls, thin spots, soft spots, porous area, slick area, roller markings, vehicular traffic markings. C. Also curbs, gutters, walks and walls ofbuildings, etc., shall be free of asphalt over spray. Also these items shall not be cracked, chipped or marked by heavy equipment used in paving operations. 3.10 CLEANING A. Remove from site all rubbish and wasted paving materials. Leave site in a good, clean and neat condition. 3.11 INSPECTION A. If any defects develop, or if materials and/or compaction tests fail to meet standards, the paving Contractor shall correct, tear out and replace or take other measures as directed by Architect to put pavement in first-class condition, both in appearance and for utility. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Asphalt Paving 321216 - 6 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Care shall be taken to prevent splattering of adjacent construction during the application of the asphaltic material. C. The material shall be compressed thoroughly and uniformly by rolling with three -wheel and tandem rollers. Rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the section, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width of the rear wheels. Rolling shall be continued until no further compression can be obtained and all roller marks are eliminated from the surface. All small places not accessible to the roller shall be thoroughly compacted with lightly oiled hand tamps. END OF SECTION 321216 This Section prepared by Thoma Engineering, Inc. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Asphalt Paving 321216 - 7 7 March 2014 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 321613 - CONCRETE CURBS AND WALKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of concrete curbs and walks is shown on the Drawings. B. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 033000, Concrete Work, for materials, testing, mixing, placing and curing, except as herein specified otherwise. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Forms: 1. Either steel or wood, of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use forms that are straight and free of distortion and defects. Bent, twisted, split or defective form materials are not permitted. 2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. 3. Coat forms with a non -staining, clear, paraffin base form oil that will not discolor or otherwise deface the surface of the concrete. B. Concrete: Comply with applicable requirement of Section 033000 Concrete Work for concrete materials. Concrete mix shall not be the same as used for building slabs and foundations. Exterior concrete shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days and shall contain five (5) sacks (470 lbs.) of cement per cubic yard of concrete, 6 percent plus or minus 1 percent of entrained air, coarse aggregate 1" or smaller and shall be poured with a slump of 5" plus or minus ill. C. Expansion Joints: Pre -molded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, '/2" thickness by depth of slab. At curbs and gutters, furnish special section to meet local curb and gutter specifications. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Concrete Curbs and Gutters 321613 - 1 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove all loose material from the uniformly compacted subgrade surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Set forms to the required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient lengths of forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Tops of walks shall slope at least 1/8" per foot. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances: 1. Top of form units: Not more than in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face: Longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4" in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form oil as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 033000 Concrete Work for mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specified. 2. Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subgrade as required to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they have been brought to the required grade and alignment. 3. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of the mix and with as little re- handling as possible. Consolidate concrete along the face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels and joint devices. Do not over vibrate. 4. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/z hour, place a construction joint. Sections less than 15 feet in length between transverse joints will not be permitted. Remove such sections if directed by the Architect. B. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be used for curbs and gutter placement at Contractor's option, if acceptable to the Architect. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results which meet or exceed the minimums herein specified. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to the required cross-section, lines, grades, finish and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Concrete Curbs and Gutters 321613 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct expansion, weakened -plane (contraction), and construction joints true -to -line with face perpendicular to surface of the concrete, unless otherwise shown. Construct transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise shown. B. Weakened -Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened -plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas, as shown on the Drawings. Construct weakened -plane j oints for a depth equal to at least '/4 concrete thickness. C. Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. D. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at the end of all pours and at locations where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than '/2 hour, except where such pour terminates at expansion joints. 1. Construct joints as shown, or if not shown, use standard metal keyway section forms. E. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded j oint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks and other fixed objects. 1. Expansion joints shall be at 20 feet o.c., unless otherwise shown. 2. Extend joint fillers full -width and depth of joint and not less than or more than 1" below finished surface. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for the full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. Form top edge of filler to conform to top profile of concrete. 3. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after both sides of joint are placed. 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Finishes: Unless indicated otherwise, items of concrete to be finished as follows: 1. All sidewalks, concrete aprons and porches shall have float finish, brushed as directed to provide non -slip finish. 2. Curbs and gutters shall be finished with a stiff -bristled broom to provide non -slip finish. Provide sample for approval. B. The following finishing procedures shall be observed: 1. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface by screeding and floating. Do not use "jitterbugs". Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust the floating to compact the surface and produce a uniform texture. 2. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous, smooth finish. 3. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb and formed j oints with an edging tool and round to '/2" radius, unless otherwise shown. Eliminate any tool marks on concrete surface. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 Concrete Curbs and Gutters 321613 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 4. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing as follows: a. Broom Finish: Broom finish, by drawing a fine broom across concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to the Architect. b. On inclining slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with a stiff -bristled broom. 3.6 CURING A. Protect and cure finished concrete walks, curbs and gutters and paving, complying with the applicable requirements of Section 033000 Concrete Work. Use moist -curing methods whenever possible for first 24 hours, then apply curing compound. 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory walk areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with polysulphide-epoxy binder or with polysulphide resin grout, complying with FS MMM-G-65013 CANC. C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain walks as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Sweep concrete walks free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. END OF SECTION 321613 This Section prepared by Thoma Engineering, Inc. Mary K Crites, AIA - ARCHITECT Concrete Curbs and Gutters 321613 - 4 7 March 2014 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 323223 - SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK A. Earthwork: Section 310000. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. This work shall consist of providing the Segmental Retaining Wall System in accordance with these specifications and with the design, lines, grades, and dimensions shown on the contract drawings. B. Contract Drawings show a Segmental Retaining Wall designed and stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state off wall installation. If the wall is constructed as shown, a design submittal is not required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Placement of the wall units shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Submit a list of previous projects totaling a minimum of five (5) projects of similar scope where the specific retaining wall system has been constructed successfully. Contact names and telephone numbers shall be listed for each prof ect. C. If the block type is changed, or any other changes are made to the segmental retaining wall shown on the Contract Drawings the contractor shall submit, for review and approval, a complete set of design calculations, specifications and drawings prepared and sealed by a Texas licensed professional engineer experienced in the design of segmental type retaining walls. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Interlocking Concrete Wall Unit Manufacturer's Catalog Sheets and installation instructions. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Check the materials upon delivery to assure that the specified products have been received. B. Prevent excessive mud, wet concrete, epoxies, and like materials, which may affix themselves to the retaining wall material. C. Protect the materials from damage. Damaged material will not be allowed for use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLEMANUFACTURERS A. Anchor Wall Systems or approved equal. 2.2 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL UNITS A. Anchor "Aspen Stone Retaining Wall Units" 2.3 LEVELING PAD A. Material for leveling pad shall consist of one of the following: 1. Subbase Course Type 2. 2. Item B-12. 3. Un-reinforced concrete footing 6 inches in depth. 2.4 DRAINAGE AGGREGATE A. Drainage aggregate: Clean crushed stone or granular fill meeting the following gradation as determined in accordance with ASTM D448: Sieve Size Percent Passine Mary K Crites, AIA — Architect 7 March 2014 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1 inch 100 3/4 inch 75 to 100 No. 4 0 to 60 No. 40 0 to 50 No. 200 0 to 5 B. Extend the drainage aggregate layer a lateral distance of one (1) foot beyond the wall's back, and extend to a height that is 8 inches below the finished grade. C. Backfill: Soil free of organics and debris and consisting of either GP, GW, SP, SW or SM type, classified in accordance with ASTM D2487 and the USCS classification system. 1. Soils classified as SC and CL are considered suitable soils for segmental retaining walls with a total height of less than 15 feet unless the Plasticity Index (PI) is 20 or more. 2. Maximum particle size for Backfill is 1 inch. 3. Unsuitable soils are organic soils and those soils classified as CH, OH, MH, OL, or PT. 2.5 DRAINAGE PIPE A. Perforated or slotted PVC or corrugated HDPE pipe manufactured in accordance with D3034 and/or ASTM F405. B. The pipe may be covered with a geotextile filter fabric to function as a filter. 2.6 CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVE A. Exterior grade adhesive as recommended by the retaining wall unit manufacturer. 2.7 REINFORCED BACKFILL A. Reinforced Backfill Material: Selected Fill Material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Prior to the performance of any excavations, the alignment of the wall shall be staked and offset stakes set by a land surveyor. B. Verify location of existing structures and utilities prior to excavation. Ensure all surrounding structures are protected from the effects of wall excavation. C. Excavate to the lines and grades shown on the project grading plans. Take precautions to minimize over -excavation. D. The Owner's Representative will inspect the excavation and approve prior to constructing the wall's leveling pad. E. Over -excavation not approved by the Owner (or Owner's Representative) will not be paid for by the Owner. F. Over -excavated areas in front of wall face shall be filled with compacted Selected Fill material, unless directed otherwise. Replacement of these soils with compacted fill and/or wall system components will be required at the Contractor's expense. Use care in excavating to prevent disturbance of the base beyond the lines shown. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION OF BASE LEVELING PAD A. Extend the leveling pad laterally at least a distance of 6 inches beyond the perimeter of the lowest wall unit. B. Place leveling pad to the lines and grades shown on the Contract Drawings. C. Compact leveling pad in accordance with the 90 percent density specification for Subbase Course Type 2 or Item B-12. If using an un-reinforced concrete leveling pad allow the concrete to fully cure. D. Prepare leveling pad to ensure full contact with the base surface of the segmental units. Mary K Crites, AIA — Architect 7 March 2014 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.3 RETAINING WALL UNIT INSTALLATION A. Place first course of wall units on the leveling pad, align and level. Level units side - to -side, front -to -rear and with adjacent units. This course is the most important to ensure accurate and acceptable results, and shall be approved by the Owner's Representative prior to placement of additional courses. B. Ensure that units are in full contact with the leveling pad. Take care to develop straight lines on base course as per all layouts. C. Position vertically adjacent concrete units as recommended by the manufacturer. Clean all excess debris from top of units prior to the installation of the next course. D. Insert two connection pins for each unit through pin holes of the upper course units. Fully seat pins in the pin slots below. Push units forward to remove any looseness in the unit -to -unit connection and then check alignment. Check level of the units. E. Repeat procedures to the extent of the wall height, ensuring that pins are engaged in each successive course. F. Place drainage aggregate and backfill soil after every two courses of wall units are set. G. Glue cap units to underlying units with an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer. 3.4 PLACEMENT OF BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in lifts not exceeding eight (8) inches. Compact each lift in accordance with the 95 percent density specification. B. Use only lightweight hand -operated equipment within 3 feet from the backside of the concrete units. C. At the end of each day's operation, slope the last lift of reinforced backfill away from the wall units to direct runoff away from the constructed portion of the wall. 3.5 CONSTRUCTION MONITORING A. Construct walls and perform compaction testing only when monitored or witnessed by the Owner's Representative or Landscape Architect. END OF SECTION Mary K Crites, AIA — Architect 7 March 2014 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223 - 3 No Text Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 329115 - SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes planting soils specified according to performance requirements of the mixes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for placing planting soil for turf and grasses. 3. Section 329300 "Plants" for placing planting soil for plantings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials. B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. This can be amended or unamended soil as indicated. C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity. D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the point that it is beneficial to plant growth. E. Duff Layer: A surface layer of soil, typical of forested areas, that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. F. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use. G. Layered Soil Assembly: A designed series of planting soils, layered on each other, that together produce an environment for plant growth. H. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil amendments, and other materials to produce planting soil. 1. NAPT: North American Proficiency Testing Program. An SSSA program to assist soil-, plant-, and water -testing laboratories through interlaboratory sample exchanges and statistical evaluation of analytical data. J. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of undecayed plant and animal tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called "humus" or "soil organic matter." K. Planting Soil: Existing, on -site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. L. RCRA Metals: Hazardous metals identified by the EPA under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. M. SSSA: Soil Science Society of America. N. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. O. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms. P. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. Q. USCC: U.S. Composting Council. R. USDA NOP: US Department of Agriculture National Organic Program 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at City of Lubbock Parks Department. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 4 February 2014 SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Include recommendations for application and use. 2. Material Certificates: For each type of imported soil and soil amendment before delivery to the site, according to the following: a. Analysis of nonstandard materials, by a qualified testing agency, made according to SSSA methods, where applicable. b. Organic Designation and Standards: products shall be approved by the USDA NOP (National Organic Program). B. Samples: For each bulk -supplied material, 1-pint volume of each in sealed containers labeled with content, source, and date obtained. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of composition, color, and texture. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control reports. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. No Soil Testing is required for this project. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable. B. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil -bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet or frozen. 4. Accompany each delivery of soil amendments with appropriate certificates. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Mycorrhizal products, humic substance products, and organic nitrogen products will be used to instigate the natural biochemical process required for healthy soils. Manufacturer: Soil Secrets, LLC., Local Representative: Soil Secrets of Texas, Bob Mattson (806) 549-6585 2.2 PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED ACCORDING TO PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Planting -Soil Type: Existing, on -site surface soil, with the duff layer, if any, retained; and stockpiled on -site; modified to produce viable planting soil. Using materials specified in other articles of this Section, amend existing, on -site surface soil. a. Unsuitable Materials: Stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand that exceed a combined maximum of 5 percent by dry weight of the prepared planting soil. b. Large Materials: Remove Stones, clods, roots, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand exceeding 1 inch in any dimension. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Place planting soil according to requirements in other Specification Sections. B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting soil. C. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 4 February 2014 SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.2 PREPARATION OF UNAMENDED, ON -SITE SOIL BEFORE AMENDING A. Excavation: Excavate soil from designated area(s) to a depth of 6 inches stockpile until amended. B. Unacceptable Materials: Clean soil of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth. C. Unsuitable Materials: Clean soil to contain a combined maximum of 8 percent by dry weight of stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand. D. Screening: Pass unamended soil through a 2-inch sieve to remove large materials. 3.3 PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE A. General: Apply and mix unamended soil with amendments on -site to produce required planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply, add soil amendments, and mix approximately half the thickness of unamended soil over prepared, loosened subgrade according to "Mixing" Paragraph below. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil. C. Mixing: Spread unamended soil to total depth of 4 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after mixing with amendments and natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. 1. Amendments: Apply soil amendments evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend them with unamended soil to produce planting soil. D. Compaction: Compact planting soil according to SS/Tx recommendations. E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. 3.4 BLENDING PLANTING SOIL IN PLACE A. General: Mix amendments with in -place, unamended soil to produce required planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. B. Preparation: Till unamended, existing soil in planting areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. C. Mixing: Apply soil amendments evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend them into full depth of unamended, in -place soil to produce planting soil. D. Compaction: Compact blended planting soil as recommended by SS/Tx. E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. 3.5 APPLYING COMPOST TO SURFACE OF PLANTING SOIL A. Application: Apply compost/mulch materials in a hydro -slurry mix. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. B. Finish Grading: Grade surface to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. No pre -construction soil tests will be required for this project 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protection Zone: Identify protection zones according to Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection." B. Protect areas of in -place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to perform planting operations: Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 4 February 2014 SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Vehicle traffic. 4. Foot traffic. 5. Erection of sheds or structures. 6. Impoundment of water. 7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. C. If planting soil or subgrade is overcompacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or deleterious materials or liquids, restore the subgrade as directed by Landscape Architect upon recommendations of SS/Tx. 3.8 CLEANING A. Protect areas adjacent to planting -soil preparation and placement areas from contamination. Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise indicated. 1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on -site where directed by Owner. END OF SECTION 329115 Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 4 February 2014 SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Seeding 2. Sodding 3. Turf renovation. 4. Erosion -control material(s). B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 329300 "Plants" for trees, shrubs, ground covers, and other plants as well as border edgings and mow strips. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. C. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. D. Planting Soil: Existing, on -site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See Section 329115 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)" and drawing designations for planting soils. E. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at City of Lubbock Parks Department. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer and/or for Turfgrass Installer. B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass -seed monostand or mixture, stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 1. Certification of each seed mixture for turf grass sod. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier. C. Product Certificates: For soil amendments including Mycorrhizae, Humic acid formulations, soil proteins, and compost and other organic source nutrients. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment. 1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2. Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 4. Personnel Requirements: Sodding shall be accomplished by personnel experienced in the procedures and processed prescribed by Soil Secrets of Texas: Bob Mattson 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable. B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" sections in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod within 24 hours of harvesting and in time for planting promptly. Protect sod from breakage and drying. C. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge of soil -bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Planting Season: April 15 to August 31 for Bermuda seeding March 1 to October 31 for Bermuda sod 2. Fall Planting: Overseeding — Annual Rye Grass a. If seeding cannot be established by September 15, lawn areas are to be over - seeded with an annual rye grass at the rate of 4-lbs/1,000 sf. If this is required, the contractor shall maintain the annual grass lawn, as needed, including, but not limited to mowing to maintain a maximum height of 3" and edging, as required. b. This annual rye grass maintenance shall be considered as a separate item from the 90-day maintenance period specified for the seeded Bermuda grass. C. The Contractor shall till the annual grass to the depth of 2"-3" prior to sodding the Bermuda grass as specified. d. No herbicide such as Roundup shall be applied to annual grass prior to tilling and permanent grass installation. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Lawn Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Lawns: 60 days from the date of Substantial Completion. a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if lawn is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SEED A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new -crop seed complying with AOSA's "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. B. Seed Species 1. Quality: State -certified seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure. 2. Quality: Seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure, with not less than 85 percent germination, not less than 95 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed: 3. Full Sun: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon, (L.) Pers.) Variety: "Riviera" 2.2 TURFGRASS SOD A. Turfgrass Sod: Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. B. Turfgrass Species: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon) "Celebration" C. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as specified, with not less than 85 percent germination, not less than 95 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed: D. Seed Species: Celebration Bermuda 1. Quality: State -certified seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure. 2. Quality: Seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure, with not less than 85 percent germination, not less than 95 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed: 3. Full Sun, Filtered Shade: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon). 2.3 FERTILIZERS 1. No Fertilizers will be used on this project. 2.4 MULCHES A. Hydro -Mulch: TTP Supreme Compost, triple screened. (Soil Secrets of Texas — Bob Mattson- 806-549-6585) B. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: as recommended by Soil Secrets of Texas, LLC. Bob Mattson (806)549-6585 2.5 PESTICIDES A. No Pesticides will be used on this project. 2.6 EROSION -CONTROL MATERIALS A. Erosion -Control Blankets: As recommended by SS of Texas, Bob Mattson, 806-549-6585. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them. B. Install erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION A. General: Prepare planting area according to Section 329115 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)." 1. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod. B. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION -CONTROL MATERIALS A. Prepare area as specified in "Turf Area Preparation" Article. B. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. 3.5 HYDROSEEDING A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, inoculants, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. Mix slurry with Supreme Compost and Soil Secrets of Texas' recommended tackifier. 2. Spray -apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited as directed by SS of Texas installation supervisor. 3.6 SODDING A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to soil or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with soil, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. 1. Lay sod across slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than two anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage. C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod. 3.7 TURF RENOVATION A. Renovate turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. 1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required. 2. Amend soil as necessary with SS/Texas recommended treatment. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas B. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil. C. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials, such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel, and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new planting soil. D. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf. E. Remove weeds before seeding. Herbicides are prohibited on this project. F. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. G. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches. H. Apply soil amendments and required for establishing new turf and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades. 1. Soil Amendment(s): Soil Secrets according to requirements of Section 329115 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification) 2. Initial Fertilizer: No fertilizers will be applied in the project. I. Apply seed and sod as required for new turf. J. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established. 3.8 TURF MAINTENANCE A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, re -grade, and re- plant bare or eroded areas and re -mulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. 3. Apply maintenance treatments as recommended by Soil Secrets of Texas. B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf -watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches. 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate. C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than one-third of grass height. Remove no more than one-third of grass -leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowing. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowing to maintain the following grass height: 1. Mow Bermuda grass to a height of 1/2 to 1 inch 3.9 SATISFACTORY TURF A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect: 1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches 2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf. At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well -rooted, even - colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements, and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.10 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. C. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established. D. Remove nondegradable erosion -control measures after grass establishment period. 3.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Turf Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established, but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Turf. 60 days from date of Substantial Completion. a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season. 2. Sodded Turf. 30days from date of Substantial Completion. Mary K Crites, AIA — ARCHITECT 7 March 2014 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 6 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas SECTION 329300 - PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plants. 2. Tree stabilization. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting, trimming, pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work. 2. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn) and meadow planting, hydroseeding, sodding, and erosion -control materials. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with a ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1. C. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. D. Bare -Root Stock: Plants with a well -branched, fibrous -root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than the minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. E. Container -Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well -rooted plants grown in a container, with a well -established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. F. Fabric Bag -Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well -rooted plants established and grown in - ground in a porous fabric bag with well -established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant. G. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. H. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides separately from pesticides. 1. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. J. Planting Area: Areas to be planted. K. Planting Soil: Existing, on -site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See Section 329115 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)" for drawing designations for planting soils. L. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 PLANTS 329300 - 1 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas M. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk. N. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface. O. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated. 1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at City of Lubbock Parks Department. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1. Trees and Shrubs: Maintain approved Samples on -site as a standard for comparison. 2. Weed Control Barrier: one 12 inch length section with full width of roll to be used. 3. Inorganic Mulch: 1 pound of rock mulch materials for each color and texture of stone required, in labeled plastic bags. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Plant Materials -Verification of Plant Origin: A list of all plant selections including the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery. B. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons. C. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. D. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants. E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1. "American Standard for Nursery Stock." C. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. 1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field -grown stock and container -grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes. 2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 PLANTS 329300 - 2 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas D. Plant Material Observation: The Owner's Representative may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. The Owner's Representative may also observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. 1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials fourteen days in advance of delivery to site. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable. B. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge of soil -bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates. C. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. D. Handle planting stock by root ball. E. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with anti -desiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting. F. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation. G. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Heel -in bare -root stock. Soak roots that are in less than moist condition in water for two hours. Reject plants with dry roots. 2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. 3. Do not remove container -grown stock from containers before time of planting. 4. Water root systems of plants stored on -site deeply and thoroughly with a fine -mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly wet condition. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work. B. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Spring Planting: March 1 through May 31 2. Summer Planting: June 1 through August 31 3. Fall Planting: September 1 — November 30 Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 PLANTS 329300 - 3 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. C. Faulty performance of tree stabilization. 2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion. a. Trees, Shrubs: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses and Other Plants: Six months. 3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. C. A limit of one replacement of each plant is required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material. 1.13 MAINTENANCE Provide instruction, coordination, schedule of work and other communications as necessary to Owner so that new installations are maintained adequately to comply with warranty. Maintenance procedures should include, but not be limited to: 4. Trees and Shrubs: Maintain by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing (if required), restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings. 5. Perennial Plants, Ornamental Grasses and Groundcovers: Maintain by watering, weeding, fertilizing and other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery -grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant Legend indicated on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well -shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots are unacceptable. 2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 PLANTS 329300 - 4 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Landscape Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. 4. Root -Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which begins at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. 5. Labeling: Label each plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant. 6. Perennials, Biennials, Groundcovers and Annuals: Provide healthy, disease -free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well -established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom. 7. Coniferous Evergreens: a. Form and Size: Normal -quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1 2.2 FERTILIZER A. General: No Fertilizers will not be used in this project. 2.3 a 2.4 A. 2.5 A. 2.6 A. 2.7 A. MULCHES Inorganic Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay and other foreign substances, of the following type, size range and color. 1. Type A: Rounded riverbed smooth -faced gravel. a. Size Range: 1/4 inch minimum to 3/4 inch maximum. b. Color: tan -beige to brown to red gravel color range. 2. Type B: R.E. Janes Track and Field Blend #20 WEED -CONTROL BARRIERS Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids. PESTICIDES General: No Pesticides will be used on this project. TREE -STABILIZATION MATERIALS Trunk -Stabilization Materials: 1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough -sawn, sound, new hardwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 3-by-3-inch nominal by length indicated, pointed at one end. 2. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized -steel wire, two -strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter. 3. Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch in diameter, black. Cut to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage. 4. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long. LANDSCAPE EDGINGS Steel Edging: Standard commercial -steel edging, fabricated in sections of standard lengths, with loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes. 1. Edging Size: 1/8 inch thick by 6 inches deep. 2. Stakes: Tapered steel, a minimum of 12 inches long. 3. Accessories: Standard tapered ends, corners, and splicers. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint. a. Paint Color: Green. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 PLANTS 329300 - 5 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 2.8 TREE -WATERING DEVICES 1. Tree and Planting Bed Watering shall be achieved by mobile water tank and hose or by hose from water faucet until the permanent drip irrigation system has been completed by City Parks Department and is fully operable. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Retaining Wall Drainage Gravel: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8 B. Retaining Wall Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile manufactured for separation applications and made of polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fibers or combination of them. C. Technical Biologic materials, including Mycorrhizal Products, Supramolecular Humic Acid Soil Builders and Organic Nitrogen as recommended and prescribed by Soil Secrets of Texas Representative: Bob Mattson, 1-806-549-6585 or bob@soilsecretsoftexas.com PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations with adequate overhead clearance. 3. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty. B. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Landscape Architect and replace with new planting soil. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations. B. Install erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required. D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Landscape Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings. 3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A. General: Notify Landscape Architect prior to Soil Preparation. Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to prescribed method by Soil Secrets of Texas Representative: Bob Mattson: 1-806-549-6585 or bob(iDsoilsecretsoftexas.com B. Placing Planting Soil: Place original or recovered planting soil in -place over exposed subgrade. C. Before planting, obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. D. Application of "MycoMaxima", "TerraPro" and "Protein Crumblies" : At time directed by Architect, apply according to manufacturer's written recommendations, provided by Soil Secrets of Texas Representative: Bob Mattson: 1-806-549-6585 or bobksoilsecretsoftexas.com Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 PLANTS 329300 - 6 House Renovation Lubbock. Texas 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS: The following instructions are as recommended by Soil Secrets of Texas and are to be followed as closely as possible. A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate square planting pits. 1. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 2. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped, balled and potted, container -grown stock. 3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. 4. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling. 5. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements. 6. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 7. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's personnel. B. Backfill Soil: Backfill the planting hole with the original soil that was removed. 1. Discard any grass and weeds from the soil. 2. Pulverize soil prior to backfilling. C. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. 1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- diameter holes, 24 inches apart, into free -draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet whichever is less, and backfill with free -draining material. D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits. E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. 3.5 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING A. Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top -most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements. B. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches above adjacent finish grades. 1. Backfill Planting soil: Use excavated soil. 2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing final layer of soil. D. Balled and Potted and Container -Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches above adjacent finish grades. 1. Backfill: Native Planting soil. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 PLANTS 329300 - 7 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.6 E 9 D. 3.7 A. 3.8 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 3.9 A. IM 2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball. TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Landscape Architect. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. TREE STABILIZATION Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend one-third of trunk height above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. 2. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees with two stakes for trees up to 12 feet high and 2- 1/2 inches or less in caliper; three stakes for trees less than 14 feet high and up to 4 inches in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees. 3. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines in even rows with triangular spacing. Use native planting soil for backfill. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that minimally disturbs the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. PLANTING AREA MULCHING Install weed -control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions and in areas designed in drawings. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1. Trees in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 3-inch average thickness, with 36-inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of trunks or stems. 2. Inorganic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch average thickness of mineral mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of trunks or stems. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 PLANTS 329300 - 8 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.10 EDGING INSTALLATION A. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30 inches apart, driven below top elevation of edging. B. Mow -Strip Installation: 1. Excavate for mow strip as indicated on Drawings. 2. Compact subgrade uniformly beneath mow strip. 3. Construct concrete mow curb as indicated on Drawings. 4. Rake mulch to a uniform surface level with adjacent finish grades. 3.11 INSTALLING SLOW -RELEASE WATERING DEVICE A. The City of Lubbock Parks Department will install the drip irrigation components to all planting areas according to their standards and specifications. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for installing irrigation sleeves as indicated on drawings and coordinate completion of irrigation with the Parks Department. 3.12 PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree -stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. B. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage and mechanical controls such as traps. 3.13 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. General: Repair or replace existing or new trees and other plants that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs. 2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours, if approved. 3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by Architect. B. Remove and replace trees that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition or are damaged during construction operations that Landscape Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. 1. Provide new trees of same size as those being replaced for each tree of 3 inches in caliper size. 2. Species of Replacement Trees: Same species being replaced. 3.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. C. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. D. After installation and before Substantial Completion remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site. E. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree -watering devices are in good working order and leave them in place. Replace improperly functioning devices. Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 PLANTS 329300 - 9 Landwer House Renovation Lubbock, Texas 3.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below: 1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of Substantial Completion. B. Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below: 1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 329300 Mary Crites, AIA-Architect 7 March 2014 PLANTS 329300 - 10 CITI' OF LUBBOCK LANDWER HOUSE KENOVATION LUBBOCK, TEXAS fif:Z��1DI�IIIii►iOL�a GENERAL INFORMATION: SQUARE FOOTAGE: 3200 GROSS SQ.FT. OCCUPANT TYPE: ASSEMBLY A.2 OCCUPANT LOAD: 99• REQUIRED EXITS: 2 PROVIDED EXITS: 5 -BASED ON LETTER FROM BUILDING OFFICIAL DATED 24 SEPT. 2013 NOTES: • BUILDING NOT SPRINKLERED • BASED ON 20091BC PARKING 1 SPACE PER 100 GROSS SQ.FT. OF SPACE 32 SPACES REQUIRED - EXISTING 2 ACCESSIBLE SPACES REQUIRED - NEW UXAWIN G LISI ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURAL MPE SITE A.1 COVER SHEET & INDEX OF DRAWINGS 51.1 EXISTING FOUNDATION PLAN AND SECTIONS M-00l MECHANICAL DEMOLITION L-101 SI 11, MANOLI'I'10 PLAN A.2 GENERAL NOTES 52.1 STRUCTURAL NOTES AND DETAILS M-lol FLOOR PLAN MECHANICAL L-102 LANDSCAPE SITE PLAN A.CA TAS/ADA NOTES 53.1 EXISTING ROOF FRAMING PLAN AND SECTIONS M-401 MECHANICAL DETAILS AND SCHEDULES L-103 HARDSCAPE REFERENCE PLAN A.3 DEMOLITION PLAN P-101 FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING DEMOLITION L-104 LAYOUT PLAN A.4 DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLAN P-102 FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING L-105 GRADING PLAN A.5 ANNOTATED FLOOR PLAN ROOF P-103 FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING L-106 PLANTING PLAN AN REFLECTED CEILING PLAN R1.01 ROOF PLAN E-101 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN L-107 PLANTING PLAN A.7 ENLARGED RESTROOM PLANS R1.02 ROOFING DETAILS E-201 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN L-108 IRRIGATION PLAN AS FLOOR FINISH PLAN RL03 ROOFING DETAILS E-301 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN L-109 PLANTING DETAILS A.9-9A EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS - DEMOLITION E-401 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES L-110 PLANTING DETAILS A.10-IOA EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS - RENOVATED A.11-IIA INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A.12 WINDOW AND DOOR ELEVATIONS A.13 DOOR DETAILS A.13A SECTIONS A.14 FINISH LEGEND AND SCHEDULE MARY K. CRITES ANI®ROB7m UATFOA ISSUE 03.OL201 I s� COVER SHEET & INDEX OF DRAWINGS A.1 MATERIAL GENERAL NOTES ABBREVIATIONS DESIGNATIONS REFERENCE INDICATIONS P/C MR DOWNWIND E. EAST INT. INTERIOR RM RECESSED WASTE RECEPTACLE 1. THEM DRAWINGS ARE LEGAL INSTRUMENTS OF SERVCE FOR NE USE 6 NE OWNER AND 115 AUTHORIZED AGENTS AND VENDOR$ ON ME DESIGNATED PROJECT COLT qB. ANCHOR BOLT AS,ABOVE EA, EACH E.A.R. EXHAUST MR REGISTER JAW, JANITOR J.B. JUNCTION BOX RWD. REDWOOD - RAIN WATER LEADER AC ACCE550RE5 2, BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ME KNOWLEDGE OF RELATEE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THESE DOCUMENTS AND ME AC, ASPHALTIC CONCRETE E ELASTCMERIC COATING/ EXPOSED UST. AZT 5. SOUTH AMUSING PANELQ pW DONOTONS UNDER WHICH THE WORK WILL BE PERFORMED, AM, ACLESSIBL£ CONSTRUCTION JT. ANT S.A. 9NGE ACTING OR 3 CAFEFURY AND THOROUGHLY EXAMINE ME PROJECT SIZE, HEW VERIFY All CONOPUNS, GRADES, ELEVAPDNS AND gMENSIONS 6 THE VARIOUS FEATURES OF NE SIZE PNO COMPARE DRAWINGS MN NE FARING CWOIIgJS ANY DISCREPANCIES AND/OR CON TIONE NEEDING CLAREGATION SHALL BE REPORTED IN WTTNG TO DESIGNER ACWS. ACWSTICPl AD. AREA MAN ACCESS DOOR ADO. ADDENDUM E.F. EXHAUST FAN KIT KITCHEN EF.S EXTERIOR FlNISI 5151EM KM. KILOMETER E.00R. EXTEROR GYPSUM CENNG BOAROL LLNGN/LWG S.C. SOIL CORE SC. SCALE SIGHTS. SCHEDULE I SE CT 0 NEW WALL BEFORE STARING -1. ♦. ALL CONSTRUCTION, FABMCAION AND INSTALLATION SHALL CONFORM TO NE LATEST LOCALLY ADOPTED MEONS ADJ. ADJUSTABLE ADJA ADJACENT E.LF.s. EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM LAB. LABORATORY LAM. LIANINATE/LAMINATED SCR. SCUPPER EC K SHOWER CURTAIN ROD pF P00AAiTII R ORCED PLASTIC PANELS OF NE UBC, INC. SBC, SEC, SMC, NFPA AND ANY FEDERAL, STALE AND LOCAL CODES, REGULATIONS AND ORDINANCES OF COWERED AGENCIES HAVW JJRISDICTON. SUCH APPIICPBIE CODES ETC ARE NOSE WHICH ARE AF ACCESS FLOOR Al ABOVE UNIM FLOOR E.J. EXPANSION JOINT EL ELLVATON LAN LAVATORY UT POUND 5.0. SMORE DETECTOR SEC, SECION G ORBEANHIE NEW PARTIAL HOOT WALL IN EFFECT AT THE TIME ME PROJECT PERMIT APPDCATON IS RECORDED. 5 ALL TRADES ARE CONSIDERED SPECIALISTS IN NOR RESPECTIVE FEWMADE AND SHALL PROMDE A SUBMISSION AGUM AGGREGATE AHU. AIR HANDUNG UNIT ELMS. ELASTOMERIC ELLS. ELECTRICAL LF. UNEAL FOOT IKR. LOCKER SF. SQUARE FEET SH. SHELF LNG M NE K�WA2 OF BID OR PERFORMANCE OF WORK, NOTIFY THE CONTRACTOR IN WRITING OF ANY WORK ON THE DRAWNGS OR IN 1HE SPECIFICWHICH CANNOT BE FULLY WARRANTED OR CONSTRUCTED AS WTMIED OR SI'ECIFlED, ME ALUM. ALUMINUM ALT. ALTER OR ALTERNATE t EIFVATOR EMER, EMERGENCY ECK LOCAION LTC. UWTNC SHR. SHOWER SHi. SiEEi PApNTR O£ SU WRIER CONTRA TOR WILL NOTIFY ME UESIGNER OF SUCH COMOIONS IN WRITING, 6, WE TO REPRODUCTIVE PROCESSES, DRAWNGS MAY NOT BE ACCURATE TO SCALE. ANC. ANGLE ANOD. ANODIZED ENCL ENCLOSURE E.0.5. EDGE OF SLAB LVR. MUMER M SLIM SHEARING SUM. PLAN CUARRY TLgNAT AS ]. ME STRUGTURAL, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS PRE SUPPLEMENTARY TO ME ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS OSCREPANCIES BETWEEN NE VACUOUS GRAWNGS SHALL BE REPORTED BY THE AP. ACCESS PANEL APPROX APRROXIMAR E P. ELECTRIC PANEL EQ. EQUAL MAT' MATERIAL T' M MAX. MAXIMUM SL SLOPE UCRE SLUG, AIDING y WISHES 12 CONTRACTOR TO THE DESIGNER IN WRITING. ARCH, ARCHITECTURAL EQPT. EQUIPMENT M.B. MACHINE BOLT SENT. SEALANT STONE ID.9 SNIION MATM(ER 8 BEFORE STARTING WORK, COORDINATE WE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR INSTALLATION OF INDICATED N.I.C. ON DRAWNG. VERIFY EWIPMENT WCAIWS WN THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. VERIFY DIMENSIONS, UTUTES, ASHE ASPHALT (PANND) A., ACCOSTS TILL E.W. EACH WAY E.W C. ELECTRIC WATER COOLER E%H. EXHAUST M C. MEDICINE CABINET MESH. MECHANICAL SM. SQUARE METER SM.SEWER MANHOE $.N.D. SANITARY NAPKIN gSFFNSER S STAIN N -GOSTONFRSVANITY TOPS ETC., WE EWIPMENT MANUFACTURERS' ROUGH IN DATA PRIOR TO FORMING NE SLAB. N. PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURED ITEMS SHALL BE PRONGED AS SPHBFER ANY SUBSINTONS SHALL BE A.W. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK BD. BOARD FIIRM. BITUMINQUS FAR EXPANSION MEMB. MEMBRANE MET. METAL S.N.R. SANITARY NAPKIN RECEPTALIE yC} ran CWPOD09TCN TILL APPROVED BV DESIGNER, U G. BUILDING E%PO E%POSED EMSTNG MFR. MANUFACTURER SUP, SOLID PLASTIC SPEC. SPECIP AIMS ALL COVERNG /Ott 1 10 WHERE DETAILS ARE NOT SHOWN OR NOTED, DETAILS SHALL BE NE SAME AS FOR OTHER SIMILAR FIRST CLASS WTIHI(. ILI BLOCK BLKG, BLOCHING EMST E%T. EXTERIOR ME NARLDLE MIN. MINIMUM SPKR. SPRINKLER ISO STAR �^ 11. ALL INDICATED EXISTING RULES OR STRUCTURES ARE BASED ON INFORMATW OF RECORD. TAKE MEASURES TO BM. BEAM F FEMALE NUR. MIRROR Q. SQUARE MLAAC vLAx MAraER RROTECT ME UTLEY LINES NOT OF RECORD OR NOT SHOYM. BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY AND ALL DAMAGE WHICH B.O.H. BACK OF HOUSE FA FIRE A. FAB, FABRICATE MISS. MISCELLANEOUS S.SK, SERVICE SINK S.SR. STAINLESS STEEL III MAY OCCUR DUE TO FAILURE TO LOCATE AND PROTECT ALL CONCEALED UTUTES, BUT BOTTOM OR, BEDROOM FA.M. -IN MPUED MEMBRANE MILER MCiDING ST. STONE 12. COMPLY WM ALL JURISDICTIONAL AGENCY REQUIREMENTS AND REGULATIONS PERFORM ALL WORK ON THIS CROJECT IN COMPUPNCE WITH TIE STALE OCCUPATWPL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT AND NE AMERICANS M1H BEARING F.B. FLAT BAR ME. MIWMETER M.O. MASONRY OPENING STA. STATON OR BILIIES ACT ACCESSIBHLTY GUIDELINES. WE B BE F.C.O. BOOR CLEAN MT MOD, MMULRE SIR STANDARD 13. FN CONNECTIONS TO EWIPMENT AI— BE AS PER MANUFACTURERS' WIRING DIAGRAMS, OETAIIS AND INSTRUCTONC BE RESPONSIBLE TO PRONDE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT COMPATIBLE MN EQUIPMENT ACTUALLY S B.S. BOTH SIDES SSMI BASEMENT FC.U. FAN COIL UNIT F.D. FLOOR DRAIN/FIRE DAMPER M.R. MOISTURE RESISTANT MTR MOUNTED SR. STEEL SCHED. SCHEDULE HEIGHT ATE, SUPPLED. BTO BETWEEN B.U.R. BUILT-UP ROOL FE HIRE EXTINGUISHER FEC. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET M. MOUNTING N. NORTH STOR. STORAGE TRUCE. STRUCTURE/STRUCTURAL 14 FROVDE PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS REWIRED BY JURISDICTIONAL ACENgES. 15. PATCH AND MATCH ALL NEW WORK WE EXISTING, C CHORD/COMPACT F.F.&E. NRNINRE, Fl%NRE 8 N.I.C. NOT IN CONTRACT SURE. WRROUND 16. RESTURE ALL REMOVED OR DAMAGED STRUCTURAL S1EEL CEMENTTOUS FIRE PROOFlNG TO REQUIRED FINE CAB. CABINET EQUIPMENT NO. NUMBER SUCH SUSPEND/WSPENWD BESISTA STANDARD, 17 SUBMIT SAMPLES OF ALL EXPOSED PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, PAINING SYSTEMS, ETC, FOR DESIGNER'S RENEW GB. CATCH BASIN GEN CEMENTTOUS BACKER BOARD FPS. FlNIGN BOOR SEPARATION EM FLAT HEAD NUM. NOMINAL N.S NO SCALE '. SERVCE SW SCOTCH DOLOR SELECTON OR COLOR VERIMATON REQUIRED PRIOR TO GRDERNG ITEMS CC 1,CLOSED CIRCUIT IELENSION F.H.C. FlRE HOSE CABINET EN. FlNISI N.i.S. NO i0 SCALE W. SYMMETRICAL SYS. SYSTEM n_ 19 ALL Fl%NRES, EQUIPMENT PNO HARDWARE SHALL BE OF COMMERCIAL GRADE AND QDALItt. 19. ALL MATERIALS, FINISHES AND PRODUCTS SPECIFIED SHALL BE INSTALLED AS PER MANUFACTURERS' TECHNICAL C.D. CEILING DIFN9F CEM. CEMENT Fl%i. FIXTURE RAM RASHNG C OVER O.C. ON CENTER I TREAD T&G. TONGUE AND GROOVE LJ i0R DETSIRVTI N) (ENO SPECIE ATONS 20. EXISTING FlRE RATED ASSEMBUES ARE M BE MAINTAINED. MR. CERAMIC C.F./C.I. WTRACTOR FURNISHED HE FOLDING OA, OVERALL O.A.G. OUTSIDE AIR GTUE T/SNB/SHOWER 21, MORDINA7 ROUTING OF ALL UTUIES WE OWNER. CONTRACTOR INSTALLED RC. FLOORING MS, OBSCURE FAKED, TACKBOARO RODM nO 22. PRO BE BLOCKING IN WALLS MERE ART IS INDICATED. 23. ALL SCUD SURFACE COUN11Fi0P5 AND STONE CONFEREES i0 RECEIVE 3/4° PLYWOOD OR MDF SUBSTRATE. CFM. CUBIC FEET PER NINER C.C. CORNER WARD RR. FLOOR RUM RUORESCLNT 0O OUTSIDE DIAMETER (DIMENSION) OF . /OF OWNER NRNISHED/ TB. TOWEL BAR TD. MEN ONDRAIN �MONSERµE RwM CHPN. CHANNEL CHILLED WRIER RETURN GIN FN.D, FEMININE NAPKIN WRONG L EN,V. NAPKIN VENDOR OFF OFFICE O.H. OPPOSITE HAND TEL TELEPHONE TEMP. IEMPERED/IEMPORARY CHWS. CHILLED WARR SUPPLY , C.I. CAST IRON C.I.P. CAST -IN -PLACE FOUNDATION END. FOUNOAION F.O. FAI 6 EO C. FACE OF CONCRETE FO.F. LACE OF FlNIS Opp OPPOSIE UPS,OPAWE ODR, OPERABLE 1ER. TERRAllO TNR. TRANSFORMER 1HK. 1HICK/1HICKNE55 TAG. DOOR TYPE T� (� MILLWORK NOTES CRC. CIRMLAINC CJ. CONTROL JgUP CLC. CEIUNC CLO. CLOSET FO.M. FACE OF MpSWRY F.O.S. FACE 4F SLAB/ FACE OF STUD FO,W FACE OF WALL ON D. O ERNE D PASS. PASSABE pC. POST CONTRACT PC. A. POST CONTRACT ARCHIEECTURAL HR. THRESHOLD RT. PART i.0. iW OF_ T.O.C. NP OF CURB �OODR 1. ALL UPPER CABINET INTERIORS TO BE I -'I" INSIDE CLEAR U.ON. SLR. CLEAR TELL FRAME PC. PIECE T.O.P. TOP OF PARAPET/TOP OF PAVEMENT 2. ALL CABINET EXTERIORS TO BE PLASTIC DOMINATE FINISH UDN. ON, CENTIMETER EMG. FIBER REINFURCED GYPSUM FR.P. FIRERCIASS RNNF PD. PLANTER DRAIN T.O.S. TOP OF STEEL/M OF SLAB xOIE BUBBLE 3 ALL CABINET INTERIORS TO BE ALMOND MELAMINE FINISH U.O.N. GAD, CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT GN1R. COUNTER TE F.R.i. FIRE RETARDANT iBEAIED WOOD PERM. PERIMETER T.O.W T0P OF WALL GR 4 ALL FlLL DRAWERS i0 RECEIVE METAL INTERIOR HARDWARE i0 ADJUST FOR LATERAL OR VERTICAL FlLING AND LETTER M LEGAL SIZE THES CO, OEANWT/CASED OPENING/ MZ. FREEZER pERP. PERPENDICULAR P.I.P. POURED -IN -PUCE TPD, TOLET PAPER DISPENSER TEN. TOILET PAPER HOLDER 5 ALL EXPOSED SHRNNC TO BE INSTALLED ON PEG SYSTEM OLON, INRRHOR SHELNNG MAY BE INSTALLED ON KNAPP & WIT STANDARDS (OR EQUAL). CONCRETE OPENING COL. COLUMN F.S. FLOOR SNK/FNM SIZE FT FOOT/FEET PL. PLATE PLAN. PLASTIC LAMINAE 1RAN. TRANSITION TRANS. TRANSPARENT 6 GROMMETS TO BE INSTALLED ON SM FOLLOWING MILLWORK INSTALLATION PER OWNER'S REQUEST Z. WRIFY ALL OIMEN9GJ5 ON SIR COMA. COMMUNICATION COPM, COMPARTMENT F.T.G. FACIAL TISSUE DISPENSER FTG FOOTING ALAS. PLASTER PLBC. PLUMBING ,S TUBE S1EEL TROD. TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSER 22 WALL PAGUNNE B WRIFY ALL GIMfN90NS RELATED M SPECIFIC MM-SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT W/OWNER PRIOR TO FABRICATING MLLWYMK. CONS. CONCRETE CON'. CONOTOM MEN NRRING/NRRED FLIT. NTURE PLYWDU PLYWOOD PNL. PANEL T. TOWEL SIEIF N. TELENSION W 9, MILLWORK TOMICK TO BE PLASTIC LAMINATE OR WOFINISH AS SPECIFlED UDN. *m CONK, NNECTION CO CONSTR, CONSTRUCTION G. GAS (PIPE) CA. GAGE PR. PAIR PREP, PRESSURE REDUCING BACK TYP, TYPICAL g RWMNG MANSION W/ NO T ANS USE STRIP 10. ALL STAN SPECIFIED SHALL RESULT IN NRNINRE QUALTY NO° FARM U.O.N. CONTRACTOR TO UK COMMERCIAL GRADE STAINING MATERIALS AND LAYER APPUCATONS IN ORDER TO AMIEW NRNINRE QUALITY FINISH. CON, GONMN CAL. GALLON ROW PREIMNTER UC UNDERCUT G.L. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. 11. MILLWORK SHOP DRAWNGS TO BE SUBMITTED TO DESIGNER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO MANUFACTURING, CMUM CONTRACTOR CORK. CORRIDOR GALV. GALVANIZED GB, GRAB BAR PRCS, PRECAST PREFAB. PREFAMICATED ME.. UNFINISHED UDN. UNLESS OTHERMSE NOTED Z ROOMNG MANSION W/ 1RAN4TON SHOP C T G. MEAN OUT TO GRADE COOK, COORDINATE CU. CARPET C.R. CLOSET ROD OR.M, CONCRETE RUBBLE MASONRY GEN. GENERATOR G.F.I. GROUND FAULT INSPECTOR G.F.R.G. GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CMMEE O. GLASS PROP. PREPARATION PROP, PROPERTY PR.V. PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE P.S.F. POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT BE PAINT/PONT UP. UPHOLSTERED PANELS M. URINAL OIL VALANCE VAR. VARMI VCT. VNYL COMPOSITION TILE FINISH NOTES PLAN INDICATIONS OT, CERAMIC TILE SIR. CENTER OPEN. CMNTERWNK MST. CUSTODIAN GU -LAN 0.UED LAMINATED WOOD CND. GROUND GPN. GALLONS PER HOUR P,TD. PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER P.,D.R, PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER & RECEPTACLE WRT VERTICAL WSE VESTWLE VLV. VALVE 1. SUBMIT SAMPLES OF ALL EXPOSED PRODUCTS, MArzPoUS PAINING SYSTEMS, EX. FOR DESIGNER'S RENEW. C.W. COD WATER GS B. GYPSUM SHEARING BOARD GYP. GYPSUM PN, PARTITION P.T.R. PAPER TOWEL RECEPTAME VOL VOLUNE V.P. VENEER PLASTER 4 COLOR =TON M COLOR WRIFlGATON REQUIRED PRIOR TO ORDERING PRODUCT. 2. CONTRACTOR TO ALIGH CERAMIC THE FLOOR GROUT JBNES) WE CERAMIC THE BASE GROUT UNES (NITRE CW R, COLD WATER RETURN D PENNY (NAILS) H. HEIGIi/HIGH H.B. HOSE BIB PVC. POLY NNri CHLORIDE QT. WARRY TIE V.,R, IENi THROUGH ROOF W WEST/MDTH/MDE/WASIER (U.O.N.) NEW DMA UK d' DISTANCE BETWEEN APRICABLE). 0. OE1F/bEP1H/DRYER H.C. HOLLOW CORE R. RISER W/ µITM STUD AND JAMB G DOOR (OO N.) 3. ELECTRICAL SWMHRATES STALL BE COVERED WN SPEcRMN WALL COVERING. 4 ALL STAIN SPMUBEG SHALL RESULT IN FURNITURE QUALITY 'HMO' FINISH U.GEN. CONTRACTOR TO USE COMMERCIAL O.A. DOUBLE AGING DBL DOUBLE HOP. HIM CAPPED HO. HEAD BAD. RADIUS M. RESILIENT BASE W/0 WIHOUT WC. WATER CLOSET GRADE STMNING MAEEMkS AND LAYER APPUCA70N5 IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE NRNINRE QUALITY FINISH. 5U ALL WALL LEVEL FINISHES TO BE IEWW_ 4 U.O.N. ON IDU4 0D. DECK DRAIN DEPT. DEPARTMENT HDWO. HARDWOOD HONE. HARDWARE MEN. ROBE HOOK R.C.P. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN WC. WPLLCOWNING W,p, WOOD GET. DETAIL D.F. DRINKING FOUNTAIN DIA DIAMETER olAc oIA Oxu X.M. HOLLOW METAL MRIZ. HORIZONTAL HR. HOUR Ha HAND SINK R.U. ROOF DRAIN RWAR. REINFORCING BAR REF. REFORENCE/REFOR REEL. RERECTOR W),P, µOW PANELING WEN, WINDOW W.CL. WERE GLASS WN. WATER HEATER ELECTRICAL DEVICE NOTES DIM. OMENSION HT. HHGUT HER. HEATER REMR DERATOR W,O. WHERE OCCURS/ WINDOW OPENING OW ASK PF2NFEP T0. NHmW£ WRTOH DISP. OSPENSER OUT DOWN DI DOUR OPENING H.VA.0 HEATNG WNTLATION AND AIR CONOTONING N REINF. REINFORCOD/Rf]NFgRCINC EN/ RED. REWIRED RE9L RESILIENT µp WATERpR00F WPM, WAIERPR00F MEMBRANE WS WOOD SCREWS �NW1ND 1. ALL SWITCHES AMID OUT KAM ON 'MOOD SURE GES N BE BROWN U.O.N. 2 CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL ALL OUTLETS 018° O.C. A.FF UDN. DPW. DEMOUNTABLE PARTIQU DR. OWN H.W. HOT WATER H.W.R. HOT WATER RETURN REST RESTROON REV RENSED/REN9ON W.R. WATER RESISTANT CURB. WARDROBE 3. WTLETS ABOVE MILLWORK TO BE MOUNTED WWIRCALLY U.ON. 4. SCOTCH PLATES ON PAINTED SURFACES N BE ALMOND UDN. DS. GOW SPONT D.SIX DR STANDPIPE I.O. INSDE DIAMETER (DIMENSAI IN. INCH ENCL. INCLUDED/INCLU9VE/ R.F. RESILIENT RODERIC RFD. RAMM WSCI WAINSCOT WISP. WET STAND PIPE ^�\ 5. EIECTRICAL/DATA/COMMMUNICARCH OUTLET PLATES N BE ALMOND U.O.N. DD OINSHWAN OR REGISTER WT MflGHT I/ GOLD PROMO OWN. MAKE INWL INSULATION RLO.GRMUNG RN. ROOM R.D. ROUGH OPENING BENSION ¢ %M. ACCESSIBILITY NOTES 1. GC TO ENSURE THAT ALL CABINETRY AND COM R SPACES MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. 2. ALL SIGNAGE TO COMPLY WE ADA REMLATGHS. AMESSRLL MARY K. CRITES �1�11�`Ii�I 1���1RO11 :1. •1 OATFOA ISSUE 03.0].2014 GENERAL NOTES A.2 LETTERS AND NUMBERS: T LETTERS AND NUMBERS ON BUNS SHALL BE RAISED 1/32" MINIMUM AND SHALL BE SANS-SERI1 UPPERCASE CHARACTERS ACCONPANIED BY GRADE 2 BRAILLE (SEC. 4.W.4) 2. RAISED CHARACTERS OR SYMBOLS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 5/8' HIM. (SEC. 4 W 4) 3. PICTORIAL SYMBOL SIGNS IPICTOGRAMSI SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY ME EQUIVALENT WRBAL OES PFON PLA DIRECLY BELOW ME PICTOGRAM. ME BORDER DIMENBW OF ME PICTOGRAM SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 6" IN HEIGHT (DEC, 4.30.4) Ix 8xnn 5 ueaCES511u B tt 4 LETRRS AND NUMBERS ON SIGNS SHALL HAVE A 'MDTH-TO-HEIGHT RARO OF BETWEEN 3:5 AND 1:1 AND A STRIKE WDN-TO-HEIGHT RATIO BETWEEN HS AND LED (SEC. 4.30.2) 5, CHARACTERS AND SYMBOLS SHALL CONTRAST MIT THEIR BACKGROUND, EITHER LIGHT CHARACTERS ON A DARK BACKGROUND OR DARK CHARACTERS ON A NWT BON SIDE ND. (SEC. 4SIM 6, MECHAROTERSAEUN ANDNUMBERS ON SIDES SHALL BE SIZED ACCORDING i0 THE HEWING DISTANCE FROM WHICH NEY PRE i0 BE READ. NE MINIMUM UPPER CASE X. LOWER CASE CHARACTERS FOR USING SUSPENDED ARE P IS PERMITTED. ARE PERMITTED. FOR BONS SUSPENDED OR PROJECTED ABOVE THE RxISH FLOOR IN COMPLIANCE SEC SECTION 1121E, ME MINIMUM CHARACTER HEIGHT SHALL BE 3"1 (SEC. 4.30.3) rzn sEO Z. CONTRACTED GRADE 2 BRAILLE SHALL BE USED WHEREVER BRMLLE SYMBOLS ARE SPECIFICALLY REWIRED IN OMER PORTIONS OF THESE REGULATIONS. DOTS SHALL BE I/10" ON CENTERS IN EACH CELL W1M 2/10' SPACE BETWEEN CELLS DO15 SHALL BE RAISED A MINIMUM OF IHYC ABOVE THE BACKGROUND. SIGN LOCATIONS: ® 8, WEN PERMANENT IOENTM ION IS PRONGED FOR ROWAS AND SPACES, RAISED LLTTERS SHALL PROMOFD ANDWE SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED A IN BRAILLE IN CONFORMANCE MM SECTION ATIN SOU SIGNS SHALL BE NSTALLED ON THE wALL ADJACENT i0 NE LAl'CH OUTSIDE OF THE DOOR. MEW MERE IS NO WALL KALE ON WE LATCH SIDE INCLUONG AT LEAF DOORS. SIGNS SHALL BE PLACE ON THE WARES} ADJACENT WALL, ME FINISITYFLDOR TORWEETCENTERLIINE OFF OCR 1WIIE MOUNIINGMLOCATION SHALL BE BETERMINED SO THAT THE PERSON MAY APPROACH WHIN 3" OF ME SIGNAGE WTHOUT ENCOUNTERING PROTRUDING OBJECTS OR STANDING WTMIN THE ING OF A DOOR. (SEC. 11170 59) 9. ADDITIONALDIRECHONAL SIGNS ALONG ACCESSIBLE PAN OF TRAVEL ARE REQUIRED, MEN 10, BUILDINGS REMODELED TO PROWDE ACCESSIBLE SANITARY FACILITIES FORRTPUBLICBE E SUALHAW IN MMA71ON POSTED IN ME LOBBY AS INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY: 11. STANDARD USED I1BENTIFY ACCESSIBLE FACILITIES. CH Acc[ssH Lttx 12. WHITE FlGSEE ON BLUE BACK WIND, COLOR $ 15WO ON FEDERAL STANDARD g 595A WHEN 13 ENFORCING AGENCY DETERMINES, IF APPROPRIATE, SPECIAL DESIGNS AND CIGARS MAY BE APPROVED. BRAILLE: eoLA INTERTIIONE BOL 14 USE CONTRASTED GRADE 2 BRAILLE. DOTS M BE 0.1 INCH ON CENTER IN EACH CELL B DC IN SPACE BEIWEEN COULD, 16, DOTS RAISED MINIMUM 00251NCH ABOVE BACKGROUND. TjERSN SIGNS & SS PICTOGRAMSP RECESSED FOUNTAINS: 1 MFEIN ALWVES MINIMUM 63' WADE, MINIMUM 10' DEEP WHEN DOUBLE MIN. DRINKING FOUNTAINS ME REWIRED AND 32' MIN, C-R. WHEN A SINGLE y2 cIFM FOUNTAIN IS PERMITTED, 4K A. CONTRACTOR BE COORDINATE NE SIZE OF WATER FOUNTAIN M BE USED AND SIZE ALCOVE ACCORDINGLY CONPLYING WE REQUIREMENTS F' AND RECOMMENDATIONS AND COORDINATING WN NE ARCHITECT. F.' 1. SEE TYPICAL ACCESSIBILITY NOTES SHEET SECTIONS 'R' & "U'. PROJECTED FOUNTAINS 1. WARNING FOR THE MSIM IMPAIRED AT A PROJECTED DRINKING FOUNTMN M XCAN BE PRONDED BY BARER OF ME FOLLOWING MEANS K. k: - " Mi A. THE SURFACE OF THE FLOOR BE GROUND AT ME DRINKING F FOUNTAIN CAN BE OF CONIRASING COLOR MIT A TEXTURE A M THAT CONTRASTS IN RESILIENCY MN WE ADJACENT FINISHED R FLOOR MISO FLAT IT CAN BE SENSED BY A CANE, NU ME I r. TEXTURE EXTENDING FROM ME WALL TO ONE FOOT BEYOND ME k FRONT EDGE OF ME DRINKING FOUNTAIN AND ONE FOOT BEYOND ® a FOUNTAINS EACH SIDE OF ME FOUNTAIN, ON B. INSTALL WING WALLS ON EACH SIDE OF WE DRINKING FOUNTAIN TO PROJECT CUT FROM ME MAIN OR AT LEAST AS FAR AS ME DRINKING NOTE: FOUNTAIN AND TO WHIN 6` OF ME PAM OF BAWL BOOR FINISH, MERE MUST BE 32" CLEAR BETWEEN ME MNG WALLS, DIE U. STRATONS SHOWN HERE ARE FOR DIMENSIONAL ACCESSIBILITY PURPOSES ONLY. A SECOND DRINKING FOUNTAIN SHOULD BE PROMDED AT A MOUNTING HOONT SUITABLE TO PERSONS ON LIMITED FHVBCAL BENDING ABILITY, ADJACENT TO ME ACCESSIBLE FOUNTAIN, MMNTMNING MINIMUM CLEARANCES NOTED MD AS REWIRED PROWDE TEXTURED AREA OF WNTAASPNC COLOR TO IDENTIFY WATER FOUNTAIN LOCATON AS NOTED, WHEN FOUNTAIN IS AT AN INTERIOR LOCATION, ME TEXTURED AREA SHALL AL. BE OF DIFFERENT RESILIENCY THAN NAT OF WE ADJACENT FLOOR SURFACE FINISH. SEE TYPICAL ACCESSIBILITY NOTES SHEET FOR ADDIWONAL REQUIREMENTS. PROARE MEMO SET OF HANDRAILS V I.F. PARE NOTES AI AT 24' SWHEx CHILDREN ARE PPoNMY USERS. I-1/4" TO - 2' t-I/a' TO I1-1 /3 1-1/4' TO1-1 AMNMAIL TREAD MON't.TOP LANDING '- "AL WARNING STRIPS SHALL(DO,2" MIN. W1DM &INSTALLEDI' uAX. FRON EDM R NE Tw. 1?•I'ANOBOTTOMGEMS OFROR STARS, AND ON ALLREADS OF EXTERIOR STAIRS. HANDRAIL GRAB BAR GRAB BAR HMO AIL IONGLY . MBR. vacE ® STAIR SECTION ®HANDRAILS = �' S ;ERE ADACENT CBSMOCTION 48" MINIMUM Ir 12 WALL OCCURS 1V(7-12' MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS V // BOTH A CLOSER AND A LATCH REQUIRED CLEAR SPACE 24' MIN. E)t1ERI0R —' IB' NIN. INIFRIOR REWIRED CLEAR SPACE I I 24'RIN. EXTERIOR 18' MIN. ETERIM ®18" MIN, INTERIOR PLAN IU VESTIBULE PLAN ® CORRIDOR PLAN 24" MIN. EXTERIOR & IB" MININUM INTERIOR BEYOND STRIKE EDGE OF A DATE OR DOOR ON ME SIDE TOWARD WHICH IT SYHNGS. .WP.q Y.= £ ® HIGH FORWARD REACH LIMIT -1 A IC- R MP LANDING AT '" I DOORWAY PLAN NOTES: 1. CLEAR SPACES MUST BE LEVEL TO PREANT WHEELCHMRS FROM ROWNG WHEN WE OCCUPANT RELEASES ME WHEEL ALLOWED FOR DRANAGE E DOOR, I/4' PER FWi IS 2. WHERE DOORS OPEN ONTO, BUT NOT INTO A CORMUCR, ME REWIRED LEVEL MCA BEYOND NE DOORS MAY BE A MINIMUM OF 48'. FOR AWNONAL INFORMATION, SEE APPLICABLE NOR:S ON PLUM ACCESSIBILITY NOTES SHEET NOTES: 1. X SHALL BE, < 25 INCHES; Z SHALL BE > X. 2. WHEN X < 20 INCHES, MEN Y SHALL BE 48 INCHES MANNUM. 3. WHEN X IS 20 TO 25 INCHES, MEN Y SHALL BE 44 INCHES MAXIMUM. ® MAXIMUM FORWARD REACH OVER AN OBSTRUCTION L ©CLEAR FLOOR SPACE HIGH AND LOW PARALLEL APPROACH © SIDE REACH LIMITS 1��96 I - EjMAXIMUM SIDE REACH OVER AN OBSTRUCTION a- oll 1 7 �$ �3 DG (A) OR (B) CANE HIM POST OR PriOU BEFORE PERSON HITS OBJECT FID. IA) L 12 Dc (B) cM+E RMCE ® PROTRUDING OBJECTS um (MIN.) GRAB BAR M M BAR CLEARPNCE NOTES AM' X M' CLEAR RODE SPACE AND 5' X 5' CM ROOK SPACE CANNOT OWEEMP ® ELAN TOILET SEAT DISPENSER (WHERE OCCURS) 1-1/2"0 DIAMETER GRAN BAR W PEENED FINISH & 250 LBS APACItt 17" TO 19" TO TOP OF MET SEAT ROLL PAPER HOLDER NOTE. MNQUT SEES ❑ B I. PROMDE PRIVACY DOOR LOCK WHEN IT 15 A PRIVATE ELEVATIONS TOILET OR FOR UNISEX USE. 2. GRAB EMS; SEE RECAL ACCESSIBIFIY NOTES SHEET. COJPRESSED CARPET 1/4' MA%. BELOW MRESHOD FIN. FLOOR LEVEL NRESHOID PILE HDGxi ® TRANSITION BETWEEN FLOOR FINISHES 4 I I/E"uAX. ® THRESHOLD I/a' uA . © LEVEL CHANGES / NOTES: 1/ LMEA%AIMUM TAL HEIGHT NE 1/4" MAXIMUM VERTICAL 1 T EDGE, 2 SLOPED BEVEL REWIRED IF LEVEL CHANCE IS OVER 1/4" VLPoTCAL LEAL CHANGE. 1/4" MAXIM SO VERTICAL LEVEL CHANCE, MARY K. CRITES III 11'Ir( I ►" f)1 ANI®YROB :1. •1 OATFOA ISSUE 03.0].2014 TAS/ADA NOTES A.2A ILA/ 01 rI nn DEMO PLAN LEGEND — — — WALLS TO II BE REMOVED �I �I DOOR &FRAME DEMO GENERAL NOTES 1. REFERENCE SITE, STRUCTURAL, ROOFING, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR RELATED WORK. 2. COORDINATE DEMOLITION WITH RENOVATION PLANS. A.9A 01 01 01 01 i 13 iiiiiii II Viii�� 02 iiiiiiiii � 02 iziiiiiii, I on, 01 I I I 11 05 oz 01 A. 9 O1 DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN (11 v SCALE: 1/4"=1'—O" TRUE NORTH DEMO KEYED NOTES 0 REMOVE SECURITY GRILLES AT WINDOW OPENINGS & AT REAR PORCH as REMOVE ALL WOOD TONGUE & GROOVE, PLYWOOD FLOORING AND SUB FLOORING 03 REMOVE TUB; REFER TO PLUMBING PLANS a4 REMOVE SIDING INFILL a5 REMOVE SIDING AND SHEATHING ab REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR REMOVAL OF COLUMN & OTHER STRUCTURAL WORK a] REMOVE STUCCO LOW WALL Oa REMOVE WOOD FRAMING MEMBERS; NET STRUCTURAL PLANS 09 REMOVE CONCRETE TOPPING AND SLAB iu REMOVE FURRING STRIPS FROM STUCCO U REMOVE MASONRY PAVERS iY EXISTING MASONRY FREESANDING WALLS. REMOVE WOOD PANELING AND EDGING. 13 REMOVE DOOR FRAME. T m MARY K. CRITES *5� ' � IRFRA, xnxaeORxnm.: 03.07.2014 DEMOLITION PLAN X. 1 DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLAN (11 v SCALE: 1/4°=1'-0' TRUE NORTH a R C 111 T E(1 GENERAL DIMENSION NOTES NOTES: El A. DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF STUD OR FACE OF EXISTING PLASTER B. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS. L166oCK Tomas 806.790.7114 maly@mkaiEes.oxn z 0 H x007 oz Pa C4�m o Co 2 L z a �aFOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLAN ,.X-i PORCH 100 of O] GATHERING 1 0 ll 101 05 0� O TRUE N.111 0 WALL TYPE LEGEND ® NEW STUD WALL g NEW WINDOW NEW CMU WALL NEW DOOR & u FRAME i EXISTING DOOR & ® I FRAME TO REMAIN GENERAL PLAN NOTES NOTES: 1, ALL EXISTING WALLS EXCEPT WHERE NOTED TO RECEIVE 5/8" TYPE X GYP BD ON NEW 2" FURRING. 2. ALL RESTROOMS AND COMMON AREAS TO COMPLY WITH TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS 3. ALL RESTROOMS TO RECEIVE (2) LAYERS OF SOUND ATTENUATING INSULATION AT ALL INTERIOR WALLS AND CEILING. 4. REFER TO SHEET A.13A FOR PARTITION TYPES. 5. COORDINATE ACCESS PANEL LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT. 04 IO O © W3 P7 03 4 05 u KEYED NOTES D1 WELD DOORS SHUT Dl NEW CONCRETE FLOOR. REFERENCE STRUCTURAL PLANS. 03 EXISTING HEARTH TO REMAIN D4 NEW FIREPLACE GRILLE, MATCH EXISTING IN MATERIAL AND DESIGN. D5 EXISTING FIREPLACE GRILLE TO REMAIN 05 CONCRETE TOPPING SLAB (HATCHED AREA) TO MATCH FEE OF ROOM 103. REFERENCE STRUCTURAL PLANS. D] SLOPE PORCH TOPPING SLAB TO DRAIN. MAX 2% SLOPE. REFERENCE STRUCTURAL PLANS. DB REFRIGERATOR BY OWNER. CONTRACTOR INSTALL D9 RANGE Q EXHAUST HOOD AND MDT FURRING ABOVE 11 INTEGRAL STAINLESS STEEL SINK IN STAINLESS STEEL COUNTER. PROVIDE TYPE 304 16 GAUGE STAINLESS STEEL #3 FINISH COUNTER. PROVIDE TYPE 304 18 GAUGE STAINLESS STEEL g4 BRUSHED FINISH AT SINKS. EASE EDGES, BOWL SIZE IS 14"X15'X6" DEEP. PROVIDE SAMPLE OF FINISH PRIOR TO FABRICATION, 12 EXISTING MASONRY WALL INSTALL NEW FIBER CEMENT PANELS TO EXISTING INSET SUBSTRATE. INSTALL FIBER CEMENT TRIM AT SILL. REINSTALL EXISTING INTEPRETIVE PANELS, 2 PER WALL. 13 OVERHEAD COILING DOOR, 6070 SIZE 1a NEW STEEL COLUMNS. REF. STRUCTURAL PLANS 1s 5 LB TYPE ABC PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER WITH BRACKET MOUNT ON WALL. 15 EXISTING WALL TO RECIEVE 5/8" TYPE X GYP BD ON EXISTING FURRING, PROVIDE 12 ADDITONAL FURRING AS NEEDED. 9 W4 WE MARY K. CRITES *. '.� If F J4. U01� GATHERING 2 103 ]o r u P7�,..,.a 02 W4 ' a. z O 16 14 GATHERING 3 14 P2 `� TORAGE 11z ls� 11 ���-1, 06 110 n 11 F 10 6 ___ ` a i N P3 oD ¢'m a z > ozQ� � P ,16 a P3 w4 W le 11 1 04 ® 02 12 "a rnWU SITTING AREA 105 104 I l31 MECHAANNICAL z Q Q m x 7 ED0 I 02 O l' 111 l2 y O F" z .4 Z 10 _ I 0FD P1 4 12 U S N 1 16 � P6 •.I ..: sro ACE-, HALJ 409. z d . ft=N" •"108 x��FOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 1 4107 I' FD ' :..r, "• , Av 16' :.II,..T� v, 16 P.4• '6 ANNOTATED FLOOR PLAN ANNOTATED FLOOR PLAN 1 SCALE: 1/4`=1'-0" OA ® OA O O GATHERING 1 CP b 'b 101 KITCHEN J�A_�o� 102 Y 11 OA ® •AE OA o JOIST 14" X 24"' WOOD BLOCKING 5/8- GYP BD 02 ACCESS PANEL .01 TRIM, PAINTED SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-C" ® AE OA OA 1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN (11 v SCALE: 1/4°=1'-0' TRUE NORTH ®x O SAE OA OA GATHERING 2 SAEFi-o-31 OA OA h0.-- OA OA O RCP/CEILING TYPE LEGEND GYP CEILING ® BEADED PORCH CEILING PANEL RCP/LIGHTING LEGEND RECESSED TROFFER FIXTURE WALL MOUNTED LIGHT LOCATED AT CEIUNG LEVEL O RECESSED DOWN LIGHT z HVAC SUPPLY GRILLE ® EXHAUST FAN © 14' X 24` ACCESS PANEL -SEE DETAIL 02/A16 NO ES: 1. REFERENCE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PLANS FOR INFORMAPON CONCERNING LIGHT FIXTURES, GRILLES AND ACCESS PANELS. 2. COORDINATE WITH STRUCTURAL PLANS. OA le ® OA Al OA ® OA OA GATHERING 3 112 �A •AE OA oA oA 0A SAE OA OA MARY K. CRITES t'`W. If IN O x>z 0.01W6�x Pa C4�m C>~�D>O o2 a HWo� a �AFOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN '.X. GENERAL NOTE KEYED NOTES NOTES: al NOT USED 1. OWNER WILL FURNISH, CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL, TOILET PAPER DISPENSERS, UP GRAB BARS PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS, AND SOAP DISPENSORS. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE LOCATION OF THESE ACCESSORIES TO MEET ACCESSIBILITY a3 MOP/BROOM HOLDER REQUIREMENTS o< TOILET PARTITION O a5 URINAL SCREEN 06 MIRROR ♦♦♦•.♦♦♦.♦♦♦♦♦/ I m INN1 02 NLARGED MEN'S TOILET PLAN - RM 107 SCALE: 3/4"=1'-0" „ 1 NLARGED WOMEN'S TOILET PLAN - RM 105 v I SCALE: 3/4"=V-0" le" MARY K. CRITES r�'rr :1. •1 �T A 0 x�7 OZQ. tp��m w �D ox�7 o U W z z a ��FOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 ENLARGED TOILET PLANS S.A.7 FLOOR FINISHES F 2 ❑ F_3 ❑ 4 FLOOR FINISH NOTLS: g DENOTES A TRANSITON BETWEEN TYPES OF FLOOR FINISHES W/O TRANSITION STRIP DENOTES A TRANSITION STRIP IS NEEDED; REF FINISH LEGEND ON A.14 1. REFERENCE A.14 FOR ADDITIONAL FLOOR FINISH INFORMATION 2. IN ROOMS WITH FLOOR DRAINS SLOPE FLOORS TO DRAIN. 3, ROOM 111 HAS RAISED CONCRETE PAD FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. REFERENCE MECHANICAL PLANS. 4. MAKE TRANSITION STARIGHT BETWEEN POLISHED AND SEALED CONCRETE. D e p ° ° D C 71 GATHERING 2 b e p D 103 > e e o e D- � pe D n n p b- GATHERING 3 GATHERING 1, b STORAGE 1O7 P b° D° 110 102 ° D e �— -= WOMEN p SITTING AREA FO 05 104 MECHANICAL D p ®FU e o e B p ° - STORAGE — — °HALL D 109 106 / b ° 107 08 Fu OFLOOR FINISH PLAN n� v 1 SCALE: 1/4"=1'-O" TRUE NORTH MARY K. CRITES �A1FOR ISSUE O3.O7.2O14 FLOOR FINISH PLAN A.8 GENERAL NOTES - DEMOLITION EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1. REFERENCE SITE, STRUCTURAL, ROOF, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR RELATED DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WORK. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXTENT OF DEMOLITION. 0 1 ORTH ELEVATION - DEMO iJ SCALE: 1/4"=1'-O" oWEST ELEVATION - DEMO �L SCALE: 1/4"=V-0" (KEYED NOTES - DEMOLITION EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS of REFER TO ROOF PLAN FOR REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION OF CLAY TILE ROOF 02 REMOVE EXISTING STEEL WINDOW GRILLE 03 REMOVE EXISTING SIDING ® REMOVE EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME os REMOVE HVAC UNIT AND STAND ® REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE o NOT USED ® REMOVE SIDING AND ADJACENT GATE INFILLING PORCH ® REMOVE INFILL AT SILL 10 REMOVE DOOR, FRAME & TRANSOM >> REMOVE EXISTING SIDING & WALL FRAMING; COORDINATE WITH STRUCTURAL PLAN REMOVE STUCCO LOW WALL 13 REMOVE STUCCO WALL FOR NEW DOOR LOCATION MARY K. CRITES *. '.� If >nY i ��FOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS DEMOLITION S.A.9 GENERAL NOTES - DEMOLITION EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1. REFERENCE SITE, STRUCTURAL, ROOF, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR RELATED DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WORK. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXTENT OF DEMOLITION. SOUTH ELEVATION - DEMO v.� SCALE: 1/4"=1'-O" 0EAST ELEVATION - DEMO vT SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0" IKEYED NOTES - DEMOLITION EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 0 REFER TO ROOF PLAN FOR REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION OF CLAY TILE ROOF 02 REMOVE EXISTING STEEL WINDOW GRILLE 03 REMOVE EXISTING SIDING 04 REMOVE EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME ® REMOVE HVAC UNIT AND STAND ® REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE o) NOT USED ® REMOVE SIDING AND ADJACENT GATE INFILLING PORCH ® REMOVE INFILL AT SILL 10 REMOVE DOOR, FRAME & TRANSOM 11 REMOVE EXISTING SIDING & WALL FRAMING; COORDINATE WITH STRUCTURAL PLAN 12 REMOVE STUCCO LOW WALL tb REMOVE STUCCO WALL FOR NEW DOOR LOCATION MARY K. CRITES *. '.� If �Y z 0 H x>z oz 0.1 C4�m GL �D o0 L z a ��FOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS DEMOLITION S.EA.9A EXTERIOR FINISH LEGEND PROJECT: LAII—R Cope Mabrialalauripllsn Manufamm Pmpucl Num l Color I Remarks PAINT EP-1 PAINT GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL A0732 TUSCANTAN EP-2 PAINT GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL M657 COASTAL TRAIL EP-3 PAINT GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL A1230 DOLPHIN DEN EP4 PAINT GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL A1397 RIBBON DANCE NOTES 1) ALL MATERIALS TO BE SUBMITTED TO ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 2) IREFER TO ELEVATIONS FOR SPECIFIC DESIGN PATTERNS AND MATERIAL APPLICATIONS. EP-4 EP-1 EP-4 EP-4 NORTH ELEVATION - RENOVATED V I GENERAL NOTES - RENOVATED EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1. REFERENCE SITE, STRUCTURAL, ROOF, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR RELATED WORK. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY CONDITIONS AND EXTENT OF WORK. 3. AT DOOR AND WINDOW LOCATIONS: REMOVE LOOSE MATERIAL. CLEAN AND REPAIR SURFACE AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE ACCEPTABLE SURFACE. APPLY BROWN COAT AT REPAIRED AREAS AS NEEDED ACHIEVING AN EVEN JOINT WITH THE FACE OF NEW DOOR OR WINDOW AT HEAD, JAMB AND SILL LOCATIONS. PROVIDE 2% SLOPE TO STUCCO AT WINDOW SILLS. RE —SKIM AND FLOAT NEW TOP COAT OVER BROWN COAT MATCHING ADJACENT FINISH. APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING. 4. GENERAL CRACKS AND HOLES IN WALL SURFACES: INSTALL CRACK FILLER MATERIAL IN ALL LARGE SURFACE CRACKS AND HOLES PRIOR TO STUCCO/ELASTOMERIC SEALANT. 5. REFERENCE MECHANICAL PLANS FOR VENT PIPING PENETRATING ROOF. 6. COORDINATE GRADE NTH LANDSCAPE PLANS. V L vvvi SCALE: 1/4"=V-0" ONLY KEYED NOTES - RENOVATED EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 01 REINSTALLED ROOF; NEW GUTTER & EAVE TRIM; REF. ROOFING PLANS 02 NOT USED 03 CHIMNEY CAP; REF ROOF PLANS ® NOT USED 05 STEEL TUBE COLUMN, PAINTED, REF STRUCTURE ® PLAQUE TO REMAIN, PROTECT 0] STEEL TUBE, PAINTED, REFRENCE STRUCTURE OB NEW STUCCO OVER NEW WALL SUBSTRATE. APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING. ® REPAIR AND PAINT LOUVER t0 REATTACH AS NEEDED AND PREP/PAINT EXISTING METAL UNDER —FLOOR VENT GRILLE l NOT USED NOT USED t3 REMOVE LOOSE MATERIAL. CLEAN AND REPAIR SURFACE AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE ACCEPTABLE SURFACE. APPLY BROWN COAT AT REPAIRED AREAS AS NEEDED. RE —SKIN AND FLOAT NEW SAND FINISH COAT (TEXTURE TO MATCH WALL AT NOTE 14) ON ENTIRE SURFACE. APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING. II REMOVE EXISTING FURRING. CLEAN AND REPAIR SURFACE, MATCHING EXISTING STUCCO FINISH. APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING IS REMOVE LOOSE MATERIAL, CLEAN AND REPAIR SURFACE AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE ACCEPTABLE SURFACE. APPLY NEW TOP COAT WHERE EXISTING IS MISSING OR DAMAGED. BLEND NEW TOP COAT TO MATCH EXISTING TEXTURE. APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING. 16 REMOVE EXISTING PATCHED STUCCO AT AND BELOW THE WALL LOUVER. RE —PATCH STUCCO, WITH FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING TEXTURE. I] CLEAN JOINT OF OLD MATERIAL. PATCH STUCCO AS NEEDED, MATCH EXISTING TEXTURE. SEAL JOINT WITH SILICONE SEALANT. to REMOVE LOOSE MATERIAL. CLEAN AND REPAIR SURFACE AS NEEDED TO PROVDE ACCEPTABLE SURFACE. APPLY BROWN COAT, RE —SKIM AND FLOAT NEW TOP COAT ON ENTIRE SURFACE MATCHING EXISTING ADJACENT TEXTURE. APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING. I9 APPLY NEW STUCCO TO WALL SUBSTRATE AT HEAD, JAMB AND SILL LOCATIONS. APPLY STUCCO FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT TEXTURE. APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING. 20 PATCH MASONRY WALL AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE LEVEL SURFACE FOR NEW STUCCO, 2t OVERHEAD COILING DOOR zz GOOSENECK UNIT —REFERENCE MECHANICAL PLANS n MECHANICAL UNITS —REFERENCE MECHANICAL PLANS 2a DOWNSPOUT AND CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCK. REFERENCE ROOFING PLANS. 25 GUTTER MARY K. CRITES Y�" ''1 l�f �n tFOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 xE` EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS — RENOVATED A.10 EXTERIOR FINISH LEGEND PROJECT: LANOWER Code mmid'KDesmiption Manuladumr Pmducl Num l Com Remarks PAINT EP-1 PAINT GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL A0732 TUSCAN TAN EP-2 PAINT GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL A0657 COASTALTRAIL EP3 PAINT GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL A1230 DOLPHIN DEN EP4 PAINT GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL A1397 RIBBON DANCE NOTES 1) JAL MATERIALS TO BE SUBMITTED TO ARCHITECT FORAPPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALEANON. 2) 1 REFER TO ELEVATIONS FOR SPECIFIC DESIGN PATTERNS AND MATERIAL APPLICATIONS. nSOUTH ELEVATION - RENOVATED \___/ SCALE: 1 /4"=1'—O" GENERAL NOTES - RENOVATED EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1. REFERENCE SITE, STRUCTURAL, ROOF, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR RELATED WORK. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY CONDITIONS AND EXTENT OF WORK. 3. AT DOOR AND WINDOW LOCATIONS: REMOVE LOOSE MATERIAL. CLEAN AND REPAIR SURFACE AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE ACCEPTABLE SURFACE. APPLY BROWN COAT AT REPAIRED AREAS AS NEEDED ACHIEVING AN EVEN JOINT WITH THE FACE OF NEW DOOR OR WINDOW AT HEAD, JAMB AND SILL LOCATIONS. PROVIDE 2% SLOPE TO STUCCO AT WINDOW SILLS. RE -SKIM AND FLOAT NEW TOP COAT OVER BROWN COAT MATCHING ADJACENT FINISH. APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING. 4. GENERAL CRACKS AND HOLES IN WALL SURFACES: INSTALL CRACK FILLER MATERIAL IN ALL LARGE SURFACE CRACKS AND HOLES PRIOR TO STUCCO/ELASTOMERIC SEALANT, 5. REFERENCE MECHANICAL PLANS FOR VENT PIPING PENETRATING ROOF. 6. COORDINATE GRADE WITH LANDSCAPE PLANS. IKEYED NOTES - RENOVATED EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS I 01 REINSTALLED ROOF; NEW GUTTER & EAVE TRIM; REF. ROOFING PLANS os NOT USED ® CHIMNEY CAP; REF ROOF PLANS 04 NOT USED ® STEEL TUBE COLUMN, PAINTED, REF STRUCTURE ® PLAQUE TO REMAIN, PROTECT 0] STEEL TUBE, PAINTED, REFRENCE STRUCTURE I@ NEW STUCCO OVER NEW WALL SUBSTRATE. APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING. ® REPAIR AND PAINT LOUVER to REATTACH AS NEEDED AND PREP/PAINT EXISTING METAL UNDER -FLOOR VENT GRILLE t NOT USED t2 NOT USED t3 REMOVE LOOSE MATERIAL. CLEAN AND REPAIR SURFACE AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE ACCEPTABLE SURFACE. APPLY BROWN COAT AT REPAIRED AREAS AS NEEDED. RE -SKIN AND FLOAT NEW SAND FINISH COAT (TEXTURE TO MATCH WALL AT NOTE 14) ON ENTIRE SURFACE. APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING. 14 REMOVE EXISTING FURRING. CLEAN AND REPAIR SURFACE, MATCHING EXISTING STUCCO FINISH. APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING 15 REMOVE LOOSE MATERIAL. CLEAN AND REPAIR SURFACE AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE ACCEPTABLE SURFACE. APPLY NEW TOP COAT WHERE EXISTING IS MISSING OR DAMAGED. BLEND NEW TOP COAT TO MATCH EXISTING TEXTURE, APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING. t6 REMOVE EXISTING PATCHED STUCCO AT AND BELOW THE WALL LOUVER. RE -PATCH STUCCO, WITH FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING TEXTURE, 1T CLEAN JOINT OF OLD MATERIAL. PATCH STUCCO AS NEEDED, MATCH EXISTING TEXTURE. SEAL JOINT WITH SILICONE SEALANT. to REMOVE LOOSE MATERIAL. CLEAN AND REPAIR SURFACE AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE ACCEPTABLE SURFACE. APPLY BROWN COAT, RE -SKIM AND FLOAT NEW TOP COAT ON ENTIRE SURFACE MATCHING EXISTING ADJACENT TEXTURE, APPLY ELASTOMERIC COATING. 19 APPLY NEW STUCCO TO WALL SUBSTRATE AT HEAD, JAMB AND SILL LOCATIONS. APPLY STUCCO FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT TEXTURE. APPLY ELASTOMERIC COALING. zo PATCH MASONRY WALL AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE LEVEL SURFACE FOR NEW STUCCO. 2I OVERHEAD COILING DOOR z2 GOOSENECK UNIT -REFERENCE MECHANICAL PLANS 23 MECHANICAL UNITS -REFERENCE MECHANICAL PLANS 2a DOWNSPOUT AND CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCK- REFERENCE ROOFING PLANS. GUTTER MARY K. CRITES *5. 'W. Ill 4 0 x>z oz 0.1 C4�m GL ED 02 z� FWo UQ� z a �n FOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 xEer EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS - RENOVATED S.EA. l0A @EN'S RESTROOM SCALE- 1/2" = 1'-0" RM. 107 �w1E1'1RESTROOM V T SCALE: 1 N1011 EN'S RESTROOM V � SCALE: 1 2 = 1 -0 RM. 131 �wIEN'S RESTROOM @��WOMEN'S RESTROOM ��SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" RM. 105 �Sz WOMEN'S RESTROOM KEYED NOTES 01 VENT HOOD. uz PAINTED MDF BOARD FURRING ABOVE VENT. 03 pLgM CLAD 3/4" PLYWOOD PANEL, PAINTED BANDED EDGE. •RCIIii E(I ® STAINLESS STEEL COUNTER, BACK SPLASH AND SKIRT ® RANGE BULLNOSE TO TO MATCH T-2 To LT6Uak, Texas 806.790.7114 ft�R�(CIdaS.OJfn EN'S RESTROOM O SCALE- 12 = 1 -0 RM. 107 I W0MEN'S RESTROOM V V SCALE: 12 = 1 -0 RM. 105 KITCHEN 102 CONSULTANTS: To nwerw�� rm��E o, T-2 KBLandArohitecWre 2 z 0 H x�z �z 0.1 C4�m O�x�7 o U E4 z �R L z a ��IFOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A.11 10 IICHEN SCALE: 1 2 = 1 -0 RM. 102 TSITTING AREA FIREPLACE �`JSCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" EM_ 104 ��1SOUTH WALL \GATHERING SCALE: 1 2 = 1 -0 RM. 101 `�N �I�/NTRY �TJ SCALE: 1/2" - 1' 0" RM. 103 /I �T `I'VHLL JHINYLt I L SCALE: 1 2 = 1 -0 RM. 102 A NLARGED ELEVATION B NLARGED ELEVATION -0° WALL TILE FINISH LEGEND [:] T 2 MT-1 M T-4 M 1-5 6 ❑ ❑ T-7 ❑T-8 5/8" GYP BD 1 1/4" X 2" PAINTED WOOD TRIM PLAM ON 3/4" PLYWOOD LAM CAP 16 SCALE: 1 , 2 = , -0 KEYED NOTES Q NOT USED ® CENTER WALL PROTECTION PANELS ON WALL. Q PLAM CLAD 3/4" PLYWOOD PANEL, PAINTED BANDED EDGE Q VENT HOOD WTH PAINTED MDF FURRING ABOVE Q CERAMIC TILE INSET PANEL, SEE ENLARGED ELEVATION A. © CERAMIC TILE INSET PANEL, SEE ENLARGED ELEVATION B. Q CERAMIC TILE INSET PANEL, SEE ENLARGED ELEVATION C. Q EXISTING MASONRY FIREPLACE MARY K. CRITES *5 ''. ���FOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A. l I WINDOW SCHEDULE MARK TYPE UNIT SUE ROUGH OPENING MATERIAL HEADIJAMB SILL COMMENTS DOUBLE W1 HUNG, FIXED 32x56 3231456-314 ALUM CLAD WOOD 11IA13 101A13 NO SASH LIFT DOUBLE INCLUDES HALF CIRCLE W2 HUNG, FIXED 4063 40-3I493314 ALUM CLAD WOOD 11IA13 101A13 TRANSOM, NO SASH LIFT DOUBLE W3 HUNG, FIXED 33-1266 34-11466314 ALUM CLAD WOOD 1IIA13 101A13 NO SASH LIFT CASEMENT, W4 FIXED 3572x49-114 36-11450 ALUM CLAD WOOD 81A13 7IA13 CASEMENT W6 FIXED (3)36314x49-114 110.314x511 ALUM CLAD WOOD 8IA13 7IA13 DOUBLE W6 HUNG, FIXED 21Z2.114 21314x53 ALUM CLAD WOOD 81A13 7/A13 NOSASHLIFT •RC111i E(1 Gi Lubbock Texas ® ® 806. 790. 7114 Ell ' nLay(1�mkaRes.oxn ®® !2===E TYPE: A TYPE: B TYPE: C* TYPE:1 TYPE:2 TYPE:3 coNsuuATs: HOLLOW METAL HOLLOW METAL STEEL HOLLOW METAL HOLLOW METAL STEEL cx ��mrvmx POLYSTYRENE CORE POLYSTYRENE CORE FAUX FRENCH ODOR DOOR FRAME DOOR FRAME DOOR FRAME EXTERIOR DOOR INTERIOR DOOR PAINT PANT PAINT DOOR TYPES FRAME PROFILE & TYPE *NOTE: DOOR & FRAME TO BE FIXED & MATCH EXISTING DOORS/FRAMES E, & E2 APPEARANCE KBLantlArchi,e�cture ■ Ll orm® z TYPE: WI TYPE: W2 TYPE: W3 TYPE: W4 x 9 a DOUBLE HUNG SIMULATED DOUBLE HUNG, SIMULATED DOUBLE HUNG SIMULATED CASEMENT AXED U r7 WITH HALF CIRCLE Z, > Q, Q Dc oac4�m aV �x Cx.0>_o O2 UQ.. d .a TYPE: W5 TYPE: W6 TRIPLE CASEMENT FIXED DOUBLE HUNG SIMULATED TYPE: G1 GLASS ONLY GLAZING TO MATCH CLASS SPECIFIED FOR WINDOWS xA�FOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 WINDOW TYPES GLASS TYPE �E WINDOW AND DOOR ELEVATIONS A.12 STUCCO BACKER ROD & SILICONE SEALANT SILICONE SEALANT 5/8" GYP NO, TYP 3-5/8" MTL STUDS STEEL STUD ANCHOR SEALANT, TYP HOLLOW MTL FRAME DOOR MASONRY FURRING -DEPTH VARIES 5/8" GYP BD STEEL LINTELS AT HEAD ONLY REF STRUCT SEALANT WALL ANCHOR AT JAMB HOLLOW MTL FRAME nn�! OLLOW MTL HEAD & JAMB DETAIL AT STUD WALLS \v/HOLLOW MTL HEAD & JAMB DETAIL @HOLLOW MTL HEAD DETAIL �JSCALE: 3" = 1'-0' �V/ SCALE: 3' = 1'-0" ��SCALE: EXISTING MASONRY OPENING FURRING 5/8" GYP BD WD SHIM STUCCO VAPOR BARRIER MTL CLIP SEALANT WD SHOE MOULD BACKER ROD & SILICONE SEALANT SILICONE SEALANT EXISTING MASONRY OPENING FURRING 5/8° GYP BD MASONRY WD SHIM FURRING VAPOR BARRIER 5/8" GYP BI1 MTL CLIP L SEALANT STUCCO SEALANT SHOE MOULD BACKER ROD & EXTENDED ST SILICONE SEALANT WALL AT DOO STEEL FRAME DOOR DOUBLE HUNG WINDOW HEAD & JAMB DETAIL CASEMENT WINDOW HEAD & JAMB DETAIL SCALE: 3° - 1' 0" V V SCALE: 3° SILICON BACK SILICON NEW STUCCO, DOUBLE HUNG WINDOW SILL DETAIL v SCALE: 3" = I-O° SILICONE SEALANT BACKER ROD & SILICONE SEALANT ;EALANT NEW STUCCO, SLOPE 10% TO DRAIN VD STOOL, PAINT VD SHIM :XISTTNG MASONRY OPENING URRING i/8" GYP BD V J SC STEEL HEAD & JAMB DETAIL ALE: 3" = I'-O" WALL WD STOOL, PAINT STEEL FRAME MTL CLIP DOOR VAPOR BARRIER STL ANGLE; SEAL JOINTS WD SHIM FLOOR EXISTING MASONRY OPENING FURRING 5/8" GYP BD *NOTE: WELD DOOR CLOSED -INOPERABLE CASEMENT WINDOW SILL DETAIL TEEL SILL DETAIL V / SCALE: 3" = I' 0" SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" \F/OLLOW MTL JAMB DETAIL 02 SCALE: 3" = I'-(° @)HO 1LLOW MTL SILL DETAIL STUCCO 5/8" GYP BD, TYP MASONRY WD FURRING SEALANT, TYP HOLLOW MTL FRAME STEEL LINTELS; REF STRUCT BACKER ROD & SILICONE SEALANT STUCCO 5/8" GYP BD, TYP MASONRY WD FURRING SEALANT, TYP HOLLOW MTL FRAME WALL ANCHOR SHIM AS REQUIRED BACKER ROD & SILICONE SEALANT STUCCO HOLLOW METAL FRAME DOOR THRESHOLD YAM MARY K. CRITES *5 ''. F. z 0 H x007 oz 0.1 C4�m GL ED 00 L z ,-a �nFOR ISSUE O3.O7.2O14 DOOR DETAILS ���A.13 @6 WALL SECTION SCALE: 3/4" - 1' 0" 11 5� W tt se TO tt aA ncvAmnS FOR T tt EMSNNG OR. N O—u 05 FIREPLACE SCALE: 3/4" 3/4'WFORNNG — SEW �GF REF GYP W COLWG W ¢lNG W CPoVNG EwSTxC uASONPx Ell MGASONPY .4 CO STUD .-0 NASGNRY P%P vW SRO G INI NRRING 12111 OE&EDTO° �� W EMnG 5/B' IYPE %GYP W 5/P" ME % GYP W WW CMI 5/e' ttPE % CYP W IEWENRPoNG, OR Off NEW ORO WNl0.001. EPNG% x9 SW/e' TYPE N GYP fUP 5/P' ttPE % C1P ul P1> <a> <E>P5 PARTITION TYPES SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" W W 10ER:(2) E RFS NA SEFOR uWNTEV CO,RTER OR COVn1ER PLAM CN PANEL F- W; PEE NW SlfFl REP NW STEEL; REF �%KITCHEN T SCALE: 3/4" - 1' 0` NW h6 REF 04 FIREPLACE SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" ( 2i a oN0W PLYkll JU VNATE TEP R 'R'C" E TYP. LAV W/ADA CLEARANCE; n�SS COUNTERTOP v L SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" DORCH SECTION ALE: 3/4" = Y-0" P7 MARY K. CRITES Kim z 0 x�7 IDDW6�x 0.1 C4�m GL �D o2 o Q z a °A1FOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 SECTIONS SNEA. 13A FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM ROOM NAME FLOOR BASE WALLS CEILING COMMENTS NORTH SOUTH EAST WEST 101 GATHERING C-2 VB-1 P-MFVWC-3' P-2 P-IISF-IN4C-1 P-IISF-IIWC-1 P-1ISF-1hYG1, P4 P-5 REF A.77-1fA 102 KITCHEN C-2 VB-1 P-VSF-iWG1 P4 P-0 P4 P-5 REFA.11-11A 103 GATHERING 0-2 VB-1 P-2JSF-1AVG2 P-21SFAA4C-2 AMC P-21S" '2' P-21SF-lANC-2 P-5 REFA.11-11A 104 SITTING C-2 VB-1 P-DSF-lMC-2 P-2J5 P11WG2, P-21SFAMC-2 P-2ISF-IA4C-2 P-5 REF A.11-1fA 105 WOMEN T-1 T-2 T-2, T3, T-5 T-2,T-3, T5 T-2, T3, T-5 T-2, T3, T-5 P-5 REFA.11-11A 106 HALL 0 VB-1 P-2JSF-1WG1 P-21SF-1AVC-1 P-2JSF-1NIG2 P-21SF-lAVC-1 P-5 REFA.11-11A 107 MEN T-1 T-2 T-2, T3, T4 T-2, T-3, T4 T-2, T3, T-0 T-2, T3, T-0 P-5 REF A.11-11A 108 JANITOR C-1 VB-1 P-2 P-2 P-2 P-2 P-5 109 STORAGE 1 C-1 VB-1 P-2 P-2 P-2 P-2 P-5 110 STORAGE2 C-1 VB-1 P-2 P-2 P2 P-2 P-5 ill MECH C-1 VB-1 P-2 P-2 P-2 P-2 NONE 112 GATHERING 0-2 V3-1 PAISF-11WG1 P-AFMC-3 P-11SPANC-1 PAISF-IANC-1 P-5 REFA.11-11A NOTES 1. ALL FINISHES REFERENCE TRUE NORTH 2. WHEN MULTIPLE FINISHES REFERENCED SEE SAMPLES: A) W-11MC-2AV-2 = W-1 ABOVE M 2 ABOVE W-2. REFERENCE APPLICABLE PLAN PAGES. B) W-1, MC-2, W-2 =ALL FINISHES USED. REFERENCE APPLICABLE PLAN PAGES. ® 1 WALL FINISH PLAN SCALE: 1/8"4-0" TRUE NORTH INTERIOR FINISH LEGEND PROJECT: LANDWER Code Mmerial11) ipden ManuBclumr Produk NumlGobr Remarks PAINT P-1 PAINT GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL A1272 SARONDALE BLUE P-2 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE HC-37 MYSTIC GOLD P3 PAINT GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL A1743 OTTER BROOK Pi PAINT GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL DEEP SPICE KITCHEN AREA PE PAINT GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL RIS69M WHITE CEILING TILE CONTINENTAL SLATE T-1 PORCELAIN TILE DALTILE CS55 MOROCCAN BROWN GROUT: CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS 1152 TOBACCO BROWN 12X12 USE COVE A3401 WHERE INDICATED; REF INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A.11-A.11A SEMI -GLOSS T-2 CERAMICTILE DALTILE 0161 URBAN PUTTY USE BULLNOSE A4269 WHERE INDICATED; REF INTERIOR 6X6 ELEVATIONSA17A.11A GROUT: CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS N382 BONE MATTE T3 CERAMICTILE DALTILE 0161 URBAN PUTTY GROUT: CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS#382 BONE BX6 SEMI -GLOSS T4 CERAMICTILE DALTILE 1469 GALAXY GROUT: CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS#382 BONE 6X6 SEMI -GLOSS T-5 CERAMICTILE DALTILE O093 FIREBRICK GROUT: CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS N382 BONE 6X6 SEMI -GLOSS Tfi CERAMICTILE DALTILE D144 ARTISAN BROWN GROUT: CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS N382 BONE 6X6 SEMI -GLOSS T-7 CERAMICTILE DALTILE 0191 GOLD COAST GROUT; CUB TOM BUILDING PRODUCTS#382 BONE 6X6 SEMI -GLOSS TA CERAMIC TILE DALTILE O049 OCEAN BLUE GROUT: CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS N382 BONE 6X6 CONCRETE G1 SEALED CONCRETE G2 POLISHEDCONCRETE WALL COVERING WC-1 WALL PROTECTION PANEL ACROVYN d303 CARAMEL TEXTURE: IRISH LINEN REFERENCE A.I4 FOR WALL FINISH PLAN WC-2 ABRASION RESISTANT WALL COVERING KOROGARD TPSUl" LA SPINETTA MAVAG4M45 REFERENCE A.I4 FOR WALL FINISH PLAN WC3 PLASTIC LAMINATE PIONITE AT740 MOLTEN METAL REFERENCEA.I4 FORWALL FINISH PLAN BASE V&1 VINN1 BASE ROPPE 141 LIGHT BROWN 4 COVE SPECAILTY FINISH SF-1 IFEATURE RAIL JACROWN 1#303CARAMEL SF-2 BEADED BOARD PANEL PAINTED EP-2 REFERENCE A.10-10A FOR EXTERIOR FINISH______ SF-3 IWOOD CAP I IPAINTED P3 IREFERENCE 161A.11A FOR DETAIL NOTES 1) ALL MATERIALS TO BE SUBMITTED TO DESIGNER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. SUBSTITUTES ONLY BY DESIGNER APPROVAL. 2) REFER TO ELEVATIONS, WALL FINISH PLAN, AND FLOOR FINISH PLAN FOR SPECIFIC DESIGN PAT TERNS AND MATERIAL APPLICATIONS. �.LINTERIClRD.RS,.Cl.RFIA.IS,..INTERI.RllIN..STCIBE.IN.DP3 3) MARY K. CRITES *. '.� If �A1FOR ISSUE 03.07.2014 FINISH LEGEND AND SCHEDULE IHI A.14 H553yx3y xy COLUMN OLISHED FINISH EXISTING MASONRY WITH BASE FL3 xrV "x10" EXISTING FO�CRRESWALL >Y" NON -SHRINK MASONRY SEE ARCHLAB GROUT WALL s3 BARS AT u9 BARS IBA O.C. AT 18" OC, EWAY EACH WAY 141-%"DIA. x 18" ANCHOR RODS. BEND TO AVOID EXISTING FOOTING IF REQUIRED • _________________ • as EXISTING SPACE ________ ___ FOOTING STRENGTH BACKFILL MO TERIAL EX15TING IFLOWFILLL CONTRACTOR FOOTING SHALLI Oi COVER INSIDE FACE OF UNDERFLOOR VENT BEFORE PLACING FLOWF1LL NOT REMOVE THE EXISTINGETE. DO E%TERIOR VENT COVER, SEE ARCH. FOR LOCATION. Q2 SLOPE FLOOR SLAB UNIFORMLY FROM EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB ELEVATION DOWN TO THE to ELEVATION OF THE NEW DOOR W SILLS. Q O9 REFER TO ARCHITECT FOR DROPS Z AT DOORS AND SLOPE OF THE c PORCH SLAB. 5� } ® 4" MINIMUM TO FACE OF EX15TING V W DOOR JAMB. CONTRACTOR FIELD Y LOCATE, TYR F CRAWL SPACE 4ND QUANTITY OF FLOW FILL REQUIRED. 6" 3' CLR. FOORTNGDO N3 SIDE NOTE 1 NEW REMOVE EXISTING WOOD #5 x 36" DOWELS F 5 FLOOR SHEATHING AND EXISTING SUBGRADE, 4'-O' (x5'-O°7 FRAMING AS REQUIRED, H TERIAL T LOOSE AT IE" O.C. INTO SIDE u5 BARS AT O O.C. REFER TO ARC MATERIAL TO 9C OF XISTINT FOOTING, EACH WAY, TOP AND STANDARD PROCTOR ANCHOR INTO EXISTING BOTTOM WRH AFHILTHIT-HT CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY DEPTH SSET 200 STEM OF EXISTING FOOTING, BOTTOM OF (6" N EMBEDMENT) NEW FOOTING SHALL BE SAME AS BOTTOM OF EXISTING FOOTING. %11 SECTION SECTION S1.1 SCALE SCALfi I'-O" SONR LI POSHED FINISH POLISHED FINISH T CONCRETE NEW CONCRETE SLAB CONCRETE WALL SEED RCH.AB �T FLWT0. LCCBITH SEE OARCH AB � SAME ELEVATION LC AT ATION-AS AS / SAMEALL EL EVAT ONTHE 13 BARS AT EXISTING CONCRETE tt3 BARS THE EXISTING SLABS IEBA O.C. AT IB" O.0 EACH WAY EACH WAY EXISTING SLAB e' a • EXISTING FILL EXISTING CRAWL SPACE MASONRY FILL EXISTING CRAWL SPACE WITH CONTROLLED MATERIAL WITH CONTROLLED MATERIAL (FLOWFILL). CONTRACTOR IFLOWFILL). CONTRACTOR SMALL FIELD MEASURE DEPTH SHALL FIELD MEASURE DEPTH OF CRAWL SPACE AND QUANTITY EXISTING EXISTING OF FLOWFILL REQUIRED. FOOTING OF FRAOWFLI5Lp CE AND QUANTITY FOOTING -RED EXISTING SUBGRADE, RECOMPACT LOOSE EXISTING SUBGRADE, MATERIAL TO 95S RECOMPACT LOOSE STANDARD PROCTOR MATERIAL TO 95Y. MOTE: REMOVE EXISTING WOOD STANDARDPROCTOR NOTE: REMOVE EXISTING WOOD FLOOR SHEATHING AND FLOOR SHEATHING AND RAMING ASREQUIRED, REQUIRED, e3 SECTION REFER TQ ARG %4� SECTION REFER To ARCH. S1.1 SCALE: 3/q" = 1 SCALE " = I'-O" EXISTING OR NEW EXISTING STUD WALL MAALONRY NEW POLISHED CONCRETE TOPPING SLAB AT THE ELE ON FABRIC (FLAT SHEETS) RE THE EXISTINGTSLAB,S SEE ARCH, SPECIFI 11- ED �� PO�LBISOHEEDD FMISHNDING ENT r SHEETS AS SPECIFIED IRE I FABRIC PROVIDED IN FLAT CONCRETE SHEETS c=00 n SLAB APPLY BONDING AGENT �1TOOTING SECTION OREMAIN SECTION S1.1 SCALE �/4" -1'-Q" S1.1 SCALE: r^ - I—. CONTRACTOR SHALL F ALL EXMTNG DMENSIO CONDITIONS PRIOR TO AND CONSTRUCTION. COLUMN SCHECULE Cl AND BASE %-VO-COLUMN WITH CAPFER FE)TO S/Yx3y" AND BASE R�"xi0"al0", REFER TO 2/511. C2 HSS5x5x3/,6 COLUMN REFER TO 2/521 AND 5/53.1. EXISTING FOUNDATION PLAN ARCHITECT ED Lubbock, Texas 806.790.7114 mary@mkcrites.com SA.PSJf` '�56920 L' co eCx ��clry Fl SIRUl NDTES GENERAL Contractor s erify a .idling c ndil d etc. I. Me fieltl and .port any tlisc ep ciesvto Me Afdhilecl/Engineer prior to starting ether -at -lion work. 2. Contractor obeli compare oil dimensions and sections shown oh Me Stucturol Drawings with the structural .^_Drawing. and p y iacreponW to the A-h t prior to fabricating or insfo 9 3. TM1e nG-troctor shall be t reapomsible for providing safe antl otlequate shoring for .II part. of the t 4. Shocp Drowinge shall be fumiahed for rev . before any fabrication and drectlon is at.rt Poorly Sh pp Drawimga s FurnisM1 for pOrop... d ding eo,ddwow.ai edteei �yo�a fb�y ulna, .edun,ef9e ce�e.oi coo-°oio.15n nfiprednen9gh SUDm NdIA o d Shop Drawings belore submission to Englneer for StLg9tgmLIIlgOg_f1Off 9e19J.6_sbd'I o� tluced for u= 99[LSLthe_SDnm nr"w;^a<. Nlow wo w or Englneer to review. FMDT/lORK 1. The fo aThe ntl vegetation` if asniy9 oil is to be cleared of exi g untlabon p g, ebns, tree roots, b. The a oddl soil is to Men be s fidd to a ddpth o al least 6". processed al o slightly above.optimum moisture content, and compacted to alf1.- 95% of maximum dry density in cordance with ASTM D698 (Stand- Proctor). c. Borrowed select fill m oats. Mo cceptoable -site materials, .-Id have a liquid limit (U.) I an 35 and the plaMicitylm (PI) should be from 4 to 15„ UUTtabovor e. f.h. flo-ld doneretek fill, ith a p le select fill hh. ls, c p fed o p ifi.d 2. During all ..cave a tr himq op-h.h.,, wo ma safelh.petly s d behh, of ppnmary importance. Bracing osh.rih woo s pingfe Ofh tenchc�-llssmaYtl b. kbe •necessary sif pt,hdh uiexcavalions are tldreep e .ugh to require such ..a s.mdnl. 3. If o.hdver ex ovation ° footings o the o e cavation shall be filled witM1 c Crete to Me bottom ofcMe n footing at n uradtlilionply crosl%to Me Owner. If a suitable ocondhions a untered at a y fooling area, th. Contractor a 11 notify Me A hitect and cease work in that CONCRETE AMD REINFpiCINC . C`ncrele tl ri m mat we c m mum c p sive st hgth 3000 pd sal 28 id hinioc with - fo win9r re9 ents: ini re r °. Concrete usetl f footings cdh°II I- a maximum water ucemenlitious (W/C) ratio of 0,68 antl shall be n entrained. b. Concrete used ifor interior floor .labs on grade shall hove o maximum W/C ratio of about 0.46 dn,c. Cancrelell b - - n g ers shall be entrainetleantlohaveia of 5i acksto ent perncuDicc yard. a d. Refer to the apd,dificaliona for topping slab concrete. equiremenls. 2. Controlletl to `matt backfill mbStdI (Flowfill) 11 d.nt.in Type II porh°nd ce t. fly a.h, fine aggregate, °ggregm . water, mixtures note onl°in chloride. Flowfilleshall have a minim m 28 day compressive .-d .. of 100 psi and . calcium 28 day compressive strength of 200u tlpsi when moldetl and cured a ompliance wiMrnPSTMUD I.R. TM1e m Flbwfils shall and Me im In be 8f yaggregates shall• De between 50R and 60%hby volume of Mei total aggregate. tin the Flowf�ll smix. 3. Floor sob on gratle or Flowfill -I tM1ick, reinforced with R3 bars 18" o cM1 hd e placetl o comDactetlbe h fill or Flowfill. Reinforcement sM1all be lacaletl I I/2" below tops of islab. Slab reinforcing s all be lapped 16" °t splices. 4. Topping slabs shall be re arced with 4.4-W1.4-A welded w e fabric. Welded wire fabric shall De provitled in flat sheets and shall be lappdtl 8" minimum on each side. 5. Reinforcing steel bare hall be Grade 60, conforming to ASTM A615, except bent R3 h.s antl - ph, y b. Gratle 40. 6. Minimum reinforcing .feel c .r.boll be a. follow.: a. Concrete placetl against oeage 3 in. b. Cancrele a ar weolM1er. (1) N5 hors antl smaller 1 1" in. SIRI-- SIEEL 2. Wide flange structural .hopes .boll be ASTM -2, with Fy = 50 k.i minimum HSS tubes shall be ASTM A500„ -de w M1 Fy = 46 ks minimmfry u. OfM1er eclural and miscellaneous steel members, s apes antl connections shall beASTM A36. 3. TM1e Contractor shall be responsible for checking tie Architectural Drawings for al mi... us Provide bolls and P-1, holes i l s dtural and m cellan...s metal for att.hm.ht. idhd/or 4. All welding of slrugclural steel .hall be in coMance with the latest standard. of the AWS DIJ. Structural Welding Cotle - Steel, a NSC, using E70 Series Electrodes. All -ding operators s AWS q ntl ..Id. All weltls s 11 hove a minimum tensile slrcn9M of i11 )0 kdi d,ddrsaf h..re.trenglh ofp 21 liksi, of 5. All anchor rods shall be 3/4" diameter, threaded and nutted anchor rods in I.cordance wilM1 PSTM F1554. G,.l 36, ales noted therwise P-ide t o s ntl flat washers t lM1 top of .h tm 6. Heldocr tlectio slut nol5otherlwideredelailetl billlobe •made nlwi1h tl 3/A' dihnn-,is ASTM sA325I1s .high .I'd .bearing type boll. and nut.. Boll. in beano, „epe shear c need- need anted to De igMenetll to Dy f nug-tight bnntlition. Flat hdrd.hAd was s shall be in-11etl over Aloft holes ). All grout n-s used under steel framing shall be n•hrink grout us in a cordance with m facth- endatheavy tl rou ione for hy gting. Set column base atl nu plates con a minimum of 1 1/2` 8. Weld all cap plates and Dade plates l0 columns with minim- 1/4" continuous fillet weltls. MASONRY weight coot fe Dory u s (CMU) 1105 lbs. per cu. ft, to lees th.n 125 lbs. per u. ft., Cry weight of ern Crete) s t" be ASTM C90, m - oiled u omplA, w.ns rength of 1..0.psi o ° (f'm = 1.0epai)nat 28 d mortaris et 'MN s iol p hon of construction procedures cshplln be prodded by the Cont.dtobre Mn,geiconsWcthh 2. Cells w einforcimg s e filled s h 2.0 D.i hnonry grout, in onry w ning 6einforce^,mab I leshallil bee groutedfesolidc from th, bottom VI. ithe ctop of Me wall, allsRemove all ulalion from grout filled cells before filling ..th grout. Reinforcing bare lb e placed in the of th. en .ASTM C476 rti1,- a to 11 sl p, antl shall not canMin au-enfmi g r water redo g oemixwre%. ° 3. Lap splices of reinforcing %feel mason sh shall be 48 bar diameters or 2'-O„ whichever is greater. Splices enforcing stoggeretl so tM1af no more tan one splice occurs in y IV-0" Ilengthntof wall a d.ht of corners. WOOD CONSIRUC110N p isians of th. latest°eit.. of th. N°hanol 0 II96e Dtlesi 9caban far Woad Canstruchon. with the 2. All stucturaI framing lumber to be lumber IA, dry Hem -Fir or Douglas Fl Larch, No. 2 and Bdltd,. usetl at 1. mximaum moisture content. _lt tud. shall be Sthd Grade of the ..m species. 3. Wood xposlrvctural pone) (plywootl or 05B) wall d-Ming dF a 15/32' Mick A.Rated She Ihinga uc Esure 1 wth ° 32M1 16 sp rating. moximu h a ding of studs s all be 16". Wo stlural pnof .°thing d 1 be 19/32' Midk A Rate d Sh-thing, Exposure 1, with o° 40/20 spa mting.The moximu spacing o roof supports shall be 24". 4 All na sM1 comma riles o etl " Ah fasteners are to comply wiM ' 1. 23049.1 - Fastening SCM1ed , of the 2009 Internotlonal Buil g Cotle. 5. Studs shall be attached to lop and bottom M1late. and shall be placed with Meir wide dimension of a exlenoricw tBeonn9wo eMefiore5w hstuds d bwitM1 etl a lop pl°tesn'msMlletl to provide oveirlappin9 at c and at intersectionsiiwith old etlpaNilions ubl End taints in double lop plate% %hall be offset at least 48". Interior nonb-mg partitions shall be capped with a single top nst Slate ialled to provide i d pipinrtth g f II b and t ....dtions with oer w 11 and partitions. Uat sot the walls .... . on eve u em g n o ountlab pl.te ho g witll not ess th.. HSSSx5./6 COLUMN CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE COLUMN HEIGHT AT I4 -- T 15" O.C. SIDEWALK, R%"x6"n6" WITH" DI. EACH WAY SEE ARCH. HILTI KWIK SOLT 3 EXPANSION ANCHOR (4" MM. EMBEDMENT) ;�-DVATGN To BE DETERMINED BY CONTRACTOR 0 `3-tt3 BARS REFER TO 1/ 1 CONT. FOR NOTES AND REINFORCING MISTING MASON BREAKER WALL BOND SEE ARCH EXISTING SLAB YELEVATION TO BE I 1 SECTION 2 SECTION 3 SECTION S2. SGAL r-O SIALE: %' - I- S2.1 SCALE 3." = r-O' 2" MAX 2" MAX. SHEET METAL CONTRACTOR'S OPTION: FORMING KEY 1" DEEP SAWCUT JOINTS U SEE NOTE BELOW 4.4-WIA.WIA 6" AS REQUIRED WELDED WIRE MIN. TO INSTALL FABRIC e NEW PLUMBING SAWCUT EXISTING SLAB MIN y" DEEP AND BARS AT ALL SUCH NOTE PROVIDE ESLAB CONDITIONS REMOVE AS REQUIRED INCLUDING RE-ENTRANT CORNERS. OPENINGS, TO INSTALL NEW PLUMBING ISOLATKJN JOINTS, AND FOUR JOINTS. 13 BARS AT 16' OC, EACH WAY (REBAR SUPPORT DOWELS SO THEY NOT CONTMl1W5 - REMAIN PARALLEL TO EACH THRGUGH CONTROL OTHER AND PERPENDICULAR JOINT) TO THE JOINT DURING PLACING f[9 x 18" DOWELS AND FINISHING OPERATIONS. AT 24" IC, TYPICAL MISALIGNED DOWELS MAY AT EACH SIDE OF PROVIDE %" DIA.. I— CAUSE SLAB CRACKS, SLAB CUT C• �R SMOOTH DOWELS AT 24' O.C. EDGE OF / (GREASE ONE END). DOWELS COMPACTED SHILL BE 54WN IT EACH END, FILL NOT SHEARED. LONTR4CTOR'9 OPTION: 4'-O" LOG DEEP SA CUT TO OCCUR AS SOON NEW PLUMBING FROMTOP AS SLAB CAN STAND TRAFFIC LINES, SEE PLUMBING OFSLABOI - FOR WET SAW JNTS. CUT WITHIN PLANS FOR LOCATIONS / CUT SLAB REINFORCING BARS 4 TO 12 HOURS AFTER CONCRETE / AND PROVIDE AND OWI-A A TA- HARDENS / -FOR SOFF{UT 54W, CUT WITHIN CONON JOINTS L HTO 4 HOURS AFTER CONCRETE AIDE- CONTROL/CONSTRUCTION JOINT DETAIL 6 DETAIL sz O SALE sz O SALE 52.4 scALF %" -1'_0" S2.1 EmsrmG Ix oR zx EXIST. 2x6 VERTICAL MEMBER. MSTALL y" MAX. y" M TWO NEW 2n6 VERTICAL RIDGE 2 NEW 06 VERTICAL MEMBERS MEMBERS INSTALLED AS SIDE AT THIS LOCATION. SHOWN. 1 I ANOFD 1 THF5. ON EACH E AIL5 NEW WIOx33. CL b �p�3r 1 EACH SIDE C THICK SEE COLUMN eU 9 M ry Q SCHEDULE of ; 3 a 9 2x8 SHOT HEAW133 2x6 NAILED BETWEEN CONNECTION FOR SEE � C � • � TOP OF THE- THE VERTICAL 2x6'S PLATEEE 2/53.I E_Al6d NAILS - - FL NEW AAND 3/531SCHTIN)(VERIFY LOCATIONIEQUEQUA 2" g�� CL q"TYP. NOTES: L CUT OFF ENDS NEW 1IOx33 BEAM INSTALLED 1. SHONAKIRE THE EXISTING WOOD FRAMED ROOF STRUCTURE BEFORE 2x6 BOTTOM CHORDS AS WITH THE BOTTOM FLANGE BERM ALL BOLTS OL S N pNS REQUIRED TO MSTALL THE FLUSH WITH THE EXISTING TRUSS R BDLlS ftE0'D. DW. A325-N BOLTS M 2. NAIL 2x6 SPLICE ANY IPIECES TO THE SIDES OF ALL EXISTING MEMBERS WIOx33. SHORE THE EXISTING DIAMETER HOLES THAT ARE CRACKED, SPLIT OR NEED TO BE REINFORCED. NEW 2,6 STRUCTURE BEFORE INSTALLING JOINT IN EXISTING WI8 5 PROVIDE ty" VERTICAL LAP SHALL EXTEND 9'-O' PAST DAMAGED POINTS. USE 16d NAILS THE NEW W10x33. 2x6 BOTTOM CHORD EDGE DISTANCE AT TOP SPACED AT 6° O.C. MAX, MEMBERS AND BOTTOM BOLTS. 3. REPLACE ALL CENTER VERTICALS WITH 2x6'S AS NOTED ABOVE. SPACE BOLTS AT 3" O.C. REINFORCE4. REPAIR AND L TRUSSED CONNECTIONS THAT HAVE JACK TRUSSES BACK TO LEVEL POSITION BEFORE FAILED OR NEED REI FORCING. USE ,6 IR -AILS FOR ALL REPAIRS. INSTALLING THE NEW WIOx33 BEAM, CONTRACTOR TO 5, WOOD TRUSSES ARE SPACED AT 16' O.CN FIELD VERIFY ELEVATIO OF THE BOTTOM OF THE EXISTING BOTTOM CHORD. 1 ELEVATION 2 DETAIL 3 BEAM TO TIRE COL" COPMTM 53.SCALE: Y" ' T \P.Y SCALE: r = 1'-O" No SCALE EXISTING WOOD TRUSS 2Ax6 VERTICAL T EVERY OTHER TRUSS SHORE EXISTING WOOD FRAMING BEFORE INSTALLING THE STEEL BEAM FRAMING EXISTING 21 TRU55 DIAGONAL WEB MEMBER _ EXISTING WOOD TRUSS FRAMING. K TOENAIL TO M NEW TOP PLATE OF Vq,E,Xl,l5TlNG OR 2x12 CONT., NAILED TO ii-TOP PLATE, V 0 tTHE SIDEOF THE EXISTING --------a— SHOT TO TOP ..BOTTOCHORD.NAIL WITH OF HS55x5 H LL Q121-16d NAILSPACEDAT 24" O.C. EXTEND 2 TO ARING AT EACH END. TO BE DETERMINED2x12 CONT, BY THE CONTRACTOR SEE 6/53.1 2n6 TRUSS BOTTOM CEILING JOIST CHORD MEMBER. JACK TRUSS H555x5x' CONT. 0 BACK UP TO A LEVEL POSITION EXIST. 2x4 OVER COLUMNS IF REQURED BEFORE ATTACHING EXISTING LEDGER Y" THE NEW 2x12. TRUSSES ARE WAASONRT Y4° SPACED AT 16' O.C. 0 10� 6 I0 IVERIFTI H555x4x 96 BETWEEN v i � cownn H555x5x3/I6 GRIND ALL WELDS SMOOTH TO TOUCH, COLUMN • E BEAMS OVER MIDDLE AND CORNER COLUMNS. WELD SPLICES WATER TIGHT GRIND SMOOTH TO TOUCH. • MITER BEAMS AND WELD AT THE CORNERS SPLICES. P ROVIDE y" PLATES OVER ENDS OF HSS5x5 BEAMS. 4 SECTION 5SECTION SECTION S3. SCALE: r = ,'-o SS. .ALE: T I ,-o TOENAIL TRUSSES TO EXISTING TRUSS THE NEW BEAM TOP CHORD 2x4. TRUSSES ARE LINTEL SCHEDULE EXISTING TRU55 SPACED AT 24' O.C. MARK LINTEL REMARKS PA.THE�yLLEL TO EW PSL BEAM EXISTING TRU55 2x4 BOTTOM EXISTING MASONRY CHORD WALL TO REMAIN 11_______ ___ 4EACH SIDE. 2ni2 NAILED TO BEAR Al 6" MIN. ON oTTOM CHORD MASONRY AT OM C NEW 2n NAILED © EACH END SEE 6/53., TO SIDE OF EXIST. 2.4 BOTTOM CH ORD. NAIL WITH 16d NAILS AT 6' O.C. rr'� f i�EXISTING MASONRY WALL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY 1,� o BE REMoveD As REQUIRED FOR THE NEW OPENING. ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND RECONSTRUCT EACH SIDE OF CONDITIONS PRIOR TO FABRICATION NEW WEYERHAEUSER S)''x21 EXISTING CEILING JOISTS, THE NEW OPENING AS REQUIRED AND CONSTRUCTION, 22E PARALLAM PSL BEAM LEDGERS. AND TRUSS PLACED UNDER THE EXISTING BEAM TO BE REMOVED ROOF TRUSSES. GOEUMN SCHEDULE SHORE THE EXISTING ROOF STRUCTURE BEFORE REMOVING THE EXISTING Cl HS53yx5yxy COLUMN WITH CAN ,Ly'x3y" )'2' ROOF TRUSS BEAMS, REMOVE THE EXISTING ROOF TRUSS BEAMS AND AND BASE ILA"ni0"n10", REFER TO 2 11 REPLACE WITH PSL BEAMS. JACK UP THE EXISTING ROOF STRUCTURE IF C2 HSS5x5x6 COLUMN. REFER TO 2/521 AND NEEDED TO INSTALL THE PSL BEAMS. e� SECTION 5/S9.v W. SCALE: 1" - V 1O INSTALL A DOUBLE 2,12 HEADER TO SUPPORT THE LOW END OF THE EXISTING HIPPED RAFTERS. THE DOUBLE 2x12 HEADER SHALL BEAR ON THE EXISTING WALLS. TAPER THE ENDS OF THE HEADER IF REQUIRED. O REMOVE EXISTING ACCESS OPENING FRAMING AFTER SHORING THE STRUCTURE REPLACE THE CUT 2n6 TRUSS DAGONALS WITH NEW 2.6 DIAGONALS. O SPLICE H555x5x% BEAM OVER MIDDLE AND CORNER COLUMNS. O ADD A 2x6 VERTICAL WEB MEMBER AT EVERY OTHER EXISTING TRUSS, 0 REMOVE3THE EXISTING ACCESS OPENING FRAMING AFTER SHORING THE STRUCTURE. INSTALL A NEW 2.8 AGAINST THE EXISTING 2,6 BOTTOM CHORD THAT WAS CUT AT THE EXISTING SIMILAR TO 6/53.1 ACCESS OPENING 2a-1.14' II 1 1 1 III �@d1111�1 �MII��II I�--III EXISTING ROOF FRAMING PLAN SCALE: e - : =2 Ito7'T-2'1-2') HS �HSSSx4x� �H555x4x%j6 _2 _HGSS.41,3/* HOT-2"1 H555x4x%j6 flQJ'-2") 4�RYi .` G sa-,4 CONSULTANTS' x ��clry ,OI,BLE 202, SEE tO Z F �Q m Fl S3.1 TYP TYP TlEE.=.AG'N.NAYM:' FLASHING AT C TC.1-E—A-1H—1— =I.N I M Y DECK NGTALL ADDIT ONAL 111111111"111N Y. A—' "BE ,ED _B A.. EDGE. —D) "' ll== sFMaxr CILROINAll F-1 DTTER FGrEEN .1—S BTEEL FG111.1—Bo .—D . l.. IAll— —G.—E—No .. IINFI.L.1�111 WN Wo FAETENE. FEB I.E) F—INK—C.—B 1= Co. I —FAETINIGG—Bro II — WOOD BLOCKING .. p FFG, ==N.1 11El 11 CRICKET _ "' -- L %. NG "OKET .Gor L_ �EILGC. AD SIED, AT EDGE OF METAL TRIM GE.JIGEG lF.IEN N T— =ENT K (1-1)E�EDGING AND GUTTER DETAIL AT DORMERS i o WOOD CRICKET FLASHING ON UPSLOPE SIDE OF CHIMNEY (—q'ICHIMIN�EY CAP FLASHING ..TT..— T�FLAS UNDE—.F.T . ...... CAULK TE E R F ING FENWETEF 1101,.-E I TOO- _T I C .. TEB Fj DECK N G GO W —,K G— G—R =.'lL7'R EllUlE. 7-'D 'ATElP— C—RANDFANTIOE .E—NT UNGFGYNNT —"WME— ENE OTLE WOING A.t�" , ��� , .O'N,TDAIN.TEI UL.0E."'RETNT. 11 L R INIMUMIIIL. =PERI.—R ==ON. =NT NA--UNE Tr— ICIHOINIEHLIFI�OPPIR F IOW-01E M ING -BR UN.El='N-T \—TRIMAND.B.D1.1. —IMF— F.Go. ALONG —B FORM C..UGE AT ...ER =E—.—T —EFTILE r"- L \�: �l ISE WALL FLASHING !!FLASHFLASHING PERIMETER FLASHING DETAIL EAVVE EDGING �&GUTTER DETAIL _DGIN 6 rose NOTE — EKIOSURE — "INIM= :1.�L.LFI N�— — CREASI-01 BKro.E... CRUN B — . Top or COVER TILE rEQUIRDo FXGTENE�R$\.F RO—o —ED TILE W ON E_ E SHED lElT—,A_A FD.K n� � \� KE DETAIL %q�VALLEY FLASHING DETAIL 4 . u:oTe YYNTE,"I=.I—E G.BF No M 1EDUIREMENTBrolice DAMMING) PID— "ING AT TILE C=R L.D =IU'lTo A 21 "' EIIIIAI'=' UNDE_MENT R.1 E E EGIOR LINE OF "'LGING TO "OV DE DA"" T' AN ICE D_ PROTECTION M— =ING �T DECK LEVEL �NDMERUAYM�ENT DETAIL T 1_�TACKFLASHING / \ROOF PENETRATION CURB ------- - ------ ------ - ----- ENIROOFCRE FU TO AN'. TPO" 1. N Ll .ISiING CONDENSING UNIT WITH ,,CRT O,.CLFC 10 BE P... [-F= E%ISiING "ST FLUE VENTS TO BE REMOVED, SEAL OPENINGS IN ROOF -REF. TO ARCH ONGS. FOR ROOFING DETAILS. ----------------------- I ------------ m OFLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL ' �/m \t� L __T OUTS BOLBiEDAWCLH 1% U PLAN BOLTS TO DUCT OR SIZE GOOSENECK DETAIL TAr IZE 6x ILL. CLLw IA�axl DUCT 5 1 \ CONNECTION AT SUPPLY GRILLE FLUE THROUGH ROOF CONDENSING UNIT AND COOLING COIL ER NOTES 1PROVIDE FLUE FOR FURNACE . PROVIDE COMBUSTION AIR FOR FURNACE. 3. AUTOMATIC IGNITION CYCLE REOUI RED 5. FURNACESFMUST 3HRVE DRAFTR NDUCRRSEWAITHE PREF INDDEPOSTCPUNGC CYCLER. FURNACE SCHEDULE Im m 9 Y CFM ESP FUEL NPUT OUTPUT AN EC. DATA GR. MODEL NO AFUE ELEVATION MARK CFM OA "WG MEN MEN HP R1 -SINGLE DEFLECTION -RETURN, VERTICAL u + D o.s• L. NAY. GAS 9] Bz 75 5V/1/60HZ E DH1cIoo9Ha F-2-IS 320 GAS 11 92 .TS SV/I /60H TRAM. iUHl C1009H1 15 No scALE F-3-13 160E 320 0.5" NAT. GAS 97 92 .T5 I, SV/I /60HZ TRANE RUHI C1009H1 95A TITUS 35ORL d-1] 160E 0. 5" PAT. GAS 9] 115V/1/60HZ 95% EXHAUST FAD B IRDSCREEN MOUNT ON RUBBER PAD ER FLASHING FACTORY FABRICATED FLASHING CURB CANT RIP BACKDRAFT DAMPER SEE MFG. DATA FOR DUCT sI ZE EXHAUST FAN MOUNTING DETAIL yxP co lL GCCLI NG CCIL co li00 NDENSATE LINE Oo oO CONDENSATE LINE CUNI ON UNION TX GAS COCK CONDENSING CONDENSING GAS COCK FURNACE FURNACE GIGET G CAS LINE T TO DIRT EG 000 — — — FILTER LINE SHEET METAL UM USTIO___________ ___ WPLENIiH ANGLE COMBN COMBUSTION IRON FRAME DRAIN DRAIN EN SI iE MIN. OPEN SITE SIR'WALL DRAIN - DRAIN - REYUND GRILLE HEFER i0 REFER i0 B LG. DWG. PLC. DWG. d" - 30% FILTER RACK PREMOROMVAL OE ACCESSOFFILTER FOR FURNACE / COIL / CONDENSING UNIT DETAIL EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE 1, ALL FANS SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH BIRDSCREENS. AND BACNDRAFT DAMPERS. AIR DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULE IIARS TYPE LOCATION DESCRIPTION EXTR OBD F I N I SX FRAME EXAMPLE 51 SUPPLY CEILING LOUVERED FACE - S Y Y WM1i to SM HART & COO LEY - 30< SUPPLY ee DOUBLE DEFLECTION YYea SM iIiUS 300R RETURN SI IONALL SINGLE DEFLECTION WM1i t• SM it iUS 350RL E%HAUSi PERFORATED FACE SM PAR NOTES OPPOSED E DAMPER. TE.TRAC- SURFACET SMMOUNT, 1BAR 6.LA-Ri-UTS SHALL BE LL UNOOFUSALUMINUM MANCONSTRUCTION, DAMPERS INSTALLED AT THE TAP. ELECTRIC WALL HEATER SCHEDULE DESIGNATION TYPE CAP. BTU ATTS VOLTS EXAMPLE. DAYTON E FORCED AIR 511E W1500 120 52K52 AIR FLOW + lx L I I I NOTE. PROVIDE WITH INTEGRAL THERMOSTAT. x DUCT TAP DETAIL MECHANICAL LEGEND 1, ALL FANS SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH BIRDSCREENS. AND BACNDRAFT DAMPERS. AIR DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULE IIARS TYPE LOCATION DESCRIPTION EXTR OBD F I N I SX FRAME EXAMPLE 51 SUPPLY CEILING LOUVERED FACE - S Y Y WM1i to SM HART & COO LEY - 30< SUPPLY ee DOUBLE DEFLECTION YYea SM iIiUS 300R RETURN SI IONALL SINGLE DEFLECTION WM1i t• SM it iUS 350RL E%HAUSi PERFORATED FACE SM PAR NOTES OPPOSED E DAMPER. TE.TRAC- SURFACET SMMOUNT, 1BAR 6.LA-Ri-UTS SHALL BE LL UNOOFUSALUMINUM MANCONSTRUCTION, DAMPERS INSTALLED AT THE TAP. ELECTRIC WALL HEATER SCHEDULE DESIGNATION TYPE CAP. BTU ATTS VOLTS EXAMPLE. DAYTON E FORCED AIR 511E W1500 120 52K52 AIR FLOW + lx L I I I NOTE. PROVIDE WITH INTEGRAL THERMOSTAT. x DUCT TAP DETAIL MECHANICAL LEGEND 12�•pp DUCTWORK-ROVNO RADIUS ELBOW oRCP IN ouCT ® ® RISE IN OUGT SUPPLY DIFFUSER zRETNRN DIFFDBER VFF FIRE DAMPER ® o THERMoSTAT U .11FFIRST NUMBERS VISBLE DIMENSION MNEREO ELBDW WITH TURNING —ES L DRDPIN DUCT ® RISE Iry OUOT fX/STING fX/STING R ------ CAP LI u u OLANDWER FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING DEMOLITION NOTES INDICATED BY: "O " OI E%ISiING PLUMBING FI %iURE ROUGH IN (AND GI XTURE) TO BE REMOVED, CAP ALL SERVICES BELOW FLOOR, ABOVE CEILING OR IN WALL AS REOU IREO. REFER i0 NEW PLAN. O2 CAP ALL EXTERIOR, UNUSED GAS PIPING OUTSIDE OF BUILDING. REMOVE AND PATCH RISER AT BUILDING. NOTES INDICATED BY, "` /" O CONNECT NEW WATER LINE TO EXISTING AT THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION, FIELD VERIFY PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. EXACT ROUTING OF ENISiING UNKNOWN O2 CONNECT NEW 6" SEWER TO %ISi ING AT THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING 0 STARTING WORK. CONTRACTOR SHALL SERVICE SEPTIC AND REPAIR MANHOLE D CLEANDUTS. ROD OUT ALL EXISTING SEWERS TO REMAIN. O VNOUVINT,DEFNEL�OPVE REI FYGANONN IN IYIZ ELNEWEROOFUPENEi RRiIONSES TIE TOGETHER ADD CONNECT TO EXISTING PLUMBING O4 CONNECT NEW GAS PIPING TO EXISTING Ai THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION. ROUTE UNDERGROUND AS INDICATED AND RISE ONN EXRTHOT nRIORRfTA i TO MATCH). FIELR.D VERIFY REOUIREo. MREMOVENE%ISTING �O UNUSED RISERS TO BUILDING - PATCHTOMAiiTCHGEXIST Co.NGN(CAP UNDERGROUND). O5 PftOV IDE DOMESTIC WATER RISER IN WALL, I" GAS CGORDINATE WITH LANDSCAPING RISE i0 8' ABOVE GRADE O� �I" GAS SERVICE CAP ALL UNUSED PLUMBING Ors A LA F R"VTR I CAP GAS ABANDON SERVICE CAP 7 G 7 L wo ��—CAP NNXEW Plp— R i 3/4"HW O O O GF - .. . S/y �M'� m MIN' I GAS SERVICE F NEW 2" VTR AIR PROVII DED N O LANDWER FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING STAINLESS STEEL COUNTER WITH SINK INCLUDED LAVATORY LW Uu�` FIXTURE: STAINLESS STEEL INTEGRAL SINK P-TRASTOPSP. KOHLER K-8998 WITTH TUBING WASTE RAND ESCUTCHEON, RA RI SEE ANDC QUARTER11 WITH i URNF HANDLES OPERAIHI UMTI ON STOPS. TAILPIECE: KOHLER K-13685 PERFORATED GRID WITH OFFSET DRAIN. STOPS: DELTA - I/4 i ALVES INSULATION: TRUEBRO INSULATION FOR P-TRAP, OFFSET TAILPIECEE , AND HOT AND COLD SUPPLIES. OR HNEE PANEL PROVIDED FIXTURE BOWL - PLUMBER RESPONSIBLE FAUCET: SLOAN MODEL SF -"DO TRANS POWER WITH FOR ALL FINAL CONNECTION BATTERY BACKUP. E LEC EY U© , PROVIDE BELOW DECK MANUAL THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE MPERED WATER TMV HW CW 13• MOP BASIN'MB' _ FIXTURE: KOHLER K-e]10 FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE SINK 2IE• % 28•' S.. ACID RES IETI NC ENAMEL EO - CAST IRON CORNER PATTERN, 3" INTEGRAL GRAIN BODY WI iH //803-0630 FL NT STRAINER ANNO 1805-0200 kEMOVABLE L COATED R CDARD. SUPPLY: DELTA 2BTO WITH VACUUM BREAKER, Ni EGRAL STOPS. WALL BRACE. PAIL .ON 3 4" THREAREO SPOUT AND 5' UBBER HOSE WITH WALL HOSE O- 3/+" ALL P-TRAP. DEEP SEAL BELOW FLOOR. W 20 ROUGH -IN: CW Of WASTE VENT "2,. I_I/2" �-G IN ISHED WALL 40" FLOOR DRAIN'FD' NO SCALE FIXTURE. WADE W-1103-G, SQUARE NB TOP. WITH ADJUSTABLE STRAINERS, CI BODY AND DEEP SEAL P-TRAP, NOTE OV IDE PRO SET - TRAP GUARD INSERT Moo EL I - TG33 WADE 3 WATER CLOSET WC'A' RGUGH-IN: SW HAN WASTE VENT STAINLESS STEEL COUNTER WITH SINK INCLUDED SINK SW &I EIxTURE: STAINLESS STEEL INTERGRAL SINK STRAINER: AENG.BRASS CO. OFF -SET TAILPIECESBBCWC CNUMR CUP STRAINER WITH . (2) - ELDER 804-1190 CAST BRASS ] AGE CHROME PLATED NUB ING WASTE AND ESCUTCHEON, WITHOUT CLEANOUT. (2) SLOPS: DELTA CHROME WHEEL AND RISER ROUGH -IN: CW NW WASTE VENT 1/2.. 1/2.. 2.1.5.. PLUMBER RESPONSIBLE NOTE: P VI UE 3/d Hz FOOD WASTE G DISPOSAL. FOR ALL FINAL CONIN ECi ION FAUCET: FG DELTA 1] LEVER WITH OOSENECK - SPRAY WWATER RAWERpARRE5TOR6 'EXISTING 2" VTR -- Fssx-A I/z� I Fssz-o--- - Fnnx—F NOTE: EQUAL TOSS IOU%S CHIEF IRDWC ED ED 3/4" s.P.s OR W.T. SUPPLY TO FLUSH VALVE IHI x 24ED WALL — URINAL U'A' -3%++• svuo �NANGEN FIXTURE AMERICAN HIIGH EFFICIENCYRURI JET, AND HANGEN,LLGR OR FLOWISOCPM EFFICIENCY D iFLOUSCHINA. _ I = COLOR: WHITE ROUGH -IN CW 3/4 ILI SHED FLOORr m HAN WATER CLOSET WC'B' FIXTURE: KOHLER HI LHEA K-39]9 AA NA ELONGATED, S PHON ACTION, FLOOR MOUNTED, NGFPF, TANK TYPE CLOSET- FLUSH ACTUATOR TO BE1INSTALLED ON "WIDE" SIDE 0STALL COLOR: WHILE SEAT: EQUAL TO BEMIS 1655C WHITE, PLASTIC, OPEN FRONT SEAT ROUGH -IN: CWI HW I WASTE VENT /^\ HANDLE 4 I\ IV\UI 18„ TO ROOF THEXPANSION TANK VACUUM BREAKER Po o eAILx suppLY J I COMBUSTION TPR WATLR r 11 K ILT1CHrEN A DRAINELI NE TOL FO o.AS RTLLnn I d Iz•• CALV. PAN DRAIN TO FD WATER HEATER PIPING DIAGRAM WH-1 NO LE WATER A HEATER EQUAL TO STATE MODEL GPx 40 Y% 40.000 STUN GAS INPUT. 40 GALLON STORAGE. 41 GAL. RECOVERY RATE AT 90 DEG. TEMP. RISE. PROVIDE A 3 YEAR WARRANTY. �EXISTING pAP UNU 2" VTR LL 5ED �2%I VTR" �WIY PLUMBING -- VENis �i MEC r GDMD TO ED / FD PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS NOTE: PROVIDE WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS AS REQUIRED. om ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION —®DUPLEX RECEPTACLE. 20A, 120V. 2P, DR. GROUNDED COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET DISCONNECT SWITCH AIR �® -® -® -® CGHBIT-ING UNIT OELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN NOTES INDICATED T "\ ' O1 MAIN PANELAND CONDUIT TO BE REMOVED. O DIp.00NDITIONERCUNIT TO BEUREMOVED. OS NOT USED, O EXISTING DISCONNECTS AND METER TO REMAIN, @ EXISTING PAD MOUNT TRANSRDRMER TO REMAIN. (I)EXISTING DISCONNECT SWITCH TO BE REMOVED. OJ EXISTING METER TO BE REMOVED. C `........�.ara.Rl..........fC 5"ao`y 34301 '"µme SCHEDULE OF OCCUPANCY SENSORS SYMBOL DESIGNATION 10 WATT STOPPER /DT-305 DUAL TECHNOLOGY CEILING SENSOR 30 WATT STOPPER /U7-305-1 ULTRASONIC CEILING SENSOR WATT STOPPER IPW-100 PASSIVE INFARED WALL SWITCH SENSOR $pt WATT STOPPER /DW-100 DUAL TECHNOLOGY WALL SWITCH SENSOR 0 WATT STOPPER "Z-150 POWER PACK OELECTRICAL NEW FLOOR PLAWLIGHTING o o o 5"ao`y 34301 '"µme F I•I:SNS 0 m 0 NOTES INDICATED BY " Qi INSTALL ABOVE COUNTER. 02 CIRCUIT TO NEW LIGHTING IN THIS ROOM, 03 MAIN PANEL A'. ® NEW VOOA-1P DISCONNECT SWITCH WITH TWO 300A FUSETRONS N NEMA JR ENCLOSURE. 05 NEMA 14-50R. © NEW METER, O CONNECT SWITCH TO GARBAGE DISPOSAL RECEPTACLE. (B)GARBAGE DISPOSAL RECEPTACLE - INSTALL BELOW SINK. O WOL HEAPCHWITCCH H, TO RANGE HOOD, COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION O GROUND RODS -REFER TO SPECS. 11 CONNELL i0 POWER CONVERTER FOR ME NS RES iR00M URINAL LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE LAMPS . .,I. REWIRS TIIE DISLRIITID. Il A.11A.IURER TAL.. xe. a ouonilty Deaor ipilon of P Y RIS D 'A 11 1 32W TRT LFL 2400 11DoK ES G 1 '7:11 1 L T:T AS S 'A" Aith EI.1iy -I I A A: L. X' :11 1 ME;�01%lrltll At 1 11. TB 'Niii Dt.N 1. 11 :E 2-14- R.I.lA.1 Fl 1 120 SETS F 1 32 FW 112125 G11101S I . '1 3 . T. IS. moo, 78 is loli A. B i"t So E.11- AHM I 32TRT EAR CGL ECOS 11 1 32W TIT CFL 2400 SIDOR D2 E E IS. W.11 M-t 11 1 lit. Lilt� WI � li� E.I.IS .1 2 12W T. 2.S0 -.it 7. IS :11 1 LED iSoD 3100A .1 — 1. 1 IA: AD I EL FE I .1th 11IIII _�l �S _�D,WIII Santa rite BIA111 Eliti,11 Litl W�SRWLES 1 10-0/101 S12 EL 24 1 LED-10LEDI 2001 lootti 70 — `2 1 2 2" 11 1 12W 11 2.EI -SA 7. IS Wi,I I BE S I I- -I- -it' GAI L R�::R R21H EL 1 2 .1 111.. 11 ... 1 2E1. 1 2 11 1W A121ilS E.I.HIS 171 IS IS. IE.D1 IS IS ItX A CFL OttiII, Will Li,ti,A 12D --II Li,ht,,, 1-1-3118 ID I IS. V A LED 1 Li,11 liD _ Li- CX 6 1 It IS' D 1 LED Hit S= DIM I P;Ig,. ti,id St PMER PICI CA H M PLAN SYMBOL PLANOCCUPAN MOUNTED ON CEILING _ DIG 1P1jWALPOSITION, LSM SWITCH — IN "ON" N SI T ARE CONTROLLED E� G.LSE'N50TRS. IN "OFF' POSITION, LIGHTS ARE OFF OCCUPANCY SENSOR DETAIL ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM Hil Sc ...... A`I BONDI.'TD PIPER PIPTIN—G/DUCTWORN ommmmorMoomm mwmm�.mmm mommmMmm moommMmoomm EMS mmmmmff===��mmm ■ I All 1" SITE DEMOLITION PLAN ITg NORTH o l F+,$r A or N \V\ SITE DEMOLITION PLAN 0 10 zo so ao feet 1•' _ ,D• NORTH 0 10 m sD AO feet v=1o• DEMOLITION SCHEDULE sTM�� DgcR Pr oN � DE,A L D-101 LIMITS OF ASPHALT REMOVAL ['� REMOVE EXISTINb ASRIAIT pRIVE 0.103 REMOVE EXISTINb CURB AND 6UrtER ['� REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE SIDEWALK '0.105 REMOVE E%ISTINb CONCRETE 5TEP5 ['- .�_. REMOVE E%ISTINb CONCRETE RPMP 0 REMOVE EXISTIN& CONCRETE WALL ['] EXISTING TRANSFORMER AND CONGREiE PAD TO LIMITS OF DISRRBANGE 0.110 CONSTRUCT A TEMPORARY FENCE ARCUVD PLL TREES, RiQ11 EXISTINb LIGHT POLE TO REMAIN; PROTECT FROM DAMAGE 0 REMOVE DEAD 1REE5 (31; GRIND bNMP 1, BELOW EXISTI MARY K. CRITES '.(ALYZI !Irl'i � SITE DEMOLITION PLAN L-101 LANDSCAPE SITE PLAN KERN KEY NEW CONCRETE TURF GRASS RESTORATION CONCRETE PAVERS NEW ASPHALT SURFACE ❑TOPSOIL RESTORATION NORTH 0 20 4D BD 80 ket 1 - 20 SITE PLAN KEYNOTES AS INDICATED BY: 1. ACCESSIBLE RAMP - PARALLEL 2. ACCESSIBLE CURB RAMP 3. ACCESSIBLE STRAIGHT RAMP AB SIGNACE 1. XSTIN CONCRETE G CRETECURB/RETAINING WALL 6. NEW (SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL J. CONCRETE CURB 8. SERRATED CONCRETE CURB 9. CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERZ 10. NEW STEPS AND LANDING 11. HANDRMLS AREA 13. PERFORATED SECUSE"CERITY/SCREEN FENCE 14. EXISTING HARDSCAPE 16. EXISTING UTILITY -LIGHTING 16. EXISTING UTU1Y-IRRIGATION . CENTERLINE OF DRAINAGE SWALE 18 AGING 19. EPRTH BE 29. P—TING BED 21, LIMITS OF DISTURBANCE 22. MATCHUNE n HARDSCAPE REFERENCE PLAN 0 10 20 30 40 reel 1"=10' HARDSCAPE REFERENCE PLAN 0 10 20 3a a0 rear r'=10 e�.orv.�e Poe.ec.� �n o ..1. HARDSCAPE KEY oox.aE1E stNow,E— a—eo .LL coeoa�e �sxe0 cw, 1 1/1 m a/4. 0u. \ e.e. awes .w,cK � Hero 3rcH0 Nz0 \ nsPen�. aHOsc.PE 3a, D— i m i 89 LF RET. WALL m + mm 4.0 I R7.5 a — O I m — R R 20.3 \ �@ _ a sLAYOUT PLAN: .8 '� \ 16.1 3.0 a NORTH RAMP AND SIDEWALK N 1� .8 m 5.1 17.0 / o m ao ao as tees 18.1 \ 15.0 13. m o r=ia 13.7 m 11.7 6 1 6.0 5.0 7.2 o N 3.2 O / M m /1 of 10 /m ` v 1.2 1.2 ` F Llllq/Tg 1 LAYOUT PLAN AT BUILDING NORTH o to Q ao 40 feet r=m 0 3 h� ryh 0 m";6 00�9h i-z.ex 11 n 0� 83.3Trr"F� a�83.32 e 833a FH h? e5ti P ,q0 0 L y h� is-1_Sx B 0 : ❑ y ❑ 8331 FF ❑ +83.11 IF EARTH BERM Cl IF S' �`+' ❑ 0.82 NG 0" ` 9 ❑ 81.4 81.31B 8 TR 81.2 ` 1.22 GENERAL NOTES A. THIS PLAN 15 BASED ON A SURVEY CONDUCTED BY HUOO-REED AND ASSOCIATES OF LUBBOCK, TE%A5. A Di PANCIES FOUNDEXISTING OR PROPOSED GRADES SHOULD BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION. OF THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT PRIOR TOCONSTRUCTIONWORK, 8. AN ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE SURVEY DAY BE PROVIDED TO AWARDED CONTRACTOR UPON WRITTEN REQUEST. A- ,'EARTHI I(/ 0h^ \\\+84,68 NO 6 LP / 2.J4 / O GRADING PLAN: /N (��pp� RAMP AND SIDEWALK �► AY L�MITg 0 1O 40 30 40 reel 10. KEY FOR GRADE SYMBOLS PROPOSED GRADES EXISTING GRADES �84.5 TR -TREE �Q Qy Jpe84.5 BIG - NATURAL GRADE G G'J 4.5 EP - EDGE OF PAVEMENT 1`6^�QO�� 5P� OF ot�0 4V ",,P 4.5 SW -SIDEWALK h6Q ��p�.`�h G2`�y\04�W50QOaQ GUT- GUTTER %00p�F4�yQ4.5 �84.5 CRB - CURB S= 5 * �84.5 LP - LIGHT POLE DIRECTION AND PROPOSED SLOPE VALUE �84.5 QC - QUICK COUPLER �84.5 FF - FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION 84.5 FF- -FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION TO BE VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR GRADING PLAN AT BUILDING NORTH► 0 10 40 Co 40 11 10 - 1 PLANTING PLAN NORTH G 10 40 3D 40 ft,. PLANTING NOTES A. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO THE CONTRACT AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR REQUIREMENTS NOT USTED HEREIN. B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE AND VERIFY THE EXISTENCE OF ALL UTILITIES PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. C. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLY PLANT MATERIALS IN QUANTITIES SUFFICIENT TO COMPLETE THE PLANTING PLAN SHOWN ON ALL DRAWINGS. PLANT COUNTS AND SQUARE FOOTAGES ARE PROVIDED AS A COURTESY ONLY, 0 ALL PLANT MATERIAL SHALL CONFORM TO THE GUIDELINES ESTABLISHED BY THE CURRENT AMERICAN STANDARD FOR NURSERY STOCK, PUBLISHED BY THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF NURSERYMEN OR EQUIVALENT, E. IN THE CASE OF A DISCREPANCY BETWEEN THE CONTAINER SIZE CALLED OUT IN PLANT LIST AND THE CALIPER AND HEIGHT OF PUNT MATERIAL. THE SPECIFIED TREE MUST MEET THE CALIPER AND HEIGHT REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED, EVEN IF A LARGER DONTANER SIZE IS REQUIRED TO MEET THESE SPECIFICATIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. F. ALL PLANTS TO BE GROWN AS SPECIFIED. NO CONTAINER GROWN STOCK WILL BE ACCEPTED IF IT IS ROOT BOUND. G. WITH CONTAINER GROWN STOCK, THE CONTAINER SHALL BE REMOVED AND THE PUNT BALL SHALL BE CUT THROUGH THE SURFACE IN TWO VERTICAL LOCATIONS. H. UrvESCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE THE SOURCE OF AND SELECT ALL PUNTS FOR APPROVPL BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. I. ALL PLANT MATERIALS SHALL BE APPROVED PRIOR TO DELIVERY AT THE NURSERIES OR SUPPLIERS BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. J. IF ANY SOURCE OF PLANTS IS LOCATED FURTHER THAN 30 MILES FROM THE PROTECT SITE THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO PAY TIME AND TRAVEL EXPENSES INCURRED BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT, K. ALL PLANTS TAGGED AS APPROVED AT NURSERY OR SUPPLIER SHALL EAR THE SAME TAG WHEN DELIVERED ON SITE. L, THE RIGHT TO REJECT PLANT MATERIALS DELIVERED TO THE SITE THAT DO NOT BEAR APPROVAL TAGS IS RESERVED BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT, M. IN AREAS WHERE PAVING SUBGRADES AND BUILDING PADS EXTEND INTO PUNT BED AREAS, SIX INCH HOLES SHALL BE DRILLED EVERY 3 FEET AND RULED WITH 1 INCH DIAMETER GRAVEL TO PROVIDE PERCOLATION AND DRAINAGE FOR THE PLANTING BED, HOLES SHALL BE DRILLED THROUGH IMPROVED SUBGRADES ITO EXISTING SITE SOILS BUT NO DEEPER THAN FOUR FEET, N. PLANTING BEDS AND AREAS TO RECEIVE COMPOST AND SOIL AMENDMENTS AS RECOMMENDED BY SOIL SECRETS' REPRESENTATIVE, BOB MATTEON. REFER TO WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS. MATERIALS SHALL BE INCORPORATED INTO THE SOIL TO A DEPTH OF 12 INCHES. 0. ALL FINAL PLANTING BED GRADES IN AREAS WHERE ORGANIC AND/OR INORGANIC MULCH IS BEING APPLIED SHOULD BE 3 INCHES BELOW ADJACENT HARD SURFACES, P. NO PLANT SHALL BE PUT INTO THE GROUND BEFORE ROUGH GRADING IS COMPLETE AND APPROVED BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. Q. ALL PLANTS SHALL BEAR THE SAME RELATIONSHIP TO FINISHED GRADE AS THE PLANTS ORIGINAL GRADE BEFORE DIGGING OR AS ESTPBLISHED IN CONTAINER. R. ALL PLANTS SHALL BE INSTALLED AS PER DETAILS. S. ALL PLANTS SHALL BE WATERED THOROUGHLY TWICE DURING THE FIRST 24 HOUR PERIOD AFTER PUNTING. ALL PUNTS SHALL THEN BE WATERED WEEKLY OR MORE OFTEN AS NEEDED DURING THE FIRST GROWING SEASON, T. ALL PLANTING BEDS TO RECEIVE ORGANIC AND/OR INORGANIC MULCH MATERIALS AS NOTED ON PLANS. U. THE DAY PRIOR TO PLANTING, THE LOCATION OF ALL TREES AND SHRUBS SHALL BE STAKED FOR APPROVAL BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. V. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PRUNE ALL BRANCHES 6 FEET ABOVE FINISH GRADE ON ALL DECIDUOUS TREES 12 FEET OR TALLER. PLANT SCHEDULE (COMBINED( a s eo �. Pines earl. / Phan FHe Ulmua pmvlP011a 'L--- elm' / cI — elm Tree B < B 5 5' caliper 5 5d� eoT cAL rvnne MON NAH1e SIZE BIY Q eialllm la pulcFella / FFewFael I gal Ya Heaperalee pmviPlara /Iced Yacca 5 gal I5 OHmnaerarrwra mnmemalra /TaBoka Daley 1 gal 5e 0 1-- ainomb 'bracllllmrn' / Maldm bra» I'd I� Perowkla atrlplklialk / FuaNm Saga I gol 16 ORawnmirus otticl-1. 'A, / A, Rosemary I gal 6 O 5alvla g-'I —Jo BrIgM Red' / PUWmn Sage I gal 14 +Q warm . Auwmn Loy' / Auwmn Lay Sedan I gal It Ostrpa wndimcea / Stlpa 5ra» 1 ga1 64 Yrccq rocwrlolra 'Golm bvmd' / Sott Last Yvcw 5 gal 2D -nrnuda Turf Grass SDd 11,110 Ef W +� 1 PLANTING PLAN �� 0 10 40 30 401eet —lu PLANTING (VOTES A. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO THE CONTRACT AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR REQUIREMENTS NOT LISTED HEREIN. B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE AND VERIFY THE EXISTENCE OF ALL UTILITIES PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. C. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLY PLANT MATERIALS IN QUANTITIES SUFFICIENT TO COMPLETE THE PLANTING PLAN SHOWN ON ALL DRAWINGS, PLANT COUNTS AND SQUARE FOOTAGES ARE PROVIDED AS A COURTESY ONLY, D. ALL PLANT MATERIAL SHALL CONFORM TO THE GUIDELINES ESTABLISHED BY THE CURRENT AMERICAN STANDARD FOR NURSERY STOCK, PUBLISHED BY THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF NURSERYMEN OR EQUNALENT. E. IN THE CASE OF A DISCREPANCY BETWEEN THE CONTAINER SIZE CALLED OUT IN PLANT LIST AND THE CALIPER AND HEIGHT OF PLANT MATERIAL, THE SPECIFIED TREE MUST MEET THE CALIPER AND HEIGHT REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED, EVEN IF A LARGER CONTAINER SIZE IS REQUIRED TO MEET THESE SPECIFICATIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER, F. ALL PLANTS TO BE GROWN AS SPECIFIED. NO CONTAINER GROWN STOCK WILL BE ACCEPTED IF IT IS ROOT BOUND. G. WITH CONTAINER GROWN STOCK, THE CONTAINER SHALL BE REMOVED AND THE PLANT BALL SHALL BE CUT THROUGH THE SURFACE IN TWO VERTICAL LOCATIONS. H. LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE THE SOURCE OF AND SELECT ALL PLANTS FOR APPROVAL BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. I. ALL PLANT MATERIALS SHALL BE APPROVED PRIOR TO DELIVERY AT THE NURSERIES OR SUPPLIERS BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. J. IF ANY SOURCE OF PLANTS IS LOCATED FURTHER THAN 30 MILES FROM THE PROJECT SITE THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO PAY TIME AND TRAVEL EXPENSES INCURRED BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. K. ALL PLANTS TAGGED AS APPROVED AT NURSERY OR SUPPLIER SHALL EAR THE SAME TAG WHEN DELIVERED ON SUE, L. THE RIGHT TO REJECT PLANT MATERIALS DELIVERED TO THE SITE THAT DO NOT BEAR APPROVAL TAGS IS RESERVED BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. M. IN AREAS WHERE PAVINDS G SUBGRADES AND BUILDING PAEXTEND INTO PLANT BED AREAS, SIX INCH HOLES SHALL BE DRILLED EVERY 3 FEET AND FILLED WITH 1 INCH DIAMETER GRAVEL TO PROVIDE PERCOLATION AND DRAINAGE FOR THE PLANTING BED. HOLES SHALL BE DRILLED THROUGH IMPROVED SUBGRADES ITO EXISTING SITE SOILS BUT NO DEEPER THAN FOUR FEET. N. PLANTING BEDS AND AREAS TO RECEIVE COMPOST AND SOIL AMENDMENTS AS RECOMMENDED BY "SOIL SECRETS' REPRESENTATIVE, BOB MATTEON. REFER TO WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS. MATERIALS SHALL BE INCORPORATED INTO THE SOIL TO A DEPTH OF 12 INCHES. O. ALL FINAL PUNTING BED GRADES IN AREAS WHERE ORGANIC AND/OR INORGANIC MULCH IS BEING APPLIED SHOULD BE 3 INCHES BELOW ADJACENT HARD SURFACES, P. NO PLANT SHALL BE PUT INTO THE GROUND BEFORE ROUGH GRADING IS COMPLETE AND APPROVED BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. Q. ALL PLANTS SHALL BEAR THE SAME RELATIONSHIP TO FINISHED GRADE AS THE PLANTS ORIGINAL GRADE BEFORE DIGGING OR AS ESTABLISHED IN CONTAINER, R. ALL PLANTS SHALL BE INSTALLED AS PER DETAILS. S. ALL PLANTS SHALL BE WATERED THOROUGHLY TAKE DURING THE FIRST 24 HOUR PERIOD AFTER PLANTING, ALL PLANTS SHALL THEN BE WATERED WEEKLY OR MORE OFTEN AS NEEDED DURING THE FIRST GROWING SEASON. T. ALL PLANTING BEDS TO RECEIVE ORGANIC AND/OR INORGANIC MULCH MATERIALS AS NOTED ON PLANS, U. THE DAY PRIOR TO PLANTING. THE LOCATION OF ALL TREES AND SHRUBS SHALL BE STAKED FOR APPROVAL BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. V. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PRUNE ALL BRANCHES 6 FEET ABOVE FINISH GRADE ON ALL DECIDUOUS TREES 12 FEET OR TALLER. PLANT SCHEDULE (COMBINED) eorAN cu rwMe / coMMON NA1-� o -T Ter Palm„ pall, / tn� P>Ino Ulmw pervlPalla 'Lawbark Elm'/ GHlneao Elm area s e s 3"callpx a 3 Rue`=—ANILAL NAME / eo ci�e QL[ Q 4+a111ardb pul<ft / 111-1 1 gal 35 Haeperaloe parviflora /Red Yucca a gal Ib MacKaermLFera kmace4Po11a / Ta —Daley I gal 68 0 Mmcantlws sHensls 'sracnnmus' / Malden Hass a gal 12 ReraVsua ao-ipuciveua / Rwsian sage 1 ga1 16 ORoemarr,w afflcHaiM -p• / ArP Pzosemvy 1 ga1 a O+ eaIVIP geggll •—Jo Erlcft Rod' / Artum sago 1 gal 14 �+ Sedan x 'AVWrm by' / Pukvnn by SONm I gal I'I O Stipa arvridYiacoa / Sklpa 6rws I gal 64 Yucca recurvlPolla 'Gala- board' /Solt Leaf Y�wa a gal 28 Bermuda TNrf Grass Sod 5,250 sf Topsotl Restoration 6" depth 3,245 sf n 11 )R7H 0 10 00 30 . feet 1-= 1P GENERAL NOTES FOR IRRIGATION IRRIGATION SCHEDULE 4101 ST 4 LED BY 1001N SLEEVE, 15"; F-N-ED AND -102 IRRI-N DRIP LINE - EE FURNISHED AND 1-1 WITH GNGR 1/ µ R , �-N.—BPa x N SEE CURS. a �1/r BULLNGSE ON ALL STEPS, NO S BEN xc Asrvoc AT ENDS EACH DE nsP u 3 peR WT07 o POcu END IMs 05o UN PIPE HANDRAIL. SEE SPECIRGATIONS ! Zn A ON SING SAN, EXTEND 12 IN _EL NO . N I .. p `-- 1 / i a Ll t - _ Pavlxc as occuxs. / INIMUM ° — ~ aTREAD 1-1/2- 11 x 1 1//2- Dw X 1R- SMOOTH STEEL DEPTH, x nNCONCRETE All o m wM M pER ro DG. i NTHE IGN SIRE.— C.- TMD MINI D 2. EXPANSION JONTSD 1aC Ex sION M ER a 10SIAB �s2SE �R NOE FRD ;I FTER C. TMUMH MINIMUM NEW DOE OF GUT ER. °THI TER IHHA°aISTINO OR o°°� XOlL ED E DL�R NDE FROM W EP PERPENDIDR R D DIR nDx OF R EL 0)245-4881 NO 3511 MEDIUM BROOM FINISH ED EQUAL SWEEP C1 CONCRETE JOINT AT EXISTING PAVING C2 CONCRETE CURB AND 18" GUTTER CONCRETE STAIRS C4CRETE AT STEPS, PH HANDRAIL AT CONCRETE STAIRSDUR To DIROTION of ,RgvEL 32 1313,13-03 , ,/r - ,'-R' 321613,13-01 - ,'-e' DETAIL -FILE , - 1'-a DETNL-FILE BWA ET `" PI CONCRETE PAwNG PawND. CONCRETE DNCR TE POUR aN '2T R SLGPE IIDE 1 EL I GN PLIS x. C. u EX"E GLm ""s:o�E PREPARED NATNE SOIL BACKFILL =III= 11=III-III—I — — —FF m_ yzo Muicx BlFJo PIPE HANDRAIL, DIAMETER E E O STEEL CONCRETE PAVING AT VERTICLE PLANE uMlxc ems FOA PulxTiEFlrvISEH IFlCanONs TOOLED CONTROL JOINT SAW(UT CONTROL JOINT COLOR qI X" TOoun EE Pis 3 DN, PRE -WRAPPED DRa,NwcE RADIUS 6�- CAULKED JO- SEE BE PER Y DAo'S 05TFMA5nC TO ttPICAL CONCRETE Paw ° wuRGEMEM DETAL. AIL r CovER of cftnvEL ALL AROUND, 0 ❑ a ' 17H 3 MINIMUM NEW siooP RE_TOOLED EDGE. F w I' TrP CONCRETE PAVING. 3° — r P1 N Nc qE E 'clll I�rl�l-1�I=III=III=1 — .^ III TERR _ _ U J FCAu, BACKER ROD. CAULKED CONSTRUCTION JOINT PAR-„_ AT SASE or PlEL umEH. " ou L AIL ;ZGE OIL MEDIUM BROGM FINISH CONCRETE AT STEPS, FILLER PER sPECIFlCATI0N5. MAX., SUESHE AT ONE EZ Two MINIMUM O4Ll'o1C. ENIARGEMEM DETAL COMPACTED NATIVE SOCOMPACTED IL RASE OPANUI-R BASE SWEEP PERPENDICULAR TO DIRCTION OF TRAVEL. ENLARGED TYPICAL CAULKED JOINT �1 TYPICAL CONCRETE PAVING JOINT DETAILS — —III— �� SECTION: SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL �� ELEVATION: S.E. STAIRS AND HANDRAIL �� DETAIL -FILE DOWELED CONSTRUCTION JOINT DEAIL-FILE -S, DETAIL -FILE A WDEW K , D WNX NB a S SURFACE TEITUIE OF PLARED SIDES MT WITH LIGHT BROOM FINISH [UNIT PAVERS I MATCH EXISTING PAVESTONE: CNY STONE COMBO ��% COLOR: CHARCOAL 4 Mix nWI � A r g ! THIN -SET MORTAR �asPHurnsUREaCVI' �asPHetUREacE 7 EXISTING L�fR e-a - e'-o' E 7 e4 xN. s e4Wa. - ' CACRSTEBASE MAT I"IVAIIE RY Em T CONCRETE RAMP >*m EXISTING GRANULAR BASE V A A VA//AA//AA �r-a-�. "'-"-� �R'-o• W,x.�RFRR TR Pws�R'-W W,x.� \%\\% %\\\\\\ II�II�II = EXIBTING \���� �jVA VAk�ll�ll�l� 11— coMPAcrED suecRnDE EXISTING SOIL -FIRM BY TAMPING A CONC. BASE 4 CONC. WINO 5 CONCRETE RAMP 1-1/2- IRRIGKTON SLEEVE " x ArR 0.WPpA' InvPuelwrvM nm we we ectos .! m s. cans amc a wulw ss✓xcc Iuv wr nu EAUS, A t4 wewoc rcxos A Al CONCRETE CURB RAMP A2 PARALLEL CURB RAMP �� NEW PAVERS ADJACENT TO EXISTING PAVERS DETAI-FILE B/R' - ,'-a D—L-FILE �J 1 -D DEruL-FILE 1/,. HARDSCAPE DETAILS 11 21 31 41 �Q 1 SCREEN FENCE -PANEL LAYOUT 3�, s- 1-m" DErML-FILL SCREEN FENCE DETAILS SCREEN FENCE -POST LAYOUT a'16. 32 REMOVE AFTER SUBSTANTUL COMPLETION IS APPROVED. APPROVED TREE WRAP WITH 30% OVERINP D ENDS TIED WITH TAPE. 3/4" DIAM. REINFORCED RUBBER HOSE LOOPED COMPLETELY AROUND TREE TRUNK DIAMETER WITH 2 STRANDS 12 GAUGE GALVANIZED WIRE THROUGH CENTER CONNECTING TO WOOD STAKES ¢ 3 Y LODGEPOLE PINE TREATED TREE w - STAKES. NOTCHED FOR WIRE ANCHOR AT LEAST 1TINTO UNDISTURBED GRADE w _ w - AT APPROXIMATELY 120 DEGREES APART. 9" WARNING TAPE TIED TO SUPPOR' WI - B" RAD. CLEAR OF MULCH AROUND TRUNK. Y DEPTH PREMIUM GRADE A CEDAR MULCH. NATIVE SOIL FILL. WATER SETTLE AND TAMP GENTLY TO ROVE AIR POCKETS WITHOUT _FACING SO PIN T ID TAG TO REMAIN UNTIL INSPECTED T AN APPROVED BY LANDSCAPE REMOVE AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION IS APPROVED. \� ® v REINFORCED RUBBER HOSE LOOPED COMPLETELY AROUND TREE TRUNK DIAMETER WITH 2 STRANDS 12 GAUGE ' GALVANIZED WIRE THROUGH CENTER CONNECTING TO WOOD STAKES a 3, Y LODGEPOLE PINE TREATED TREE STAKES, NOTCHED FOR WIRE. ANCHOR AT LEAST 12" INTO UNDISTURBED GRADE AT APPRO%IMATELY 120 DEGREES APART. 9" YELLOW WARNING TAPE RED TO SUPPORT WIRE B" RAN. CLEAR OF MULCH AROUND TRUNK. Y DEPTH PREMIUM GRADE A CEDAR MULCH. NATIVE SOIL FILL. WATER SETTLE AMC TAMP ✓-'- GENTLY TO REMOVE AIR POCKETS WITHOUT iir COMPACTING SOIL. - -IIAM D ICI - - -III—III—I� 1f DEEP SUB TAPERRADE D FORM PEDESTAL TO IILIII-__III— COMPACT SERBUNGDE TO PE FORM SHALL BE TO III -III -_III -III PREVENT SETTLING. PEDESTAL SHALL BE TREE iRPR DIAM E TAL TREE PIT DIAM 1T' DEEP OF TAPERED EA2iH. FINISH TOP 1.5 EE BALL ,pWA OF ROOTDALL TAPSRE IEARTH FINISH TOP 1.5 % TREE BALL VIAM OF SH OTELE TO SET 1" ABOVE ADJACENT, Y FINISH GRACE. N 1 DECIDUOUS TREE PLANTING A 2 EVERGREEN TREE PLANTING 3�a - 1'-e" DETAIL-RLL PLANTING DETAILS SUPPORT POSTS FOOTINGS: SCREEN WALL 1/r - I -a A.X GNTRUNK WELLr NATIVE SHRUB PLANTING v ONES C ADJACENT SIDEWALK -� ' WEST ELEVATION 1 REMOVATABILE PANEL El- FOR SERVICE ACCESS ii] IL I NORTH ELEVATION 1 I SOUTH ELEVATION 1 ELEVATIONS -SCREEN FENCE ,/,, - 1-1 DETAITTLE OR A THAN AT HASK." AWAY FNNM MULCH TO 2" G PTH AT Wr HNISNEO CRANE. 717-70 1� Y AT 1 GALLBN 2Y AT 3Y AT 15 GALLON SHRUB PLANTING 1 - 1'-0' SUROUNDING THAN IST EDNED GRADE Y FROM AT IlL MULLCH LTO Y DEPTH �� `fINI5HE0 GRADE. I Imo' PLANT NB TS AS NOTED EG BACKFlLL MIX, E ES AND SPEC IRCA7tONS�OT -NATIVE SOIL MI 329333.13-01